STMicroelectronics ST72521R9 Datasheet
Annonce
Annonce
ST72F521, ST72521B
80/64-PIN 8-BIT MCU WITH 32 TO 60K FLASH/ROM, ADC,
FIVE TIMERS, SPI, SCI, I
2
C, CAN INTERFACE
■
■
■
■
■
Memories
– 32K to 60K dual voltage High Density Flash
(HDFlash) or ROM with read-out protection capability. In-Application Programming and
In-Circuit Programming for HDFlash devices
– 1K to 2K RAM
– HDFlash endurance: 100 cycles, data retention: 20 years at 55°C
Clock, Reset And Supply Management
– Enhanced low voltage supervisor (LVD) for main supply and auxiliary voltage detector
(AVD) with interrupt capability
– Clock sources: crystal/ceramic resonator oscillators, internal RC oscillator and bypass for external clock
– PLL for 2x frequency multiplication
– Four power saving modes: Halt, Active-Halt,
Wait and Slow
Interrupt Management
– Nested interrupt controller
– 14 interrupt vectors plus TRAP and RESET
– Top Level Interrupt (TLI) pin
– 15 external interrupt lines (on 4 vectors)
Up to 64 I/O Ports
– 48 multifunctional bidirectional I/O lines
– 34 alternate function lines
– 16 high sink outputs
5 Timers
– Main Clock Controller with: Real time base,
Beep and Clock-out capabilities
– Configurable watchdog timer
– Two 16-bit timers with: 2 input captures, 2 output compares, external clock input on one timer, PWM and pulse generator modes
– 8-bit PWM Auto-Reload timer with: 2 input captures, 4 PWM outputs, output compare and time base interrupt, external clock with event detector
■
■
■
■
TQFP80
14 x 14
TQFP64
14 x 14
TQFP64
10 x 10
4 Communications Interfaces
– SPI synchronous serial interface
– SCI asynchronous serial interface
2
– I C multimaster interface
(SMbus V1.1 compliant)
– CAN interface (2.0B Passive)
Analog periperal (low current coupling)
– 10-bit ADC with 16 input robust input ports
Instruction Set
– 8-bit Data Manipulation
– 63 Basic Instructions
– 17 main Addressing Modes
– 8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Instruction
Development Tools
– Full hardware/software development package
– In-Circuit Testing capability
Device Summary
Features
Program memory - bytes
RAM (stack) - bytes
Operating Voltage
Temp. Range
Package
ST72F521(M/R/AR)9
Flash 60K
2048 (256)
TQFP80 14x14 (M),
TQFP64 14x14 (R),
TQFP64 10x10 (AR)
ST72F521(R/AR)6 ST72521B(M/R/AR)9
Flash 32K
1024 (256)
ROM 60K
2048 (256)
3.8V to 5.5V
up to -40°C to +125 °C
TQFP64 14x14 (R), TQFP64
10x10 (AR)
TQFP80 14x14 (M),
TQFP64 14x14 (R),
TQFP64 10x10 (AR)
ST72521B(R/AR)6
ROM 32K
1024 (256)
TQFP64 14x14 (R), TQFP64
10x10 (AR)
May 2005
Rev. 5
1/215
1
Table of Contents
Internal Low Voltage Detector (LVD) RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.7 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (EICR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2/215
1
Table of Contents
10.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC) . . 58
3/215
1
Table of Contents
4/215
Table of Contents
12.11COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5/215
Table of Contents
14 ST72521 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
14.2 DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION AND TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE . . . . . 203
215
6/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
1 INTRODUCTION
The ST72F521 and ST72521B devices are members of the ST7 microcontroller family designed for mid-range applications with a CAN bus interface
(Controller Area Network).
All devices are based on a common industrystandard 8-bit core, featuring an enhanced instruction set and are available with FLASH or ROM program memory.
Under software control, all devices can be placed in WAIT, SLOW, ACTIVE-HALT or HALT mode, reducing power consumption when the application is in idle or stand-by state.
The enhanced instruction set and addressing modes of the ST7 offer both power and flexibility to software developers, enabling the design of highly efficient and compact application code. In addition to standard 8-bit data management, all ST7 microcontrollers feature true bit manipulation, 8x8 unsigned multiplication and indirect addressing modes.
Related Documentation
AN1131: Migrating applications from ST72511/
311/314 to ST72521/321/324
Figure 1. Device Block Diagram
RESET
V
PP
TLI
V
SS
V
DD
EVD
OSC1
OSC2
8-BIT CORE
ALU
CONTROL
LVD
AVD
OSC
MCC/RTC/BEEP
PROGRAM
MEMORY
(32K - 60K Bytes)
RAM
(1024-2048 Bytes)
PA7:0
(8-bits)
PF7:0
(8-bits)
PE7:0
(8-bits)
PD7:0
(8-bits)
V
AREF
V
SSA
PORT F
TIMER A
BEEP
PORT E
CAN
SCI
PORT D
10-BIT ADC
WATCHDOG
I2C
PORT A
PORT B
PWM ART
PORT C
TIMER B
SPI
PORT G
1
PORT H
1
PB7:0
(8-bits)
PC7:0
(8-bits)
PG7:0
(8-bits)
PH7:0
(8-bits)
1
On some devices only, see Device Summary on page 1
7/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
2 PIN DESCRIPTION
Figure 2. 80-Pin TQFP 14x14 Package Pinout
8/215
(HS) PE4
(HS) PE5
(HS) PE6
(HS) PE7
PWM3 / PB0
PWM2 / PB1
PWM1 / PB2
PWM0 / PB3
PG0
PG1
PG2
PG3
ARTCLK / (HS) PB4
ARTIC1 / PB5
ARTIC2 / PB6
PB7
AIN0 / PD0
AIN1 / PD1
AIN2 / PD2
AIN3 / PD3
14
15
16
17
18
9
10
11
12
13
19
20
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2 ei2 ei3 ei1 ei0
45
44
43
42
41
49
48
47
46
56
55
54
53
60
59
58
57
52
51
50
V
SS_1
V
DD_1
PA3 (HS)
PA2
PA1
PA0
PC7 / SS / AIN15
PC6 / SCK /ICCCLK
PH3
PH2
PH1
PH0
PC5 / MOSI / AIN14
PC4 / MISO / ICCDATA
PC3 (HS) /ICAP1_B
PC2(HS) / ICAP2_B
PC1 / OCMP1_B / AIN13
PC0 / OCMP2_B /AIN12
VSS_0
VDD_0
(HS) 20mA high sink capability eix associated external interrupt vector
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
Figure 3. 64-Pin TQFP 14x14 and 10x10 Package Pinout
ST72F521, ST72521B
(HS) PE4
(HS) PE5
(HS) PE6
(HS) PE7
PWM3 / PB0
PWM2 / PB1
PWM1 / PB2
PWM0 / PB3
ARTCLK / (HS) PB4
ARTIC1 / PB5
ARTIC2 / PB6
PB7
AIN0 / PD0
AIN1 / PD1
AIN2 / PD2
AIN3 / PD3
3
4
1
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
48
2 47
46
5
6
7
8 ei2 ei0
45
44
43
42
41
9 40
10 39
11 ei3
38
12 37
13 36
14 35
15 ei1 34
16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
33
29 30 31 32
V
SS_1
V
DD_1
PA3 (HS)
PA2
PA1
PA0
PC7 / SS / AIN15
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK
PC5 / MOSI / AIN14
PC4 / MISO / ICCDATA
PC3 (HS) / ICAP1_B
PC2 (HS) / ICAP2_B
PC1 / OCMP1_B / AIN13
PC0 / OCMP2_B / AIN12
V
SS_0
V
DD_0
(HS) 20mA high sink capability eix associated external interrupt vector
9/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
For external pin connection guidelines, refer to See “ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS” on page 165.
Legend / Abbreviations for
Type: I = input, O = output, S = supply
Input level: A = Dedicated analog input
In/Output level: C = CMOS 0.3V
C
T
T
T
DD
= CMOS 0.3V
DD
/0.7V
DD
/0.7V
DD
with input trigger
= TTL 0.8V / 2V with Schmitt trigger
Output level: HS = 20mA high sink (on N-buffer only)
Port and control configuration:
– Input: float = floating, wpu = weak pull-up, int = interrupt
1)
, ana = analog
– Output: OD = open drain
2)
, PP = push-pull
Refer to “I/O PORTS” on page 47
for more details on the software configuration of the I/O ports.
The RESET configuration of each pin is shown in bold. This configuration is valid as long as the device is in reset state.
Table 1. Device Pin Description
Pin n° Level
Pin Name
Input
Port
Output
Main function
(after reset)
Alternate function
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
PE4 (HS)
PE5 (HS)
PE6 (HS)
PE7 (HS)
PB0/PWM3
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
6
7
6
7
PB1/PWM2
PB2/PWM1
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
8 8 PB3/PWM0 I/O C
T
9 PG0 I/O T
T
10 PG1 I/O T
T
11 PG2 I/O T
T
12 PG3 I/O T
T
13 9 PB4 (HS)/ARTCLK I/O C
T
14 10 PB5/ARTIC1
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
PB6/ARTIC2
PB7
PD0 /AIN0
PD1/AIN1
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
19
20
15
16
PD2/AIN2
PD3/AIN3
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
21 PG6 I/O T
T
22 PG7 I/O T
T
23 17 PD4/AIN4 I/O C
T
HS X X
HS X X
HS X X
HS X X
X ei 2
X
X
X
X X
X X ei 2 ei 2 ei2
X X
X X
HS X ei3
X
X
X
X X ei3 ei3 ei3
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X Port E4
X X Port E5
X X Port E6
X X Port E7
X X Port B0 PWM Output 3
X X Port B1 PWM Output 2
X X Port B2 PWM Output 1
X X Port B3 PWM Output 0
X X Port G0
X X Port G1
X X Port G2
X X Port G3
X X Port B4 PWM-ART External Clock
X X Port B5 PWM-ART Input Capture 1
X X Port B6 PWM-ART Input Capture 2
X X Port B7
X X X Port D0 ADC Analog Input 0
X X X Port D1 ADC Analog Input 1
X X X Port D2 ADC Analog Input 2
X X X Port D3 ADC Analog Input 3
X X Port G6
X X Port G7
X X X Port D4 ADC Analog Input 4
10/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Pin n°
Pin Name
Level
Input
Port
Output
Main function
(after reset)
Alternate function
24
25
26
27 21 V
AREF
28 22 V
SSA
29 23 V
DD_3
30 24 V
SS_3
S
S
S
31 PG4 I/O T
T
32 PG5 I/O T
T
33
34
35
36
37 29 PF4/OCMP1_A/AIN10 I/O C
T
38
39
40
41
25 PF0/MCO/AIN8
42 34 V
45
46
47
48
18
19
20
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
37
38
39
40
PD5/AIN5
PD6/AIN6
PD7/AIN7
PF1 (HS)/BEEP
PF2 (HS)
PF3/OCMP2_A/AIN9
PF5/ICAP2_A/AIN11
PF6 (HS)/ICAP1_A
PF7 (HS)/EXTCLK_A
V
DD_0
SS_0
PC2 (HS)/ICAP2_B
PC3 (HS)/ICAP1_B
PC4/MISO/ICCDATA
PC5/MOSI/AIN14
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I
I/O C
I/O C
I/O C
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
T
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
S
S
T
43 35 PC0/OCMP2_B/AIN12 I/O C
T
44 36 PC1/OCMP1_B/AIN13 I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
49 PH0 I/O T
T
50 PH1 I/O T
T
51 PH2 I/O T
T
HS
HS
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
HS X X
HS X X
X X
X X
HS X X
HS X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X ei1 ei1 ei1
X X X Port D5 ADC Analog Input 5
X X X Port D6 ADC Analog Input 6
X X X Port D7 ADC Analog Input 7
Analog Reference Voltage for ADC
Analog Ground Voltage
Digital Main Supply Voltage
Digital Ground Voltage
X X Port G4
X X Port G5
X X X Port F0
Main clock out (f
CPU
)
ADC Analog
Input 8
X X Port F1 Beep signal output
X X Port F2
X X X Port F3
Timer A Output Compare
2
ADC Analog
Input 9
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port F4
Port F5
Timer A Output Compare
1
Timer A Input
Capture 2
ADC Analog
Input 10
ADC Analog
Input 11
X X Port F6 Timer A Input Capture 1
X X Port F7
Timer A External Clock
Source
Digital Main Supply Voltage
Digital Ground Voltage
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port C0
Port C1
Timer B Output Compare
2
Timer B Output Compare
1
ADC Analog
Input 12
ADC Analog
Input 13
X X Port C2 Timer B Input Capture 2
X X Port C3 Timer B Input Capture 1
X
X
X
X
X
Port C4
Port C5
SPI Master In
/ Slave Out
Data
SPI Master
Out / Slave In
Data
ICC Data Input
ADC Analog
Input 14
X X Port H0
X X Port H1
X X Port H2
11/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Pin n°
Pin Name
Level
Input
Port
Output
Main function
(after reset)
Alternate function
52 PH3 I/O T
T
53
54
55
58
65
77
78
79
80
41
42
43
46
53
61
62
63
64
PC6/SCK/ICCCLK
PC7/SS/AIN15
PA0
56 44 PA1
57 45 PA2
PA3 (HS)
59 47 V
DD_1
60 48 V
SS_1
61 49 PA4 (HS)
62 50 PA5 (HS)
63 51 PA6 (HS)/SDAI
64 52 PA7 (HS)/SCLI
V
PP
/ ICCSEL
66 54 RESET
67 55 EVD
76 60 V
DD_2
PE0/TDO
PE1/RDI
PE2/CANTX
PE3/CANRX
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
S
S
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
68 56 TLI I C
T
69 PH4 I/O T
T
70 PH5 I/O T
T
71 PH6 I/O T
T
72 PH7 I/O T
T
73 57 V
SS_2
74 58 OSC2
3)
S
I/O
75 59 OSC1
3)
I
I
S
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
I/O C
T
X
X
X
HS X
HS
HS
HS
HS
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X ei0 ei0 ei0 ei0
X
X X Port H3
X
X
X
X
X
Port C6
Port C7
SPI Serial
Clock
ICC Clock
Output
Caution: Negative current injection not allowed on this pin
5)
SPI Slave
Select (active low)
ADC Analog
Input 15
X X Port A0
X X Port A1
X X Port A2
X X Port A3
Digital Main Supply Voltage
Digital Ground Voltage
X X Port A4
X X Port A5
T
T
Port A6 I
2
C Data
1)
Port A7 I
2
C Clock
1)
Must be tied low. In flash programming mode, this pin acts as the programming voltage input V
PP
. See
for more details. High voltage must not be applied to ROM devices
Top priority non maskable interrupt.
External voltage detector
Top level interrupt input pin
X X Port H4
X X Port H5
X X Port H6
X X Port H7
Digital Ground Voltage
Resonator oscillator inverter output
External clock input or Resonator oscillator inverter input
Digital Main Supply Voltage
X X Port E0 SCI Transmit Data Out
X X Port E1 SCI Receive Data In
Port E2 CAN Transmit Data Output
X X Port E3 CAN Receive Data Input
Notes:
1. In the interrupt input column, “eiX” defines the associated external interrupt vector. If the weak pull-up
12/215
ST72F521, ST72521B column (wpu) is merged with the interrupt column (int), then the I/O configuration is pull-up interrupt input, else the configuration is floating interrupt input.
2. In the open drain output column, “T” defines a true open drain I/O (P-Buffer and protection diode to V
DD
are not implemented). See See “I/O PORTS” on page 47. and Section 12.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTER-
for more details.
3. OSC1 and OSC2 pins connect a crystal/ceramic resonator, or an external source to the on-chip oscil-
lator; see Section 1 INTRODUCTION
and Section 12.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
for more details.
4. On the chip, each I/O port may have up to 8 pads. Pads that are not bonded to external pins are in input pull-up configuration after reset. The configuration of these pads must be kept at reset state to avoid added current consumption.
13/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
3 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP
As shown in
, the MCU is capable of addressing 64K bytes of memories and I/O registers.
The available memory locations consist of 128 bytes of register locations, up to 2Kbytes of RAM and up to 60Kbytes of user program memory. The
RAM space includes up to 256 bytes for the stack from 0100h to 01FFh.
The highest address bytes contain the user reset and interrupt vectors.
Figure 4. Memory Map
0000h
HW Registers
(see
)
007Fh
0080h
RAM
(2048 or 1024 Bytes)
087Fh
0880h
0FFFh
1000h
Reserved
Program Memory
(60K or 32K)
FFDFh
FFE0h
Interrupt & Reset Vectors
(see
FFFFh
IMPORTANT: Memory locations marked as “Reserved” must never be accessed. Accessing a reseved area can have unpredictable effects on the device.
Related Documentation
AN 985: Executing Code in ST7 RAM
0080h
Short Addressing
RAM (zero page)
00FFh
0100h
256 Bytes Stack
01FFh
0200h or 047Fh or 067Fh or 087Fh
16-bit Addressing
RAM
1000h
60 KBytes
8000h
32 KBytes
FFFFh
14/215
Table 2. Hardware Register Map
Address Block
Register
Label
000Ch
000Dh
000Eh
000Fh
0010h
0011h
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0000h
0001h
0002h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
0007h
0008h
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
001Ch
001Dh
001Eh
001Fh
0020h
0021h
0022h
0023h
Port A
Port B
Port C
Port D
Port E
Port F
Port G
2)
Port H
2)
I
2
C
SPI
PEDR
PEDDR
PEOR
PFDR
PFDDR
PFOR
PGDR
PGDDR
PGOR
PHDR
PHDDR
PHOR
I2CCR
I2CSR1
I2CSR2
I2CCCR
I2COAR1
I2COAR2
I2CDR
PADR
PADDR
PAOR
PBDR
PBDDR
PBOR
PCDR
PCDDR
PCOR
PDDR
PDDDR
PDOR
SPIDR
SPICR
SPICSR
Register Name
Port A Data Register
Port A Data Direction Register
Port A Option Register
Port B Data Register
Port B Data Direction Register
Port B Option Register
Port C Data Register
Port C Data Direction Register
Port C Option Register
Port D Data Register
Port D Data Direction Register
Port D Option Register
Port E Data Register
Port E Data Direction Register
Port E Option Register
Port F Data Register
Port F Data Direction Register
Port F Option Register
Port G Data Register
Port G Data Direction Register
Port G Option Register
Port H Data Register
Port H Data Direction Register
Port H Option Register
I
2
C Control Register
I
I
I
I
2
2
C Status Register 1
2
C Status Register 2
2
C Clock Control Register
C Own Address Register 1
I
2
C Own Address Register2
I
2
C Data Register
Reserved Area (2 Bytes)
SPI Data I/O Register
SPI Control Register
SPI Control/Status Register
ST72F521, ST72521B
Reset
Status
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
1)
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
Remarks
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
2)
R/W
2)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W xxh
0xh
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
15/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
0024h
0025h
0026h
0027h
0028h
0029h
002Ah
002Bh
002Ch
002Dh
002Eh to
0030h
0031h
0032h
0033h
0034h
0035h
0036h
0037h
0038h
0039h
003Ah
003Bh
003Ch
003Dh
003Eh
003Fh
0040h
0041h
0042h
0043h
0044h
0045h
0046h
0047h
0048h
0049h
004Ah
004Bh
004Ch
004Dh
004Eh
004Fh
Address Block
Register
Label
ITC
ISPR0
ISPR1
ISPR2
ISPR3
EICR
FLASH FCSR
WATCHDOG WDGCR
MCC
SICSR
MCCSR
MCCBCR
Register Name
Reset
Status
Remarks
Interrupt Software Priority Register 0
Interrupt Software Priority Register 1
Interrupt Software Priority Register 2
Interrupt Software Priority Register 3
External Interrupt Control Register
FFh
FFh
FFh
FFh
00h
Flash Control/Status Register
Watchdog Control Register
00h
7Fh
R/W
R/W
System Integrity Control/Status Register
Main Clock Control / Status Register
Main Clock Controller: Beep Control Register
000x 000x b R/W
00h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TIMER A
TIMER B
TACR2
TACR1
TACSR
TAIC1HR
TAIC1LR
TAOC1HR
TAOC1LR
TACHR
TACLR
TAACHR
TAACLR
TAIC2HR
TAIC2LR
TAOC2HR
TAOC2LR
TBCR2
TBCR1
TBCSR
TBIC1HR
TBIC1LR
TBOC1HR
TBOC1LR
TBCHR
TBCLR
TBACHR
TBACLR
TBIC2HR
TBIC2LR
TBOC2HR
TBOC2LR
Reserved Area (3 Bytes)
Timer A Control Register 2
Timer A Control Register 1
Timer A Control/Status Register
Timer A Input Capture 1 High Register
Timer A Input Capture 1 Low Register
Timer A Output Compare 1 High Register
Timer A Output Compare 1 Low Register
Timer A Counter High Register
Timer A Counter Low Register
Timer A Alternate Counter High Register
Timer A Alternate Counter Low Register
Timer A Input Capture 2 High Register
Timer A Input Capture 2 Low Register
Timer A Output Compare 2 High Register
Timer A Output Compare 2 Low Register
Reserved Area (1 Byte)
Timer B Control Register 2
Timer B Control Register 1
Timer B Control/Status Register
Timer B Input Capture 1 High Register
Timer B Input Capture 1 Low Register
Timer B Output Compare 1 High Register
Timer B Output Compare 1 Low Register
Timer B Counter High Register
Timer B Counter Low Register
Timer B Alternate Counter High Register
Timer B Alternate Counter Low Register
Timer B Input Capture 2 High Register
Timer B Input Capture 2 Low Register
Timer B Output Compare 2 High Register
Timer B Output Compare 2 Low Register
00h
00h xxxx x0xx b xxh xxh
80h
00h
FFh
FCh
FFh
FCh xxh xxh
80h
00h
00h
00h xxxx x0xx b xxh xxh
80h
00h
FFh
FCh
FFh
FCh xxh xxh
80h
00h
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
16/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Address
005Ah
005Bh
005Ch
005Dh
005Eh
005Fh
0060h to
006Fh
0070h
0071h
0072h
0050h
0051h
0052h
0053h
0054h
0055h
0056h
0057h
0058h
0059h
0073h
0074h
0075h
0076h
0077h
0078h
0079h
007Ah
007Bh
007Ch
007Dh
007Eh
007Fh
Block
SCI
CAN
ADC
PWM ART
Register
Label
SCISR
SCIDR
SCIBRR
SCICR1
SCICR2
SCIERPR
SCIETPR
Register Name
SCI Status Register
SCI Data Register
SCI Baud Rate Register
SCI Control Register 1
SCI Control Register 2
SCI Extended Receive Prescaler Register
Reserved area
SCI Extended Transmit Prescaler Register
CANISR
CANICR
CANCSR
CANBRPR
CANBTR
CANPSR
ADCCSR
ADCDRH
ADCDRL
CAN Interrupt Status Register
CAN Interrupt Control Register
CAN Control / Status Register
CAN Baud Rate Prescaler Register
CAN Bit Timing Register
CAN Page Selection Register
First address to
Last address of CAN page x
Control/Status Register
Data High Register
Data Low Register
Legend: x=undefined, R/W=read/write
Reserved Area (2 Bytes)
PWMDCR3
PWMDCR2
PWMDCR1
PWMDCR0
PWMCR
ARTCSR
ARTCAR
ARTARR
ARTICCSR
ARTICR1
ARTICR2
PWM AR Timer Duty Cycle Register 3
PWM AR Timer Duty Cycle Register 2
PWM AR Timer Duty Cycle Register 1
PWM AR Timer Duty Cycle Register 0
PWM AR Timer Control Register
Auto-Reload Timer Control/Status Register
Auto-Reload Timer Counter Access Register
Auto-Reload Timer Auto-Reload Register
AR Timer Input Capture Control/Status Reg.
AR Timer Input Capture Register 1
AR Timer Input Capture Register 1
Reserved Area (2 Bytes)
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
Reset
Status
Remarks
C0h xxh
00h x000 0000b
00h
00h
---
00h
Read Only
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00h
00h
00h
00h
23h
00h
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
See CAN
Description
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read Only
Read Only
Notes:
1. The contents of the I/O port DR registers are readable only in output configuration. In input configuration, the values of the I/O pins are returned instead of the DR register contents.
2. The bits associated with unavailable pins must always keep their reset value.
17/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
4 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
4.1 Introduction
The ST7 dual voltage High Density Flash
(HDFlash) is a non-volatile memory that can be electrically erased as a single block or by individual sectors and programmed on a Byte-by-Byte basis using an external V
PP
supply.
The HDFlash devices can be programmed and erased off-board (plugged in a programming tool) or on-board using ICP (In-Circuit Programming) or
IAP (In-Application Programming).
The array matrix organisation allows each sector to be erased and reprogrammed without affecting other sectors.
). Each of these sectors can be erased independently to avoid unnecessary erasing of the whole Flash memory when only a partial erasing is required.
The first two sectors have a fixed size of 4 Kbytes
(see Figure 5 ). They are mapped in the upper part
of the ST7 addressing space so the reset and interrupt vectors are located in Sector 0 (F000h-
FFFFh).
Table 3. Sectors available in Flash devices
Flash Size (bytes)
4K
8K
> 8K
Available Sectors
Sector 0
Sectors 0,1
Sectors 0,1, 2
4.2 Main Features
■
■
■
■
Three Flash programming modes:
– Insertion in a programming tool. In this mode, all sectors including option bytes can be programmed or erased.
– ICP (In-Circuit Programming). In this mode, all sectors including option bytes can be programmed or erased without removing the device from the application board.
– IAP (In-Application Programming) In this mode, all sectors except Sector 0, can be programmed or erased without removing the device from the application board and while the application is running.
ICT (In-Circuit Testing) for downloading and executing user application test patterns in RAM
Read-out protection
Register Access Security System (RASS) to prevent accidental programming or erasing
4.3.1 Read-out Protection
Read-out protection, when selected, provides a protection against Program Memory content extraction and against write access to Flash memory. Even if no protection can be considered as totally unbreakable, the feature provides a very high level of protection for a general purpose microcontroller.
In flash devices, this protection is removed by reprogramming the option. In this case, the entire program memory is first automatically erased and the device can be reprogrammed.
Read-out protection selection depends on the device type:
– In Flash devices it is enabled and removed through the FMP_R bit in the option byte.
– In ROM devices it is enabled by mask option specified in the Option List.
Note: In flash devices, the LVD is not supported if read-out protection is enabled.
4.3 Structure
The Flash memory is organised in sectors and can be used for both code and data storage.
Depending on the overall Flash memory size in the microcontroller device, there are up to three user
Figure 5. Memory Map and Sector Address
4K 8K 10K 16K
1000h
3FFFh
7FFFh
9FFFh
BFFFh
D7FFh
DFFFh
EFFFh
FFFFh
2 Kbytes
24K 32K 48K 60K
8 Kbytes 16 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
24 Kbytes 40 Kbytes 52 Kbytes
FLASH
MEMORY SIZE
SECTOR 2
SECTOR 1
SECTOR 0
18/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (Cont’d)
4.4 ICC Interface
ICC needs a minimum of 4 and up to 6 pins to be connected to the programming tool (see
).
These pins are:
– RESET: device reset
– V
SS
: device power supply ground
Figure 6. Typical ICC Interface
PROGRAMMING TOOL
(See Note 3)
OPTIONAL
(See Note 4)
– ICCCLK: ICC output serial clock pin
– ICCDATA: ICC input/output serial data pin
– ICCSEL/V
PP
: programming voltage
– OSC1(or OSCIN): main clock input for external source (optional)
– V
DD
: application board power supply (option-
, Note 3)
ICC CONNECTOR
ICC Cable
APPLICATION BOARD
ICC CONNECTOR
HE10 CONNECTOR TYPE
9 7 5 3
10 8 6 4
1
2
APPLICATION
RESET SOURCE
See Note 2
10k
Ω
APPLICATION
POWER SUPPLY
C
L2
C
L1
See Note 1
APPLICATION
I/O
ST7
Notes:
1. If the ICCCLK or ICCDATA pins are only used as outputs in the application, no signal isolation is necessary. As soon as the Programming Tool is plugged to the board, even if an ICC session is not in progress, the ICCCLK and ICCDATA pins are not available for the application. If they are used as inputs by the application, isolation such as a serial resistor has to implemented in case another device forces the signal. Refer to the Programming
Tool documentation for recommended resistor values.
2. During the ICC session, the programming tool must control the RESET pin. This can lead to conflicts between the programming tool and the application reset circuit if it drives more than 5mA at high level (push pull output or pull-up resistor<1K).
A schottky diode can be used to isolate the application RESET circuit in this case. When using a classical RC network with R>1K or a reset management IC with open drain output and pull-up resistor>1K, no additional components are needed.
In all cases the user must ensure that no external reset is generated by the application during the
ICC session.
3. The use of Pin 7 of the ICC connector depends on the Programming Tool architecture. This pin must be connected when using most ST Programming Tools (it is used to monitor the application power supply). Please refer to the Programming
Tool manual.
4. Pin 9 has to be connected to the OSC1 or OS-
CIN pin of the ST7 when the clock is not available in the application or if the selected clock option is not programmed in the option byte. ST7 devices with multi-oscillator capability need to have OSC2 grounded in this case.
19/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (Cont’d)
4.5 ICP (In-Circuit Programming)
To perform ICP the microcontroller must be switched to ICC (In-Circuit Communication) mode by an external controller or programming tool.
Depending on the ICP code downloaded in RAM,
Flash memory programming can be fully customized (number of bytes to program, program locations, or selection serial communication interface for downloading).
When using an STMicroelectronics or third-party programming tool that supports ICP and the specific microcontroller device, the user needs only to implement the ICP hardware interface on the ap-
plication board (see Figure 6 ). For more details on
the pin locations, refer to the device pinout description.
possible to download code from the SPI, SCI, USB or CAN interface and program it in the Flash. IAP mode can be used to program any of the Flash sectors except Sector 0, which is write/erase protected to allow recovery in case errors occur during the programming operation.
4.7 Related Documentation
For details on Flash programming and ICC protocol, refer to the ST7 Flash Programming Reference Manual and to the ST7 ICC Protocol Reference Manual .
4.7.1 Register Description
FLASH CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (FCSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
4.6 IAP (In-Application Programming)
This mode uses a BootLoader program previously stored in Sector 0 by the user (in ICP mode or by plugging the device in a programming tool).
This mode is fully controlled by user software. This allows it to be adapted to the user application, (user-defined strategy for entering programming mode, choice of communications protocol used to fetch the data to be stored, etc.). For example, it is
7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
This register is reserved for use by Programming
Tool software. It controls the Flash programming and erasing operations.
Figure 7. Flash Control/Status Register Address and Reset Value
Address
(Hex.)
0029h
Register
Label
FCSR
Reset Value
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
20/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
5 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This CPU has a full 8-bit architecture and contains six internal registers allowing efficient 8-bit data manipulation.
5.2 MAIN FEATURES
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enable executing 63 basic instructions
Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply
17 main addressing modes (with indirect addressing mode)
Two 8-bit index registers
16-bit stack pointer
Low power HALT and WAIT modes
Priority maskable hardware interrupts
Non-maskable software/hardware interrupts
5.3 CPU REGISTERS
The 6 CPU registers shown in
are not present in the memory mapping and are accessed by specific instructions.
Accumulator (A)
The Accumulator is an 8-bit general purpose register used to hold operands and the results of the arithmetic and logic calculations and to manipulate data.
Index Registers (X and Y)
These 8-bit registers are used to create effective addresses or as temporary storage areas for data manipulation. (The Cross-Assembler generates a precede instruction (PRE) to indicate that the following instruction refers to the Y register.)
The Y register is not affected by the interrupt automatic procedures.
Program Counter (PC)
The program counter is a 16-bit register containing the address of the next instruction to be executed by the CPU. It is made of two 8-bit registers PCL
(Program Counter Low which is the LSB) and PCH
(Program Counter High which is the MSB).
Figure 8. CPU Registers
7 0
RESET VALUE = XXh
7 0
RESET VALUE = XXh
7 0
ACCUMULATOR
X INDEX REGISTER
Y INDEX REGISTER
15 PCH 8
RESET VALUE = XXh
7 PCL
0
RESET VALUE = RESET VECTOR @ FFFEh-FFFFh
7
1
RESET VALUE = 1
1 I1 H I0 N Z
1 1 X 1 X X X
0
C
15 8 7 0
PROGRAM COUNTER
CONDITION CODE REGISTER
STACK POINTER
RESET VALUE = STACK HIGHER ADDRESS
X = Undefined Value
21/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont’d)
Condition Code Register (CC)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 111x1xxx
7
1 1 I1 H I0 N Z
0
C
The 8-bit Condition Code register contains the interrupt masks and four flags representative of the result of the instruction just executed. This register can also be handled by the PUSH and POP instructions.
These bits can be individually tested and/or controlled by specific instructions.
Arithmetic Management Bits
Bit 4 = H Half carry.
This bit is set by hardware when a carry occurs between bits 3 and 4 of the ALU during an ADD or
ADC instructions. It is reset by hardware during the same instructions.
0: No half carry has occurred.
1: A half carry has occurred.
This bit is tested using the JRH or JRNH instruction. The H bit is useful in BCD arithmetic subroutines.
Bit 2 = N Negative.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It is representative of the result sign of the last arithmetic, logical or data manipulation. It’s a copy of the result 7 th
bit.
0: The result of the last operation is positive or null.
1: The result of the last operation is negative
(i.e. the most significant bit is a logic 1).
This bit is accessed by the JRMI and JRPL instructions.
Bit 1 = Z Zero.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. This bit indicates that the result of the last arithmetic, logical or data manipulation is zero.
0: The result of the last operation is different from zero.
1: The result of the last operation is zero.
This bit is accessed by the JREQ and JRNE test instructions.
Bit 0 = C Carry/borrow.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware and software. It indicates an overflow or an underflow has occurred during the last arithmetic operation.
0: No overflow or underflow has occurred.
1: An overflow or underflow has occurred.
This bit is driven by the SCF and RCF instructions and tested by the JRC and JRNC instructions. It is also affected by the “bit test and branch”, shift and rotate instructions.
Interrupt Management Bits
Bit 5,3 = I1, I0 Interrupt
The combination of the I1 and I0 bits gives the current interrupt software priority.
Interrupt Software Priority
Level 0 (main)
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3 (= interrupt disable)
I1
1
0
0
1
I0
0
1
0
1
These two bits are set/cleared by hardware when entering in interrupt. The loaded value is given by the corresponding bits in the interrupt software priority registers (IxSPR). They can be also set/ cleared by software with the RIM, SIM, IRET,
HALT, WFI and PUSH/POP instructions.
See the interrupt management chapter for more details.
22/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont’d)
Stack Pointer (SP)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 01 FFh
15
0
7
0
SP7 SP6
0
SP5
0 0
SP4 SP3
0 0
8
1
0
SP2 SP1 SP0
The Stack Pointer is a 16-bit register which is always pointing to the next free location in the stack.
It is then decremented after data has been pushed onto the stack and incremented before data is popped from the stack (see
Since the stack is 256 bytes deep, the 8 most significant bits are forced by hardware. Following an
MCU Reset, or after a Reset Stack Pointer instruction (RSP), the Stack Pointer contains its reset value (the SP7 to SP0 bits are set) which is the stack higher address.
Figure 9. Stack Manipulation Example
CALL
Subroutine
Interrupt
Event
@ 0100h
PUSH Y
The least significant byte of the Stack Pointer
(called S) can be directly accessed by a LD instruction.
Note: When the lower limit is exceeded, the Stack
Pointer wraps around to the stack upper limit, without indicating the stack overflow. The previously stored information is then overwritten and therefore lost. The stack also wraps in case of an underflow.
The stack is used to save the return address during a subroutine call and the CPU context during an interrupt. The user may also directly manipulate the stack by means of the PUSH and POP instructions. In the case of an interrupt, the PCL is stored at the first location pointed to by the SP. Then the other registers are stored in the next locations as
.
– When an interrupt is received, the SP is decremented and the context is pushed on the stack.
– On return from interrupt, the SP is incremented and the context is popped from the stack.
A subroutine call occupies two locations and an interrupt five locations in the stack area.
POP Y IRET RET or RSP
SP
SP
@ 01FFh
PCH
PCL
CC
A
X
PCH
PCL
PCH
PCL
Stack Higher Address = 01FFh
Stack Lower Address = 0100h
SP
Y
CC
A
X
PCH
PCL
PCH
PCL
SP
CC
A
X
PCH
PCL
PCH
PCL
SP
PCH
PCL
SP
23/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
6 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT
The device includes a range of utility features for securing the application in critical situations (for example in case of a power brown-out), and reducing the number of external components. An
overview is shown in Figure 11 .
For more details, refer to dedicated parametric section.
6.1 PHASE LOCKED LOOP
If the clock frequency input to the PLL is in the range 2 to 4 MHz, the PLL can be used to multiply the frequency by two to obtain an f
OSC2
of 4 to 8
MHz. The PLL is enabled by option byte. If the PLL is disabled, then f
OSC2 =
f
OSC
/2.
Caution: The PLL is not recommended for appli-
cations where timing accuracy is required. See
“PLL Characteristics” on page 177.
Main features
■ Optional PLL for multiplying the frequency by 2
(not to be used with internal RC oscillator)
■
■
Reset Sequence Manager (RSM)
Multi-Oscillator Clock Management (MO)
■
– 5 Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators
– 1 Internal RC oscillator
System Integrity Management (SI)
– Main supply Low voltage detection (LVD)
– Auxiliary Voltage detector (AVD) with interrupt capability for monitoring the main supply or the EVD pin
Figure 10. PLL Block Diagram f
OSC
PLL x 2
/ 2
0
1 f
OSC2
PLL OPTION BIT
Figure 11. Clock, Reset and Supply Block Diagram
OSC2
OSC1
RESET
V
V
SS
DD
EVD
MULTI-
OSCILLATOR
(MO) f
OSC
PLL
(option)
RESET SEQUENCE
MANAGER
(RSM) f
OSC2
MAIN CLOCK
CONTROLLER
WITH REALTIME
CLOCK (MCC/RTC) f
CPU
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT
AVD Interrupt Request
SICSR
AVD AVD AVD LVD
S IE F RF
0 0 0
WDG
RF
WATCHDOG
TIMER (WDG)
0
1
LOW VOLTAGE
DETECTOR
(LVD)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
DETECTOR
(AVD)
24/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
6.2 MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO)
The main clock of the ST7 can be generated by three different source types coming from the multioscillator block:
■
■
■ an external source
4 crystal or ceramic resonator oscillators an internal high frequency RC oscillator
Each oscillator is optimized for a given frequency range in terms of consumption and is selectable through the option byte. The associated hardware
configurations are shown in Table 4
. Refer to the electrical characteristics section for more details.
Caution: The OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins must not be left unconnected. For the purposes of Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis, it should be noted that if the OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins are left unconnected, the ST7 main oscillator may start and, in this configuration, could generate an f
OSC
clock frequency in excess of the allowed maximum (>16MHz.), putting the ST7 in an unsafe/undefined state. The product behaviour must therefore be considered undefined when the OSC pins are left unconnected.
External Clock Source
In this external clock mode, a clock signal (square, sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle has to drive the OSC1 pin while the OSC2 pin is tied to ground.
Crystal/Ceramic Oscillators
This family of oscillators has the advantage of producing a very accurate rate on the main clock of the ST7. The selection within a list of 4 oscillators with different frequency ranges has to be done by option byte in order to reduce consumption (refer
for more details on the frequency ranges). In this mode of the multi-oscillator, the resonator and the load capacitors have to be placed as close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to minimize output distortion and start-up stabilization time. The loading capacitance values must be adjusted according to the selected oscillator.
These oscillators are not stopped during the
RESET phase to avoid losing time in the oscillator start-up phase.
Internal RC Oscillator
This oscillator allows a low cost solution for the main clock of the ST7 using only an internal resistor and capacitor. Internal RC oscillator mode has the drawback of a lower frequency accuracy and should not be used in applications that require accurate timing.
In this mode, the two oscillator pins have to be tied to ground.
Table 4. ST7 Clock Sources
Hardware Configuration
C
L1
OSC1
ST7
OSC2
EXTERNAL
SOURCE
OSC1
ST7
OSC2
LOAD
CAPACITORS
OSC1
ST7
OSC2
C
L2
25/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
6.3 RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM)
6.3.1 Introduction
The reset sequence manager includes three RE-
SET sources as shown in Figure 13
:
■
■
■
External RESET source pulse
Internal LVD RESET (Low Voltage Detection)
Internal WATCHDOG RESET
These sources act on the RESET pin and it is always kept low during the delay phase.
The RESET service routine vector is fixed at addresses FFFEh-FFFFh in the ST7 memory map.
The basic RESET sequence consists of 3 phases
:
■ Active Phase depending on the RESET source
■
■
256 or 4096 CPU clock cycle delay (selected by option byte)
RESET vector fetch
The 256 or 4096 CPU clock cycle delay allows the oscillator to stabilise and ensures that recovery has taken place from the Reset state. The shorter or longer clock cycle delay should be selected by option byte to correspond to the stabilization time of the external oscillator used in the application
).
Figure 13. Reset Block Diagram
The RESET vector fetch phase duration is 2 clock cycles.
Figure 12. RESET Sequence Phases
Active Phase
RESET
INTERNAL RESET
256 or 4096 CLOCK CYCLES
FETCH
VECTOR
6.3.2 Asynchronous External RESET pin
The RESET pin is both an input and an open-drain output with integrated R
ON
weak pull-up resistor.
This pull-up has no fixed value but varies in accordance with the input voltage. It can be pulled low by external circuitry to reset the device. See
“CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS” on page 185
for more details.
A RESET signal originating from an external source must have a duration of at least t h(RSTL)in
in
order to be recognized (see Figure 14
). This detection is asynchronous and therefore the MCU can enter reset state even in HALT mode.
V
DD
R
ON
RESET Filter
INTERNAL
RESET
PULSE
GENERATOR
WATCHDOG RESET
LVD RESET
26/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (Cont’d)
The RESET pin is an asynchronous signal which plays a major role in EMS performance. In a noisy environment, it is recommended to follow the guidelines mentioned in the electrical characteristics section.
If the external RESET pulse is shorter than t w(RSTL)out
(see short ext. Reset in Figure 14
), the signal on the RESET pin may be stretched. Otherwise the delay will not be applied (see long ext.
). Starting from the external RE-
SET pulse recognition, the device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled low during at least t w(RSTL)out
.
6.3.3 External Power-On RESET
If the LVD is disabled by option byte, to start up the microcontroller correctly, the user must ensure by means of an external reset circuit that the reset signal is held low until V
DD
is over the minimum level specified for the selected f
OSC
frequency.
(see “OPERATING CONDITIONS” on page 167
)
A proper reset signal for a slow rising V
DD
supply can generally be provided by an external RC network connected to the RESET pin.
6.3.4 Internal Low Voltage Detector (LVD)
RESET
Two different RESET sequences caused by the internal LVD circuitry can be distinguished:
■
■
Power-On RESET
Voltage Drop RESET
The device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled low when V
DD
V
DD
<V
IT-
<V
IT+
(rising edge) or
(falling edge) as shown in
.
The LVD filters spikes on V
DD avoid parasitic resets.
larger than t g(VDD) to
6.3.5 Internal Watchdog RESET
The RESET sequence generated by a internal
Watchdog counter overflow is shown in Figure 14 .
Starting from the Watchdog counter underflow, the device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled low during at least t w(RSTL)out
.
Figure 14. RESET Sequences
V
DD
V
IT+(LVD)
V
IT-(LVD)
RUN
LVD
RESET
ACTIVE PHASE
SHORT EXT.
RESET
RUN
ACTIVE
PHASE
RUN
LONG EXT.
RESET
ACTIVE
PHASE
WATCHDOG
RESET
RUN
ACTIVE
PHASE
RUN t w(RSTL)out t h(RSTL)in t w(RSTL)out t h(RSTL)in
DELAY t w(RSTL)out
EXTERNAL
RESET
SOURCE
RESET PIN
WATCHDOG
RESET
WATCHDOG UNDERFLOW
INTERNAL RESET (256 or 4096 T
CPU
VECTOR FETCH
)
27/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
6.4 SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (SI)
The System Integrity Management block contains the Low Voltage Detector (LVD) and Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD) functions. It is managed by the SICSR register.
6.4.1 Low Voltage Detector (LVD)
The Low Voltage Detector function (LVD) generates a static reset when the V
DD below a V
IT-
supply voltage is
reference value. This means that it secures the power-up as well as the power-down keeping the ST7 in reset.
The V
IT-
reference value for a voltage drop is lower than the V
IT+
reference value for power-on in order to avoid a parasitic reset when the MCU starts running and sinks current on the supply (hysteresis).
The LVD Reset circuitry generates a reset when
V
DD
is below:
– V
IT+
when V
DD
is rising
– V
IT-
when V
DD
is falling
The LVD function is illustrated in Figure 15
.
The voltage threshold can be configured by option byte to be low, medium or high.
– under full software control
– in static safe reset
In these conditions, secure operation is always ensured for the application without the need for external reset hardware.
During a Low Voltage Detector Reset, the RESET pin is held low, thus permitting the MCU to reset other devices.
Notes:
The LVD allows the device to be used without any external RESET circuitry.
If the medium or low thresholds are selected, the detection may occur outside the specified operating voltage range. Below 3.8V, device operation is not guaranteed.
The LVD is an optional function which can be selected by option byte.
It is recommended to make sure that the V
DD supply voltage rises monotonously when the device is exiting from Reset, to ensure the application functions properly.
Provided the minimum V
DD
value (guaranteed for the oscillator frequency) is above V
ITcan only be in two modes:
, the MCU
Figure 15. Low Voltage Detector vs Reset
V
DD
V hys
V
IT+
V
IT-
RESET
28/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
6.4.2 Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD)
The Voltage Detector function (AVD) is based on an analog comparison between a V
IT-(AVD)
V
IT+(AVD)
reference value and the V
DD
and
main supply or the external EVD pin voltage level (V
EVD
The V
IT-
).
reference value for falling voltage is lower than the V
IT+
reference value for rising voltage in order to avoid parasitic detection (hysteresis).
The output of the AVD comparator is directly readable by the application software through a real time status bit (AVDF) in the SICSR register. This bit is read only.
Caution: The AVD function is active only if the
LVD is enabled through the option byte.
6.4.2.1 Monitoring the V
DD
Main Supply
This mode is selected by clearing the AVDS bit in the SICSR register.
The AVD voltage threshold value is relative to the selected LVD threshold configured by option byte
).
If the AVD interrupt is enabled, an interrupt is generated when the voltage crosses the V
IT+(AVD)
V
IT-(AVD)
threshold (AVDF bit toggles).
or
Figure 16. Using the AVD to Monitor V
DD
(AVDS bit=0)
In the case of a drop in voltage, the AVD interrupt acts as an early warning, allowing software to shut down safely before the LVD resets the microcontroller. See
The interrupt on the rising edge is used to inform the application that the V
DD
warning state is over.
If the voltage rise time t rv
is less than 256 or 4096
CPU cycles (depending on the reset delay selected by option byte), no AVD interrupt will be generated when V
IT+(AVD)
is reached.
If t rv
is greater than 256 or 4096 cycles then:
– If the AVD interrupt is enabled before the
V
IT+(AVD) threshold is reached, then 2 AVD interrupts will be received: the first when the AVDIE bit is set, and the second when the threshold is reached.
– If the AVD interrupt is enabled after the V
IT+(AVD) threshold is reached then only one AVD interrupt will occur.
V
DD
Early Warning Interrupt
(Power has dropped, MCU not not yet in reset)
V hyst
V
IT+(AVD)
V
IT-(AVD)
V
IT+(LVD)
V
IT-(LVD) t rv
VOLTAGE RISE TIME
1 RESET VALUE 1 0 AVDF bit
AVD INTERRUPT
REQUEST
IF AVDIE bit = 1
0
LVD RESET
INTERRUPT PROCESS INTERRUPT PROCESS
29/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
6.4.2.2 Monitoring a Voltage on the EVD pin
This mode is selected by setting the AVDS bit in the SICSR register.
The AVD circuitry can generate an interrupt when the AVDIE bit of the SICSR register is set. This interrupt is generated on the rising and falling edges of the comparator output. This means it is generated when either one of these two events occur:
– V
EVD
rises up to V
IT+(EVD)
– V
EVD
falls down to V
IT-(EVD)
The EVD function is illustrated in
.
For more details, refer to the Electrical Characteristics section.
Figure 17. Using the Voltage Detector to Monitor the EVD pin (AVDS bit=1)
V
EVD
V hyst
V
IT+(EVD)
V
IT-(EVD)
AVDF
AVD INTERRUPT
REQUEST
IF AVDIE = 1
0 1
INTERRUPT PROCESS
0
INTERRUPT PROCESS
30/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
6.4.3 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
WAIT
HALT
No effect on SI. AVD interrupts cause the device to exit from Wait mode.
The CRSR register is frozen.
set and the interrupt mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).
Interrupt Event
AVD event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit from
Wait
AVDF AVDIE Yes
Exit from
Halt
No
6.4.3.1 Interrupts
The AVD interrupt event generates an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit (AVDIE) is
31/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SYSTEM INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
6.4.4 Register Description
SYSTEM INTEGRITY (SI) CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (SICSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 000x 000x (00h)
7 0 ed by the LVD block. It is set by hardware (LVD reset) and cleared by software (writing zero). See
WDGRF flag description for more details. When the LVD is disabled by OPTION BYTE, the LVDRF bit value is undefined.
AVD
S
AVD
IE
AVD
F
LVD
RF
0 0 0
WDG
RF
Bits 3:1 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 7 = AVDS Voltage Detection selection
This bit is set and cleared by software. Voltage Detection is available only if the LVD is enabled by option byte.
0: Voltage detection on V
DD
supply
1: Voltage detection on EVD pin
Bit 6 = AVDIE Voltage Detector interrupt enable
This bit is set and cleared by software. It enables an interrupt to be generated when the AVDF flag changes (toggles). The pending interrupt information is automatically cleared when software enters the AVD interrupt routine.
0: AVD interrupt disabled
1: AVD interrupt enabled
Bit 0 = WDGRF Watchdog reset flag
This bit indicates that the last Reset was generated by the Watchdog peripheral. It is set by hardware (watchdog reset) and cleared by software
(writing zero) or an LVD Reset (to ensure a stable cleared state of the WDGRF flag when CPU starts).
Combined with the LVDRF flag information, the flag description is given by the following table.
RESET Sources
External RESET pin
Watchdog
LVD
LVDRF WDGRF
0
0
1
0
1
X
Bit 5 = AVDF Voltage Detector flag
This read-only bit is set and cleared by hardware.
If the AVDIE bit is set, an interrupt request is generated when the AVDF bit changes value. Refer to
tails.
0: V
DD
1: V
DD
for additional de-
or V
EVD
over V
IT+(AVD)
threshold
or V
EVD
under V
IT-(AVD)
threshold
Bit 4 = LVDRF LVD reset flag
This bit indicates that the last Reset was generat-
Application notes
The LVDRF flag is not cleared when another RE-
SET type occurs (external or watchdog), the
LVDRF flag remains set to keep trace of the original failure.
In this case, a watchdog reset can be detected by software while an external reset can not.
CAUTION: When the LVD is not activated with the associated option byte, the WDGRF flag can not be used in the application.
32/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
7 INTERRUPTS
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The ST7 enhanced interrupt management provides the following features:
■ Hardware interrupts
■
■
Software interrupt (TRAP)
Nested or concurrent interrupt management with flexible interrupt priority and level management:
– Up to 4 software programmable nesting levels
– Up to 16 interrupt vectors fixed by hardware
– 2 non maskable events: RESET, TRAP
– 1 maskable Top Level event: TLI
This interrupt management is based on:
– Bit 5 and bit 3 of the CPU CC register (I1:0),
– Interrupt software priority registers (ISPRx),
– Fixed interrupt vector addresses located at the high addresses of the memory map (FFE0h to
FFFFh) sorted by hardware priority order.
This enhanced interrupt controller guarantees full upward compatibility with the standard (not nested) ST7 interrupt controller.
7.2 MASKING AND PROCESSING FLOW
The interrupt masking is managed by the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register and the ISPRx registers which give the interrupt software priority level of
each interrupt vector (see Table 5
). The process-
ing flow is shown in Figure 18
When an interrupt request has to be serviced:
– Normal processing is suspended at the end of the current instruction execution.
– The PC, X, A and CC registers are saved onto the stack.
– I1 and I0 bits of CC register are set according to the corresponding values in the ISPRx registers of the serviced interrupt vector.
– The PC is then loaded with the interrupt vector of the interrupt to service and the first instruction of the interrupt service routine is fetched (refer to
“Interrupt Mapping” table for vector addresses).
The interrupt service routine should end with the
IRET instruction which causes the contents of the saved registers to be recovered from the stack.
Note: As a consequence of the IRET instruction, the I1 and I0 bits will be restored from the stack and the program in the previous level will resume.
Table 5. Interrupt Software Priority Levels
Interrupt software priority Level
Level 0 (main) Low
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3 (= interrupt disable) High
I1
1
0
0
1
I0
0
1
0
1
Figure 18. Interrupt Processing Flowchart
RESET
PENDING
INTERRUPT
N
FETCH NEXT
INSTRUCTION
Y
Interrupt has the same or a lower software priority than current one
TRAP
I1:0
N
THE INTERRUPT
STAYS PENDING
Y
RESTORE PC, X, A, CC
FROM STACK
Y
“IRET”
N
EXECUTE
INSTRUCTION STACK PC, X, A, CC
LOAD I1:0 FROM INTERRUPT SW REG.
LOAD PC FROM INTERRUPT VECTOR
33/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
Servicing Pending Interrupts
As several interrupts can be pending at the same time, the interrupt to be taken into account is determined by the following two-step process:
– the highest software priority interrupt is serviced,
– if several interrupts have the same software priority then the interrupt with the highest hardware priority is serviced first.
describes this decision process.
Figure 19. Priority Decision Process
Same
PENDING
INTERRUPTS
SOFTWARE
PRIORITY
HIGHEST HARDWARE
PRIORITY SERVICED
Different
HIGHEST SOFTWARE
PRIORITY SERVICED
When an interrupt request is not serviced immediately, it is latched and then processed when its software priority combined with the hardware priority becomes the highest one.
Note 1: The hardware priority is exclusive while the software one is not. This allows the previous process to succeed with only one interrupt.
Note 2: TLI, RESET and TRAP can be considered as having the highest software priority in the decision process.
Different Interrupt Vector Sources
Two interrupt source types are managed by the
ST7 interrupt controller: the non-maskable type
(RESET, TRAP) and the maskable type (external or from internal peripherals).
Non-Maskable Sources
These sources are processed regardless of the state of the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register (see
Figure 18 ). After stacking the PC, X, A and CC
registers (except for RESET), the corresponding vector is loaded in the PC register and the I1 and
I0 bits of the CC are set to disable interrupts (level
3). These sources allow the processor to exit
HALT mode.
■ TRAP (Non Maskable Software Interrupt)
This software interrupt is serviced when the TRAP instruction is executed. It will be serviced according to the flowchart in
.
Caution: TRAP can be interrupted by a TLI.
■ RESET
The RESET source has the highest priority in the
ST7. This means that the first current routine has the highest software priority (level 3) and the highest hardware priority.
See the RESET chapter for more details.
Maskable Sources
Maskable interrupt vector sources can be serviced if the corresponding interrupt is enabled and if its own interrupt software priority (in ISPRx registers) is higher than the one currently being serviced (I1 and I0 in CC register). If any of these two conditions is false, the interrupt is latched and thus remains pending.
■ TLI (Top Level Hardware Interrupt)
This hardware interrupt occurs when a specific edge is detected on the dedicated TLI pin. It will be
serviced according to the flowchart in Figure 18
as a trap.
Caution: A TRAP instruction must not be used in a
TLI service routine.
■ External Interrupts
External interrupts allow the processor to exit from
HALT low power mode. External interrupt sensitivity is software selectable through the External Interrupt Control register (EICR).
External interrupt triggered on edge will be latched and the interrupt request automatically cleared upon entering the interrupt service routine.
If several input pins of a group connected to the same interrupt line are selected simultaneously, these will be logically ORed.
■ Peripheral Interrupts
Usually the peripheral interrupts cause the MCU to exit from HALT mode except those mentioned in the “Interrupt Mapping” table. A peripheral interrupt occurs when a specific flag is set in the peripheral status registers and if the corresponding enable bit is set in the peripheral control register.
The general sequence for clearing an interrupt is based on an access to the status register followed by a read or write to an associated register.
Note: The clearing sequence resets the internal latch. A pending interrupt (i.e. waiting for being serviced) will therefore be lost if the clear sequence is executed.
34/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
7.3 INTERRUPTS AND LOW POWER MODES
All interrupts allow the processor to exit the WAIT low power mode. On the contrary, only external and other specified interrupts allow the processor to exit from the HALT modes (see column “Exit from HALT” in “Interrupt Mapping” table). When several pending interrupts are present while exiting HALT mode, the first one serviced can only be an interrupt with exit from HALT mode capability and it is selected through the same decision process shown in
Note: If an interrupt, that is not able to Exit from
HALT mode, is pending with the highest priority when exiting HALT mode, this interrupt is serviced after the first one serviced.
Figure 20. Concurrent Interrupt Management
7.4 CONCURRENT & NESTED MANAGEMENT
The following Figure 20 and Figure 21
show two different interrupt management modes. The first is called concurrent mode and does not allow an interrupt to be interrupted, unlike the nested mode in
Figure 21 . The interrupt hardware priority is given
in this order from the lowest to the highest: MAIN,
IT4, IT3, IT2, IT1, IT0, TLI. The software priority is given for each interrupt.
Warning: A stack overflow may occur without notifying the software of the failure.
SOFTWARE
PRIORITY
LEVEL
I1 I0
RIM
MAIN
11 / 10
IT2
IT1
TRAP
IT1
IT0
IT3
IT4
10
MAIN
3
3
3
3
3
3
3/0
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
Figure 21. Nested Interrupt Management
SOFTWARE
PRIORITY
LEVEL
I1 I0
RIM
MAIN
11 / 10
IT2
IT1
IT4
TRAP
IT4
IT0
IT3
IT1
IT2
10
MAIN
3
3
2
1
3
3
3/0
1 1
1 1
0 0
0 1
1 1
1 1
35/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
7.5 INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION
CPU CC REGISTER INTERRUPT BITS
Read/Write
Reset Value: 111x 1010 (xAh)
7 0
1 1 I1 H I0 N Z C
Bit 5, 3 = I1, I0 Software Interrupt Priority
These two bits indicate the current interrupt software priority.
Interrupt Software Priority Level
Level 0 (main)
Level 1
Low
Level 2
Level 3 (= interrupt disable*) High
I1
1
0
0
1
I0
0
1
0
1
These two bits are set/cleared by hardware when entering in interrupt. The loaded value is given by the corresponding bits in the interrupt software priority registers (ISPRx).
They can be also set/cleared by software with the
RIM, SIM, HALT, WFI, IRET and PUSH/POP instructions (see “Interrupt Dedicated Instruction
Set” table).
*Note: TLI, TRAP and RESET events can interrupt a level 3 program.
INTERRUPT SOFTWARE PRIORITY REGIS-
TERS (ISPRX)
Read/Write (bit 7:4 of ISPR3 are read only)
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7 0
ISPR0 I1_3 I0_3 I1_2 I0_2 I1_1 I0_1 I1_0 I0_0
ISPR1 I1_7 I0_7 I1_6 I0_6 I1_5 I0_5 I1_4 I0_4
ISPR2 I1_11 I0_11 I1_10 I0_10 I1_9 I0_9 I1_8 I0_8
ISPR3 1 1 1 1 I1_13 I0_13 I1_12 I0_12
These four registers contain the interrupt software priority of each interrupt vector.
– Each interrupt vector (except RESET and TRAP) has corresponding bits in these registers where its own software priority is stored. This correspondance is shown in the following table.
Vector address
FFFBh-FFFAh
FFF9h-FFF8h
...
FFE1h-FFE0h
ISPRx bits
I1_0 and I0_0 bits*
I1_1 and I0_1 bits
...
I1_13 and I0_13 bits
– Each I1_x and I0_x bit value in the ISPRx registers has the same meaning as the I1 and I0 bits in the CC register.
– Level 0 can not be written (I1_x=1, I0_x=0). In this case, the previously stored value is kept. (example: previous=CFh, write=64h, result=44h)
The TLI, RESET, and TRAP vectors have no software priorities. When one is serviced, the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register are both set.
*Note: Bits in the ISPRx registers which correspond to the TLI can be read and written but they are not significant in the interrupt process management.
Caution: If the I1_x and I0_x bits are modified while the interrupt x is executed the following behaviour has to be considered: If the interrupt x is still pending (new interrupt or flag not cleared) and the new software priority is higher than the previous one, the interrupt x is re-entered. Otherwise, the software priority stays unchanged up to the next interrupt request (after the IRET of the interrupt x).
36/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
Table 6. Dedicated Interrupt Instruction Set
Instruction
HALT
IRET
JRM
JRNM
POP CC
RIM
SIM
TRAP
WFI
New Description
Entering Halt mode
Interrupt routine return
Jump if I1:0=11 (level 3)
Jump if I1:0<>11
Pop CC from the Stack
Enable interrupt (level 0 set)
Disable interrupt (level 3 set)
Software trap
Wait for interrupt
Function/Example
Pop CC, A, X, PC
I1:0=11 ?
I1:0<>11 ?
Mem => CC
Load 10 in I1:0 of CC
Load 11 in I1:0 of CC
Software NMI
I1
1
I1
H
H
I0
0
I0
N
N
I1
1
1
1
1
H I0
0
1
1
0
N
Z C
Z C
Z C
Note: During the execution of an interrupt routine, the HALT, POPCC, RIM, SIM and WFI instructions change the current software priority up to the next IRET instruction or one of the previously mentioned instructions.
37/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
4
5
2
3
6
0
1
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
Table 7. Interrupt Mapping
N°
Source
Block
Description
RESET
TRAP
TLI
Reset
Software interrupt
External top level interrupt
MCC/RTC Main clock controller time base interrupt ei0 ei1 ei2 ei3
CAN
External interrupt port A3..0
External interrupt port F2..0
External interrupt port B3..0
External interrupt port B7..4
CAN peripheral interrupts
SPI
TIMER A
TIMER B
SCI
AVD
SPI peripheral interrupts
TIMER A peripheral interrupts
TIMER B peripheral interrupts
SCI Peripheral interrupts
Auxiliary Voltage detector interrupt
I2C I2C Peripheral interrupts
PWM ART PWM ART interrupt
Register
Label
N/A
EICR
MCCSR
N/A
CANISR
SPICSR
TASR
TBSR
SCISR
SICSR
(see periph)
ARTCSR
Priority
Order
Exit from
HALT/
ACTIVE
HALT
3)
Higher
Priority
Lower
Priority yes yes
1 no no no no no yes
2 yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes
Address
Vector
FFFEh-FFFFh
FFFCh-FFFDh
FFFAh-FFFBh
FFF8h-FFF9h
FFF6h-FFF7h
FFF4h-FFF5h
FFF2h-FFF3h
FFF0h-FFF1h
FFEEh-FFEFh
FFECh-FFEDh
FFEAh-FFEBh
FFE8h-FFE9h
FFE6h-FFE7h
FFE4h-FFE5h
FFE2h-FFE3h
FFE0h-FFE1h
Notes:
1. Exit from HALT possible when SPI is in slave mode.
2. Exit from HALT possible when PWM ART is in external clock mode.
3. In Flash devices only a RESET or MCC/RTC interrupt can be used to wake-up from Active Halt mode.
7.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS
7.6.1 I/O Port Interrupt Sensitivity
The external interrupt sensitivity is controlled by the IPA, IPB and ISxx bits of the EICR register
(
). This control allows to have up to 4 fully independent external interrupt source sensitivities.
Each external interrupt source can be generated on four (or five) different events on the pin:
■
■
■
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling and rising edge
■
■
Falling edge and low level
Rising edge and high level (only for ei0 and ei2)
To guarantee correct functionality, the sensitivity bits in the EICR register can be modified only when the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3). This means that interrupts must be disabled before changing sensitivity.
The pending interrupts are cleared by writing a different value in the ISx[1:0], IPA or IPB bits of the
EICR.
38/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
Figure 22. External Interrupt Control bits
PORT A [3:0] INTERRUPTS
PAOR.3
PADDR.3
PA3
EICR
IS20 IS21
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
IPA BIT
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
PORT F [2:0] INTERRUPTS
PFOR.2
PFDDR.2
PF2
EICR
IS20 IS21
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PF2
PF1
PF0
PORT B [3:0] INTERRUPTS
PBOR.3
PBDDR.3
PB3
IPB BIT
PORT B [7:4] INTERRUPTS
PBOR.7
PBDDR.7
PB7
EICR
IS10 IS11
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
EICR
IS10 IS11
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4 ei0 INTERRUPT SOURCE ei1 INTERRUPT SOURCE ei2 INTERRUPT SOURCE ei3 INTERRUPT SOURCE
39/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
7.7 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (EICR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
- ei0 (port A3..0)
External Interrupt Sensitivity
IS21 IS20
7 0
IS11 IS10 IPB IS21 IS20 IPA TLIS TLIE
Bit 7:6 = IS1[1:0] ei2 and ei3 sensitivity
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS1[1:0] bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:
- ei2 (port B3..0)
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
IPA bit =0 IPA bit =1
Falling edge & low level
Rising edge only
Rising edge
& high level
Falling edge only
Falling edge only Rising edge only
Rising and falling edge
IS11 IS10
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
External Interrupt Sensitivity
IPB bit =0 IPB bit =1
Falling edge & low level
Rising edge only
Rising edge
& high level
Falling edge only
Falling edge only Rising edge only
Rising and falling edge
- ei1 (port F2..0)
IS21 IS20
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
External Interrupt Sensitivity
Falling edge & low level
Rising edge only
Falling edge only
Rising and falling edge
These 2 bits can be written only when I1 and I0 of the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).
- ei3 (port B7..4)
IS11 IS10
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
External Interrupt Sensitivity
Falling edge & low level
Rising edge only
Falling edge only
Rising and falling edge
Bit 2 = IPA Interrupt polarity for port A
This bit is used to invert the sensitivity of the port A
[3:0] external interrupts. It can be set and cleared by software only when I1 and I0 of the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).
0: No sensitivity inversion
1: Sensitivity inversion
These 2 bits can be written only when I1 and I0 of the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).
Bit 5 = IPB Interrupt polarity for port B
This bit is used to invert the sensitivity of the port B
[3:0] external interrupts. It can be set and cleared by software only when I1 and I0 of the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).
0: No sensitivity inversion
1: Sensitivity inversion
Bit 1 = TLIS TLI sensitivity
This bit allows to toggle the TLI edge sensitivity. It can be set and cleared by software only when
TLIE bit is cleared.
0: Falling edge
1: Rising edge
Bit 4:3 = IS2[1:0] ei0 and ei1 sensitivity
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS2[1:0] bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:
Bit 0 = TLIE TLI enable
This bit allows to enable or disable the TLI capability on the dedicated pin. It is set and cleared by software.
0: TLI disabled
1: TLI enabled
Note: a parasitic interrupt can be generated when clearing the TLIE bit.
40/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
Table 8. Nested Interrupts Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
7 6 5 4
0024h
0025h
0026h
ISPR0
Reset Value
ISPR1
Reset Value
ISPR2
Reset Value ei1
I1_3
1
I0_3
1
SPI
I1_7
1
I0_7
1
I1_11
1
AVD
I0_11
1 ei0
I1_2
1
I0_2
1
CAN
I1_6
1
I0_6
1
I1_10
1
SCI
I0_10
1
0027h
0028h
ISPR3
Reset Value
EICR
Reset Value
1
IS11
0
1
IS10
0
1
IPB
0
1
IS21
0
3 2
MCC
I1_1
1
I0_1
1 ei3
I1_5
1
TIMER B
I0_5
1
I1_9
1
I0_9
1
PWMART
I1_13
1
I0_13
1
IS20
0
IPA
0
1 0
TLI
1 1 ei2
I1_4
1
TIMER A
I0_4
1
I1_8
1
I0_8
1
I2C
I1_12
1
TLIS
0
I0_12
1
TLIE
0
41/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
8 POWER SAVING MODES
8.1 INTRODUCTION
To give a large measure of flexibility to the application in terms of power consumption, four main power saving modes are implemented in the ST7
(see Figure 23 ): SLOW, WAIT (SLOW WAIT), AC-
TIVE HALT and HALT.
After a RESET the normal operating mode is selected by default (RUN mode). This mode drives the device (CPU and embedded peripherals) by means of a master clock which is based on the main oscillator frequency divided or multiplied by 2
(f
OSC2
).
From RUN mode, the different power saving modes may be selected by setting the relevant register bits or by calling the specific ST7 software instruction whose action depends on the oscillator status.
Figure 23. Power Saving Mode Transitions
High
RUN
8.2 SLOW MODE
This mode has two targets:
– To reduce power consumption by decreasing the internal clock in the device,
– To adapt the internal clock frequency (f
CPU the available supply voltage.
) to
SLOW mode is controlled by three bits in the
MCCSR register: the SMS bit which enables or disables Slow mode and two CPx bits which select the internal slow frequency (f
CPU
).
In this mode, the master clock frequency (f
OSC2
) can be divided by 2, 4, 8 or 16. The CPU and peripherals are clocked at this lower frequency
(f
CPU
).
Note: SLOW-WAIT mode is activated when entering the WAIT mode while the device is already in
SLOW mode.
Figure 24. SLOW Mode Clock Transitions f
OSC2
/2 f
OSC2
/4 f
OSC2 f
CPU
SLOW
WAIT f
OSC2
CP1:0
SMS
00 01
SLOW WAIT
NORMAL RUN MODE
REQUEST
ACTIVE HALT
NEW SLOW
FREQUENCY
REQUEST
HALT
Low
POWER CONSUMPTION
42/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)
8.3 WAIT MODE
WAIT mode places the MCU in a low power consumption mode by stopping the CPU.
This power saving mode is selected by calling the
‘WFI’ instruction.
All peripherals remain active. During WAIT mode, the I[1:0] bits of the CC register are forced to ‘10’, to enable all interrupts. All other registers and memory remain unchanged. The MCU remains in
WAIT mode until an interrupt or RESET occurs, whereupon the Program Counter branches to the starting address of the interrupt or Reset service routine.
The MCU will remain in WAIT mode until a Reset or an Interrupt occurs, causing it to wake up.
Figure 25. WAIT Mode Flow-chart
WFI INSTRUCTION
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
OFF
10
N
RESET
Y
N
INTERRUPT
Y
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
ON
10
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK
CYCLE DELAY
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
ON
XX 1)
FETCH RESET VECTOR
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT
Note:
1. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC register are set to the current software priority level of the interrupt routine and recovered when the CC register is popped.
43/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)
8.4 ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES
ACTIVE-HALT and HALT modes are the two lowest power consumption modes of the MCU. They are both entered by executing the ‘HALT’ instruction. The decision to enter either in ACTIVE-HALT or HALT mode is given by the MCC/RTC interrupt enable flag (OIE bit in MCCSR register).
MCCSR
OIE bit
0
1
Power Saving Mode entered when HALT instruction is executed
HALT mode
ACTIVE-HALT mode
8.4.1 ACTIVE-HALT MODE
ACTIVE-HALT mode is the lowest power consumption mode of the MCU with a real time clock available. It is entered by executing the ‘HALT’ instruction when the OIE bit of the Main Clock Con-
troller Status register (MCCSR) is set (see section
for more details on the MCCSR register).
The MCU can exit ACTIVE-HALT mode on reception of an MCC/RTC interrupt or a RESET. In ROM devices, external interrupts can be used to wakeup the MCU. When exiting ACTIVE-HALT mode by means of an interrupt, no 256 or 4096 CPU cycle delay occurs. The CPU resumes operation by servicing the interrupt or by fetching the reset vec-
tor which woke it up (see Figure 27
).
When entering ACTIVE-HALT mode, the I[1:0] bits in the CC register are forced to ‘10b’ to enable interrupts. Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the
MCU wakes up immediately.
In ACTIVE-HALT mode, only the main oscillator and its associated counter (MCC/RTC) are running to keep a wake-up time base. All other peripherals are not clocked except those which get their clock supply from another clock generator (such as external or auxiliary oscillator).
The safeguard against staying locked in ACTIVE-
HALT mode is provided by the oscillator interrupt.
Note: As soon as the interrupt capability of one of the oscillators is selected (MCCSR.OIE bit set), entering ACTIVE-HALT mode while the Watchdog is active does not generate a RESET.
This means that the device cannot spend more than a defined delay in this power saving mode.
CAUTION: When exiting ACTIVE-HALT mode following an MCC/RTC interrupt, OIE bit of MCCSR register must not be cleared before t
DELAY
after the interrupt occurs (t
DELAY
= 256 or 4096 t
CPU
delay depending on option byte). Otherwise, the ST7 enters HALT mode for the remaining t
DELAY od.
peri-
Figure 26. ACTIVE-HALT Timing Overview
RUN
ACTIVE
HALT
256 OR 4096 CPU
CYCLE DELAY
1)
RUN
HALT
INSTRUCTION
[MCCSR.OIE=1]
RESET
OR
INTERRUPT
FETCH
VECTOR
Figure 27. ACTIVE-HALT Mode Flow-chart
HALT INSTRUCTION
(MCCSR.OIE=1)
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
2)
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
OFF
10
N
INTERRUPT
4)
Y
N
RESET
Y
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
ON
XX
3)
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK
CYCLE DELAY
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
ON
XX
3)
FETCH RESET VECTOR
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT
Notes:
1. This delay occurs only if the MCU exits ACTIVE-
HALT mode by means of a RESET.
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source can still be active.
3. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC register are set to the current software priority level of the interrupt routine and restored when the CC register is popped.
4. In flash devices only the MCC/RTC interrupt can exit the MCU from ACTIVE-HALT mode.
44/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)
8.4.2 HALT MODE
The HALT mode is the lowest power consumption mode of the MCU. It is entered by executing the
‘HALT’ instruction when the OIE bit of the Main
Clock Controller Status register (MCCSR) is
cleared (see section 10.2 on page 58
for more details on the MCCSR register).
The MCU can exit HALT mode on reception of ei-
ther a specific interrupt (see Table 7, “Interrupt
Mapping,” on page 38) or a RESET. When exiting
HALT mode by means of a RESET or an interrupt, the oscillator is immediately turned on and the 256 or 4096 CPU cycle delay is used to stabilize the oscillator. After the start up delay, the CPU resumes operation by servicing the interrupt or by fetching the reset vector which woke it up (see
).
When entering HALT mode, the I[1:0] bits in the
CC register are forced to ‘10b’to enable interrupts.
Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the MCU wakes up immediately.
In HALT mode, the main oscillator is turned off causing all internal processing to be stopped, including the operation of the on-chip peripherals.
All peripherals are not clocked except the ones which get their clock supply from another clock generator (such as an external or auxiliary oscillator).
The compatibility of Watchdog operation with
HALT mode is configured by the “WDGHALT” option bit of the option byte. The HALT instruction when executed while the Watchdog system is en-
abled, can generate a Watchdog RESET (see section 14.1 on page 201 for more details).
Figure 28. HALT Timing Overview
RUN HALT
256 OR 4096 CPU
CYCLE DELAY
RESET
OR
INTERRUPT HALT
INSTRUCTION
[MCCSR.OIE=0]
RUN
FETCH
VECTOR
Figure 29. HALT Mode Flow-chart
HALT INSTRUCTION
(MCCSR.OIE=0)
ENABLE
0
WATCHDOG
DISABLE
WDGHALT 1)
1
WATCHDOG
RESET
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS 2)
CPU
OFF
OFF
OFF
I[1:0] BITS 10
N
RESET
Y
N
INTERRUPT 3)
Y OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
OFF
ON
XX 4)
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK
CYCLE DELAY
OSCILLATOR
PERIPHERALS
CPU
I[1:0] BITS
ON
ON
ON
XX 4)
FETCH RESET VECTOR
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT
Notes:
1. WDGHALT is an option bit. See option byte section for more details.
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source can still be active.
3. Only some specific interrupts can exit the MCU from HALT mode (such as external interrupt). Re-
fer to Table 7, “Interrupt Mapping,” on page 38 for
more details.
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC register are set to the current software priority level of the interrupt routine and recovered when the CC register is popped.
45/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)
8.4.2.1 Halt Mode Recommendations
– Make sure that an external event is available to wake up the microcontroller from Halt mode.
– When using an external interrupt to wake up the microcontroller, reinitialize the corresponding I/O as “Input Pull-up with Interrupt” before executing the HALT instruction. The main reason for this is that the I/O may be wrongly configured due to external interference or by an unforeseen logical condition.
– For the same reason, reinitialize the level sensitiveness of each external interrupt as a precautionary measure.
– The opcode for the HALT instruction is 0x8E. To avoid an unexpected HALT instruction due to a program counter failure, it is advised to clear all occurrences of the data value 0x8E from memory. For example, avoid defining a constant in
ROM with the value 0x8E.
– As the HALT instruction clears the interrupt mask in the CC register to allow interrupts, the user may choose to clear all pending interrupt bits before executing the HALT instruction. This avoids entering other peripheral interrupt routines after executing the external interrupt routine corresponding to the wake-up event (reset or external interrupt).
Related Documentation
AN 980: ST7 Keypad Decoding Techniques, Implementing Wake-Up on Keystroke
AN1014: How to Minimize the ST7 Power Consumption
AN1605: Using an active RC to wakeup the
ST7LITE0 from power saving mode
46/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
9 I/O PORTS
9.1 INTRODUCTION
The I/O ports offer different functional modes:
– transfer of data through digital inputs and outputs and for specific pins:
– external interrupt generation
– alternate signal input/output for the on-chip peripherals.
An I/O port contains up to 8 pins. Each pin can be programmed independently as digital input (with or without interrupt generation) or digital output.
9.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Each port has 2 main registers:
– Data Register (DR)
– Data Direction Register (DDR) and one optional register:
– Option Register (OR)
Each I/O pin may be programmed using the corresponding register bits in the DDR and OR registers: bit X corresponding to pin X of the port. The same correspondence is used for the DR register.
The following description takes into account the
OR register, (for specific ports which do not provide this register refer to the I/O Port Implementation section). The generic I/O block diagram is
9.2.1 Input Modes
The input configuration is selected by clearing the corresponding DDR register bit.
In this case, reading the DR register returns the digital value applied to the external I/O pin.
Different input modes can be selected by software through the OR register.
Notes:
1. Writing the DR register modifies the latch value but does not affect the pin status.
2. When switching from input to output mode, the
DR register has to be written first to drive the correct level on the pin as soon as the port is configured as an output.
3. Do not use read/modify/write instructions (BSET or BRES) to modify the DR register
External interrupt function
When an I/O is configured as Input with Interrupt, an event on this I/O can generate an external interrupt request to the CPU.
Each pin can independently generate an interrupt request. The interrupt sensitivity is independently programmable using the sensitivity bits in the
EICR register.
Each external interrupt vector is linked to a dedicated group of I/O port pins (see pinout description and interrupt section). If several input pins are selected simultaneously as interrupt sources, these are first detected according to the sensitivity bits in the EICR register and then logically ORed.
The external interrupts are hardware interrupts, which means that the request latch (not accessible directly by the application) is automatically cleared when the corresponding interrupt vector is fetched. To clear an unwanted pending interrupt by software, the sensitivity bits in the EICR register must be modified.
9.2.2 Output Modes
The output configuration is selected by setting the corresponding DDR register bit. In this case, writing the DR register applies this digital value to the
I/O pin through the latch. Then reading the DR register returns the previously stored value.
Two different output modes can be selected by software through the OR register: Output push-pull and open-drain.
DR register value and output pin status:
DR
0
1
Push-pull
V
SS
V
DD
Open-drain
Vss
Floating
9.2.3 Alternate Functions
When an on-chip peripheral is configured to use a pin, the alternate function is automatically selected. This alternate function takes priority over the standard I/O programming.
When the signal is coming from an on-chip peripheral, the I/O pin is automatically configured in output mode (push-pull or open drain according to the peripheral).
When the signal is going to an on-chip peripheral, the I/O pin must be configured in input mode. In this case, the pin state is also digitally readable by addressing the DR register.
Note: Input pull-up configuration can cause unexpected value at the input of the alternate peripheral input. When an on-chip peripheral use a pin as input and output, this pin has to be configured in input floating mode.
47/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)
Figure 30. I/O Port General Block Diagram
REGISTER
ACCESS
ALTERNATE
OUTPUT
1
0
ALTERNATE
ENABLE
DR
DDR
OR
OR SEL
If implemented
DDR SEL
DR SEL
1
0
EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT
SOURCE (ei x
)
PULL-UP
CONDITION
V
DD
P-BUFFER
(see table below)
PULL-UP
(see table below)
V
DD
PAD
N-BUFFER
CMOS
SCHMITT
TRIGGER
DIODES
(see table below)
ANALOG
INPUT
ALTERNATE
INPUT
Table 9. I/O Port Mode Options
Configuration Mode
Input
Output
Floating with/without Interrupt
Pull-up with/without Interrupt
Push-pull
Open Drain (logic level)
True Open Drain
Legend: NI - not implemented
Off - implemented not activated
On - implemented and activated
Pull-Up P-Buffer to V
DD
Diodes to V
SS
Off
On
Off
NI
Off
On
Off
NI
On
On
NI (see note)
Note: The diode to V
DD
is not implemented in the true open drain pads. A local protection between the pad and V
SS
is implemented to protect the device against positive stress.
48/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)
Table 10. I/O Port Configurations
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN
TRUE OPEN DRAIN
I/O PORTS
V
DD
R
PU
PAD
Hardware Configuration
PULL-UP
CONDITION
DR REGISTER ACCESS
DR
REGISTER
W
R
DATA BUS
ALTERNATE INPUT
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
SOURCE (ei x
)
INTERRUPT
CONDITION
ANALOG INPUT
DR REGISTER ACCESS
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN
TRUE OPEN DRAIN
I/O PORTS
V
DD
R
PU
PAD
DR
REGISTER
R/W
DATA BUS
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN
TRUE OPEN DRAIN
I/O PORTS
V
DD
R
PU
PAD
ALTERNATE
ENABLE
ALTERNATE
OUTPUT
DR REGISTER ACCESS
DR
REGISTER
R/W
DATA BUS
ALTERNATE
ENABLE
ALTERNATE
OUTPUT
Notes:
1. When the I/O port is in input configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an output, reading the DR register will read the alternate function output status.
2. When the I/O port is in output configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an input, the alternate function reads the pin status given by the DR register content.
49/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)
CAUTION: The alternate function must not be activated as long as the pin is configured as input with interrupt, in order to avoid generating spurious interrupts.
Analog alternate function
When the pin is used as an ADC input, the I/O must be configured as floating input. The analog multiplexer (controlled by the ADC registers) switches the analog voltage present on the selected pin to the common analog rail which is connected to the ADC input.
It is recommended not to change the voltage level or loading on any port pin while conversion is in progress. Furthermore it is recommended not to have clocking pins located close to a selected analog pin.
WARNING: The analog input voltage level must be within the limits stated in the absolute maximum ratings.
9.3 I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION
The hardware implementation on each I/O port depends on the settings in the DDR and OR registers and specific feature of the I/O port such as ADC Input or true open drain.
Switching these I/O ports from one state to another should be done in a sequence that prevents unwanted side effects. Recommended safe transi-
tions are illustrated in Figure 31
Other transitions are potentially risky and should be avoided, since they are likely to present unwanted side-effects such as spurious interrupt generation.
Figure 31. Interrupt I/O Port State Transitions
01 00
INPUT floating/pull-up interrupt
INPUT floating
(reset state)
10
OUTPUT open-drain
11
OUTPUT push-pull
XX = DDR, OR
9.4 LOW POWER MODES
Mode Description
WAIT
HALT
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts cause the device to exit from HALT mode.
9.5 INTERRUPTS
The external interrupt event generates an interrupt if the corresponding configuration is selected with
DDR and OR registers and the interrupt mask in the CC register is not active (RIM instruction).
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit from
Wait
Exit from
Halt
External interrupt on selected external event
-
DDRx
ORx
Yes Yes
50/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)
9.5.1 I/O Port Implementation
The I/O port register configurations are summarised as follows.
Standard Ports
PA5:4, PC7:0, PD7:0, PE7:34,
PE1:0, PF7:3, PG7:0, PH7:0
MODE floating input pull-up input open drain output push-pull output
DDR
0
0
1
1
OR
0
1
0
1
Interrupt Ports
PA2:0, PB6:5, PB4, PB2:0, PF1:0 (with pull-up)
MODE floating input pull-up interrupt input open drain output push-pull output
DDR
0
0
1
1
OR
0
1
0
1
PA3, PB7, PB3, PF2 (without pull-up)
MODE floating input floating interrupt input open drain output push-pull output
DDR
0
0
1
1
True Open Drain Ports
PA7:6
MODE floating input open drain (high sink ports)
Pull-up Input Port (CANTX requirement)
PE2
MODE pull-up input
DDR
0
1
OR
0
1
0
1
Table 11. Port Configuration
Port
Port A
Port B
Port C
Port D
Port E
Port F
Port G
Port H
Pin name
PA7:6
PA5:4
PA3
PA2:0
PB7, PB3
PB6:5, PB4,
PB2:0
PC7:0
PD7:0
PE7:3, PE1:0
PE2
PF7:3
PF2
PF1:0
PG7:0
PH7:0
OR = 0 floating floating floating floating floating floating floating floating floating floating floating floating floating
Input
OR = 1 floating pull-up floating interrupt pull-up interrupt floating interrupt pull-up interrupt
OR = 0
Output
OR = 1 true open-drain open drain push-pull open drain open drain open drain push-pull push-pull push-pull open drain pull-up pull-up open drain open drain pull-up open drain
pull-up input only * pull-up floating interrupt pull-up interrupt pull-up pull-up open drain open drain open drain open drain open drain
* Note: when the CANTX alternate function is selected the I/O port operates in output push-pull mode.
push-pull push-pull push-pull push-pull push-pull push-pull push-pull push-pull push-pull
51/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)
Table 12. I/O Port Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
000Fh
0010h
0011h
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
Reset Value of all I/O port registers
0000h PADR
0001h
0002h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
PADDR
PAOR
PBDR
PBDDR
PBOR
PCDR
0007h
0008h
0009h
000Ah
PCDDR
PCOR
PDDR
PDDDR
000Bh PDOR
000Ch PEDR
000Dh PEDDR
000Eh PEOR
PFDR
PFDDR
PFOR
PGDR
PGDDR
PGOR
PHDR
PHDDR
PHOR
7
0
MSB
MSB
MSB
MSB
MSB
MSB
MSB
MSB
6
0
5
0
Related Documentation
AN 970: SPI Communication between ST7 and
EEPROM
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
AN1045: S/W implementation of I2C bus master
AN1048: Software LCD driver
52/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS
10.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG)
10.1.1 Introduction
The Watchdog timer is used to detect the occurrence of a software fault, usually generated by external interference or by unforeseen logical conditions, which causes the application program to abandon its normal sequence. The Watchdog circuit generates an MCU reset on expiry of a programmed time period, unless the program refreshes the counter’s contents before the T6 bit becomes cleared.
10.1.2 Main Features
■
■
■
■
■
Programmable free-running downcounter
Programmable reset
Reset (if watchdog activated) when the T6 bit reaches zero
Optional reset on HALT instruction
(configurable by option byte)
Hardware Watchdog selectable by option byte
10.1.3 Functional Description
The counter value stored in the Watchdog Control register (WDGCR bits T[6:0]), is decremented every 16384 f
OSC2
cycles (approx.), and the length of the timeout period can be programmed by the user in 64 increments.
If the watchdog is activated (the WDGA bit is set) and when the 7-bit timer (bits T[6:0]) rolls over from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared), it initiates a reset cycle pulling low the reset pin for typically
500ns.
The application program must write in the
WDGCR register at regular intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset. This downcounter is free-running: it counts down even if the watchdog is disabled. The value to be stored in the
WDGCR register must be between FFh and C0h:
– The WDGA bit is set (watchdog enabled)
– The T6 bit is set to prevent generating an immediate reset
– The T[5:0] bits contain the number of increments which represents the time delay before the watchdog produces a reset (see
Figure 33. Approximate Timeout Duration
). The timing varies between a minimum and a maximum value due to the unknown status of the prescaler when writing to the WDGCR register (see
).
Following a reset, the watchdog is disabled. Once activated it cannot be disabled, except by a reset.
The T6 bit can be used to generate a software reset (the WDGA bit is set and the T6 bit is cleared).
If the watchdog is activated, the HALT instruction will generate a Reset.
Figure 32. Watchdog Block Diagram
RESET f
OSC2
MCC/RTC
DIV 64
WDGA
WATCHDOG CONTROL REGISTER (WDGCR)
T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
6-BIT DOWNCOUNTER (CNT)
T0
11
12-BIT MCC
RTC COUNTER
MSB LSB
6 5 0
TB[1:0] bits
(MCCSR
Register)
WDG PRESCALER
DIV 4
53/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
28
20
18
10
08
00
1.5
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)
10.1.4 How to Program the Watchdog Timeout
shows the linear relationship between the 6-bit value to be loaded in the Watchdog Counter (CNT) and the resulting timeout duration in milliseconds. This can be used for a quick calculation without taking the timing variations into account. If
Figure 33. Approximate Timeout Duration
3F more precision is needed, use the formulae in
.
Caution: When writing to the WDGCR register, always write 1 in the T6 bit to avoid generating an immediate reset.
38
30
18 34 50 65 82
Watchdog timeout (ms) @ 8 MHz. f
OSC2
98 114 128
54/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 34. Exact Timeout Duration (t min
and t max
)
WHERE: t min0
= (LSB + 128) x 64 x t
OSC2 t max0
= 16384 x t
OSC2 t
OSC2
= 125ns if f
OSC2
=8 MHz
CNT = Value of T[5:0] bits in the WDGCR register (6 bits)
MSB and LSB are values from the table below depending on the timebase selected by the TB[1:0] bits in the MCCSR register
TB1 Bit
(MCCSR Reg.)
0
0
1
1
TB0 Bit
(MCCSR Reg.)
0
1
0
1
Selected MCCSR
Timebase
2ms
4ms
10ms
25ms
MSB LSB
4
8
20
49
59
53
35
54
To calculate the minimum Watchdog Timeout (t min
):
IF CNT <
4
THEN t min
= t min0
+ 16384
×
CNT
× t osc2
ELSE t min
= t min0
+ 16384
×
⎛
⎝
CNT –
MSB
⎞
⎠
+ (
192 + LSB
) ×
64
×
MSB
× t osc2
To calculate the maximum Watchdog Timeout (t max
):
IF
CNT
≤
4
THEN t max
= t max0
+
16384
×
CNT
× t osc2
ELSE t max
= t max0
+ 16384
×
⎛
CNT –
MSB
+ (
192 + LSB
) ×
64
×
MSB
× t osc2
Note: In the above formulae, division results must be rounded down to the next integer value.
Example:
With 2ms timeout selected in MCCSR register
Value of T[5:0] Bits in
WDGCR Register (Hex.)
00
3F
Min. Watchdog
Timeout (ms) t min
1.496
128
Max. Watchdog
Timeout (ms) t max
2.048
128.552
55/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)
10.1.5 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
SLOW No effect on Watchdog.
WAIT No effect on Watchdog.
OIE bit in
MCCSR register
WDGHALT bit in Option
Byte
HALT
0
0
1
0
1 x
No Watchdog reset is generated. The MCU enters Halt mode. The Watchdog counter is decremented once and then stops counting and is no longer able to generate a watchdog reset until the MCU receives an external interrupt or a reset.
If an external interrupt is received, the Watchdog restarts counting after 256 or 4096 CPU clocks. If a reset is generated, the Watchdog is disabled (reset state) unless Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte. For application recommendations see
below.
A reset is generated.
No reset is generated. The MCU enters Active Halt mode. The Watchdog counter is not decremented. It stop counting. When the MCU receives an oscillator interrupt or external interrupt, the Watchdog restarts counting immediately. When the MCU receives a reset the Watchdog restarts counting after 256 or 4096 CPU clocks.
10.1.6 Hardware Watchdog Option
If Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte, the watchdog is always active and the WDGA bit in the WDGCR is not used. Refer to the Option Byte description.
10.1.7 Using Halt Mode with the WDG
(WDGHALT option)
The following recommendation applies if Halt mode is used when the watchdog is enabled.
– Before executing the HALT instruction, refresh the WDG counter, to avoid an unexpected WDG reset immediately after waking up the microcontroller.
10.1.8 Interrupts
None.
10.1.9 Register Description
CONTROL REGISTER (WDGCR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)
7
WDGA T6 T5 T4
Bit 7 = WDGA Activation bit.
T3 T2 T1
0
T0
This bit is set by software and only cleared by hardware after a reset. When WDGA = 1, the watchdog can generate a reset.
0: Watchdog disabled
1: Watchdog enabled
Note: This bit is not used if the hardware watchdog option is enabled by option byte.
Bit 6:0 = T[6:0] 7-bit counter (MSB to LSB).
These bits contain the value of the watchdog counter. It is decremented every 16384 f
OSC2
cycles (approx.). A reset is produced when it rolls over from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared).
56/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Table 13. Watchdog Timer Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
002Ah
Register
Label
WDGCR
Reset Value
7
WDGA
0
6
T6
1
5
T5
1
4
T4
1
3
T3
1
2
T2
1
1
T1
1
0
T0
1
57/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC)
The Main Clock Controller consists of three different functions:
■
■ a programmable CPU clock prescaler a clock-out signal to supply external devices
■ a real time clock timer with interrupt capability
Each function can be used independently and simultaneously.
10.2.1 Programmable CPU Clock Prescaler
The programmable CPU clock prescaler supplies the clock for the ST7 CPU and its internal peripherals. It manages SLOW power saving mode (See
for more details).
The prescaler selects the f
CPU
main clock frequency and is controlled by three bits in the MCCSR register: CP[1:0] and SMS.
10.2.2 Clock-out Capability
The clock-out capability is an alternate function of an I/O port pin that outputs a f
CPU
clock to drive
Figure 35. Main Clock Controller (MCC/RTC) Block Diagram external devices. It is controlled by the MCO bit in the MCCSR register.
CAUTION: When selected, the clock out pin suspends the clock during ACTIVE-HALT mode.
10.2.3 Real Time Clock Timer (RTC)
The counter of the real time clock timer allows an interrupt to be generated based on an accurate real time clock. Four different time bases depending directly on f
OSC2
are available. The whole functionality is controlled by four bits of the MCC-
SR register: TB[1:0], OIE and OIF.
When the RTC interrupt is enabled (OIE bit set), the ST7 enters ACTIVE-HALT mode when the
HALT instruction is executed. See Section 8.4 AC-
TIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES for more details.
10.2.4 Beeper
The beep function is controlled by the MCCBCR register. It can output three selectable frequencies on the BEEP pin (I/O port alternate function). f
OSC2
BC1 BC0
MCCBCR
BEEP SIGNAL
SELECTION
BEEP
MCO
DIV 64
12-BIT MCC RTC
COUNTER
TO
WATCHDOG
TIMER
MCO CP1 CP0 SMS TB1 TB0 OIE OIF
MCCSR
DIV 2, 4, 8, 16 1
0
MCC/RTC INTERRUPT f
CPU
CPU CLOCK
TO CPU AND
PERIPHERALS
58/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK (Cont’d)
10.2.5 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
WAIT
ACTIVE-
HALT
HALT
No effect on MCC/RTC peripheral.
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
No effect on MCC/RTC counter (OIE bit is set), the registers are frozen.
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit from ACTIVE-HALT mode.
MCC/RTC counter and registers are frozen.
MCC/RTC operation resumes when the
MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT” capability.
Bit 6:5 = CP[1:0] CPU clock prescaler
These bits select the CPU clock prescaler which is applied in the different slow modes. Their action is conditioned by the setting of the SMS bit. These two bits are set and cleared by software f
CPU
in SLOW mode f
OSC2
/ 2 f
OSC2
/ 4 f
OSC2
/ 8 f
OSC2
/ 16
CP1
0
0
1
1
CP0
0
1
0
1
10.2.6 Interrupts
The MCC/RTC interrupt event generates an interrupt if the OIE bit of the MCCSR register is set and the interrupt mask in the CC register is not active
(RIM instruction).
Interrupt Event
Time base overflow event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit from
Wait
OIF OIE
Exit from
Halt
Yes No
1)
Bit 4 = SMS Slow mode select
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Normal mode. f
CPU
1: Slow mode. f
CPU
= f
OSC2
is given by CP1, CP0
See
and
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME
for more details.
Note:
The MCC/RTC interrupt wakes up the MCU from
ACTIVE-HALT mode, not from HALT mode.
10.2.7 Register Description
MCC CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (MCCSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h
)
Bit 3:2 = TB[1:0] Time base control
These bits select the programmable divider time base. They are set and cleared by software.
Counter
Prescaler
16000
32000
80000
200000
Time Base f
OSC2
=4MHz f
OSC2
=8MHz
4ms
8ms
2ms
4ms
20ms
50ms
10ms
25ms
TB1 TB0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
7 0
A modification of the time base is taken into account at the end of the current period (previously set) to avoid an unwanted time shift. This allows to use this time base as a real time clock.
MCO CP1 CP0 SMS TB1 TB0 OIE OIF
Bit 7 = MCO Main clock out selection
This bit enables the MCO alternate function on the
PF0 I/O port. It is set and cleared by software.
0: MCO alternate function disabled (I/O pin free for general-purpose I/O)
1: MCO alternate function enabled (f
CPU port) on I/O
Note: To reduce power consumption, the MCO function is not active in ACTIVE-HALT mode.
Bit 1 = OIE Oscillator interrupt enable
This bit set and cleared by software.
0: Oscillator interrupt disabled
1: Oscillator interrupt enabled
This interrupt can be used to exit from ACTIVE-
HALT mode.
When this bit is set, calling the ST7 software HALT instruction enters the ACTIVE-HALT power saving mode
.
59/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK (Cont’d)
Bit 0 = OIF Oscillator interrupt flag
This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software reading the MCCSR register. It indicates when set that the main oscillator has reached the selected elapsed time (TB1:0).
0: Timeout not reached
1: Timeout reached
MCC BEEP CONTROL REGISTER (MCCBCR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 BC1 BC0
CAUTION: The BRES and BSET instructions must not be used on the MCCSR register to avoid unintentionally clearing the OIF bit.
Bit 7:2 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 1:0 = BC[1:0] Beep control
These 2 bits select the PF1 pin beep capability.
BC1
0
0
1
1
BC0
0
1
0
1
Beep mode with f
OSC2
=8MHz
Off
~2-KHz
~1-KHz
Output
Beep signal
~50% duty cycle
~500-Hz
The beep output signal is available in ACTIVE-
HALT mode but has to be disabled to reduce the consumption.
Table 14. Main Clock Controller Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
002Bh
002Ch
002Dh
Register
Label
SICSR
Reset Value
MCCSR
Reset Value
MCCBCR
Reset Value
7
AVDS
0
MCO
0
0
6
AVDIE
0
CP1
0
0
5
AVDF
0
CP0
0
0
4
LVDRF x
SMS
0
0
3
0
TB1
0
0
2
0
TB0
0
0
1
0
OIE
0
BC1
0
0
WDGRF x
OIF
0
BC0
0
60/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.3 PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (ART)
10.3.1 Introduction
The Pulse Width Modulated Auto-Reload Timer on-chip peripheral consists of an 8-bit auto reload counter with compare/capture capabilities and of a
7-bit prescaler clock source.
These resources allow five possible operating modes:
– Generation of up to 4 independent PWM signals
– Output compare and Time base interrupt
Figure 36. PWM Auto-Reload Timer Block Diagram
– Up to two input capture functions
– External event detector
– Up to two external interrupt sources
The three first modes can be used together with a single counter frequency.
The timer can be used to wake up the MCU from
WAIT and HALT modes.
PWMCR OEx OPx OCRx
REGISTER
DCRx
REGISTER
LOAD
PWMx
PORT
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
POLARITY
CONTROL
COMPARE
ARR
REGISTER
8-BIT COUNTER
(CAR REGISTER)
LOAD
ARTICx
INPUT CAPTURE
CONTROL
LOAD ICRx
REGISTER
ARTCLK
ICSx ICIEx ICFx ICCSR
ICx INTERRUPT f
EXT f
CPU f
COUNTER
MUX f
INPUT PROGRAMMABLE
PRESCALER
EXCL CC2 CC1 CC0 TCE FCRL OIE OVF ARTCSR
OVF INTERRUPT
61/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.2 Functional Description
Counter
The free running 8-bit counter is fed by the output of the prescaler, and is incremented on every rising edge of the clock signal.
It is possible to read or write the contents of the counter on the fly by reading or writing the Counter
Access register (ARTCAR).
When a counter overflow occurs, the counter is automatically reloaded with the contents of the
ARTARR register (the prescaler is not affected).
Counter clock and prescaler
The counter clock frequency is given by: f
COUNTER
= f
INPUT
/ 2
CC[2:0]
The timer counter’s input clock (f
INPUT
) feeds the
7-bit programmable prescaler, which selects one of the 8 available taps of the prescaler, as defined by CC[2:0] bits in the Control/Status Register
(ARTCSR). Thus the division factor of the prescaler can be set to 2 n
(where n = 0, 1,..7).
This f
INPUT
frequency source is selected through the EXCL bit of the ARTCSR register and can be either the f
CPU
or an external input frequency f
EXT
.
The clock input to the counter is enabled by the
TCE (Timer Counter Enable) bit in the ARTCSR register. When TCE is reset, the counter is stopped and the prescaler and counter contents are frozen. When TCE is set, the counter runs at the rate of the selected clock source.
Figure 37. Output compare control
Counter and Prescaler Initialization
After RESET, the counter and the prescaler are cleared and f
INPUT
= f
CPU
.
The counter can be initialized by:
– Writing to the ARTARR register and then setting the FCRL (Force Counter Re-Load) and the TCE
(Timer Counter Enable) bits in the ARTCSR register.
– Writing to the ARTCAR counter access register,
In both cases the 7-bit prescaler is also cleared, whereupon counting will start from a known value.
Direct access to the prescaler is not possible.
Output compare control
The timer compare function is based on four different comparisons with the counter (one for each
PWMx output). Each comparison is made between the counter value and an output compare register (OCRx) value. This OCRx register can not be accessed directly, it is loaded from the duty cycle register (PWMDCRx) at each overflow of the counter.
This double buffering method avoids glitch generation when changing the duty cycle on the fly.
f
COUNTER
COUNTER FDh
OCRx
PWMDCRx
PWMx
FEh
ARTARR=FDh
FFh FDh
FDh
FDh
FEh FFh
FEh
FDh
FEh
FEh FFh
62/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
Independent PWM signal generation
This mode allows up to four Pulse Width Modulated signals to be generated on the PWMx output pins with minimum core processing overhead.
This function is stopped during HALT mode.
Each PWMx output signal can be selected independently using the corresponding OEx bit in the
PWM Control register (PWMCR). When this bit is set, the corresponding I/O pin is configured as output push-pull alternate function.
The PWM signals all have the same frequency which is controlled by the counter period and the
ARTARR register value.
f
PWM
= f
COUNTER
/ (256 - ARTARR)
When a counter overflow occurs, the PWMx pin level is changed depending on the corresponding
OPx (output polarity) bit in the PWMCR register.
Figure 38. PWM Auto-reload Timer Function
255
DUTY CYCLE
REGISTER
(PWMDCRx)
When the counter reaches the value contained in one of the output compare register (OCRx) the corresponding PWMx pin level is restored.
It should be noted that the reload values will also affect the value and the resolution of the duty cycle of the PWM output signal. To obtain a signal on a
PWMx pin, the contents of the OCRx register must be greater than the contents of the ARTARR register.
The maximum available resolution for the PWMx duty cycle is:
Resolution = 1 / (256 - ARTARR)
Note: To get the maximum resolution (1/256), the
ARTARR register must be 0. With this maximum resolution, 0% and 100% can be obtained by changing the polarity.
AUTO-RELOAD
REGISTER
(ARTARR)
000
WITH OEx=1
AND OPx=0
WITH OEx=1
AND OPx=1 t
Figure 39. PWM Signal from 0% to 100% Duty Cycle f
COUNTER
ARTARR=FDh
COUNTER
FDh FEh FFh FDh
OCRx=FCh
OCRx=FDh
OCRx=FEh
OCRx=FFh
FEh FFh FDh FEh t
63/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
Output compare and Time base interrupt
On overflow, the OVF flag of the ARTCSR register is set and an overflow interrupt request is generated if the overflow interrupt enable bit, OIE, in the
ARTCSR register, is set. The OVF flag must be reset by the user software. This interrupt can be used as a time base in the application.
External clock and event detector mode
Using the f
EXT
external prescaler input clock, the auto-reload timer can be used as an external clock event detector. In this mode, the ARTARR register is used to select the n
EVENT
number of events to be counted before setting the OVF flag.
n
EVENT
= 256 - ARTARR
Caution: The external clock function is not available in HALT mode. If HALT mode is used in the application, prior to executing the HALT instruction, the counter must be disabled by clearing the TCE bit in the ARTCSR register to avoid spurious counter increments.
Figure 40. External Event Detector Example (3 counts) f
EXT
=f
COUNTER
COUNTER
FDh
OVF
FEh
ARTARR=FDh
FFh FDh FEh FFh FDh
INTERRUPT
IF OIE=1
ARTCSR READ
INTERRUPT
IF OIE=1
ARTCSR READ t
64/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
Input capture function
This mode allows the measurement of external signal pulse widths through ARTICRx registers.
Each input capture can generate an interrupt independently on a selected input signal transition.
This event is flagged by a set of the corresponding
CFx bits of the Input Capture Control/Status register (ARTICCSR).
These input capture interrupts are enabled through the CIEx bits of the ARTICCSR register.
The active transition (falling or rising edge) is software programmable through the CSx bits of the
ARTICCSR register.
The read only input capture registers (ARTICRx) are used to latch the auto-reload counter value when a transition is detected on the ARTICx pin
(CFx bit set in ARTICCSR register). After fetching the interrupt vector, the CFx flags can be read to identify the interrupt source.
Note: After a capture detection, data transfer in the ARTICRx register is inhibited until it is read
(clearing the CFx bit).
The timer interrupt remains pending while the CFx flag is set when the interrupt is enabled (CIEx bit set). This means, the ARTICRx register has to be read at each capture event to clear the CFx flag.
External interrupt capability
This mode allows the Input capture capabilities to be used as external interrupt sources. The interrupts are generated on the edge of the ARTICx signal.
The edge sensitivity of the external interrupts is programmable (CSx bit of ARTICCSR register) and they are independently enabled through CIEx bits of the ARTICCSR register. After fetching the interrupt vector, the CFx flags can be read to identify the interrupt source.
During HALT mode, the external interrupts can be used to wake up the micro (if the CIEx bit is set).
The timing resolution is given by auto-reload counter cycle time (1/f
COUNTER
).
Note: During HALT mode, if both input capture and external clock are enabled, the ARTICRx register value is not guaranteed if the input capture pin and the external clock change simultaneously.
Figure 41. Input Capture Timing Diagram f
COUNTER
COUNTER
01h
ARTICx PIN
CFx FLAG
ICRx REGISTER
02h xxh
03h 04h 05h 06h
INTERRUPT
07h
04h t
65/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.3 Register Description
CONTROL / STATUS REGISTER (ARTCSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
EXCL CC2 CC1 CC0 TCE FCRL OIE OVF
Bit 7 = EXCL External Clock
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects the input clock for the 7-bit prescaler.
0: CPU clock.
1: External clock.
Bit 6:4 = CC[2:0] Counter Clock Control
These bits are set and cleared by software. They determine the prescaler division ratio from f
INPUT
. f
COUNTER f
INPUT f f
INPUT f
INPUT
INPUT
/ 2
/ 4
/ 8 f
INPUT
/ 16 f
INPUT
/ 32 f
INPUT
/ 64 f
INPUT
/ 128
With f
INPUT
=8 MHz CC2 CC1 CC0
8 MHz
4 MHz
2 MHz
1 MHz
500 KHz
250 KHz
125 KHz
62.5 KHz
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Bit 3 = TCE Timer Counter Enable
This bit is set and cleared by software. It puts the timer in the lowest power consumption mode.
0: Counter stopped (prescaler and counter frozen).
1: Counter running.
Bit 2 = FCRL Force Counter Re-Load
This bit is write-only and any attempt to read it will yield a logical zero. When set, it causes the contents of ARTARR register to be loaded into the counter, and the content of the prescaler register to be cleared in order to initialize the timer before starting to count.
Bit 1 = OIE Overflow Interrupt Enable
This bit is set and cleared by software. It allows to enable/disable the interrupt which is generated when the OVF bit is set.
0: Overflow Interrupt disable.
1: Overflow Interrupt enable.
Bit 0 = OVF Overflow Flag
This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software reading the ARTCSR register. It indicates the transition of the counter from FFh to the ARTARR value
.
0: New transition not yet reached
1: Transition reached
COUNTER ACCESS REGISTER (ARTCAR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
CA7 CA6 CA5 CA4 CA3 CA2 CA1 CA0
Bit 7:0 = CA[7:0] Counter Access Data
These bits can be set and cleared either by hardware or by software. The ARTCAR register is used to read or write the auto-reload counter “on the fly”
(while it is counting).
AUTO-RELOAD REGISTER (ARTARR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
Bit 7:0 = AR[7:0] Counter Auto-Reload Data
These bits are set and cleared by software. They are used to hold the auto-reload value which is automatically loaded in the counter when an overflow occurs. At the same time, the PWM output levels are changed according to the corresponding OPx bit in the PWMCR register.
This register has two PWM management functions:
– Adjusting the PWM frequency
– Setting the PWM duty cycle resolution
PWM Frequency vs. Resolution:
ARTARR value
0
[ 0..127 ]
[ 128..191 ]
[ 192..223 ]
[ 224..239 ]
Resolution
8-bit
> 7-bit
> 6-bit
> 5-bit
> 4-bit f
PWM
Min Max
~0.244-KHz 31.25-KHz
~0.244-KHz 62.5-KHz
~0.488-KHz 125-KHz
~0.977-KHz 250-KHz
~1.953-KHz 500-KHz
66/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
PWM CONTROL REGISTER (PWMCR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
OE3 OE2 OE1 OE0 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0
Bit 7:4 = OE[3:0] PWM Output Enable
These bits are set and cleared by software. They enable or disable the PWM output channels independently acting on the corresponding I/O pin.
0: PWM output disabled.
1: PWM output enabled.
Bit 3:0 = OP[3:0] PWM Output Polarity
These bits are set and cleared by software. They independently select the polarity of the four PWM output signals.
PWMx output level
Counter <= OCRx
1
0
Counter > OCRx
0
1
OPx
0
1
Note: When an OPx bit is modified, the PWMx output signal polarity is immediately reversed.
DUTY CYCLE REGISTERS (PWMDCRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
DC7 DC6 DC5 DC4 DC3 DC2 DC1 DC0
Bit 7:0 = DC[7:0] Duty Cycle Data
These bits are set and cleared by software.
A PWMDCRx register is associated with the OCRx register of each PWM channel to determine the second edge location of the PWM signal (the first edge location is common to all channels and given by the ARTARR register). These PWMDCR registers allow the duty cycle to be set independently for each PWM channel.
67/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
INPUT CAPTURE
CONTROL / STATUS REGISTER (ARTICCSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
0 0 CS2 CS1 CIE2 CIE1 CF2 CF1
INPUT CAPTURE REGISTERS (ARTICRx)
Read only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
IC7 IC6 IC5 IC4 IC3 IC2
0
IC1 IC0
Bit 7:6 = Reserved, always read as 0.
Bit 5:4 = CS[2:1] Capture Sensitivity
These bits are set and cleared by software. They determine the trigger event polarity on the corresponding input capture channel.
0: Falling edge triggers capture on channel x.
1: Rising edge triggers capture on channel x.
Bit 3:2 = CIE[2:1] Capture Interrupt Enable
These bits are set and cleared by software. They enable or disable the Input capture channel interrupts independently.
0: Input capture channel x interrupt disabled.
1: Input capture channel x interrupt enabled.
Bit 1:0 = CF[2:1] Capture Flag
These bits are set by hardware and cleared by software reading the corresponding ARTICRx register. Each CFx bit indicates that an input capture x has occurred.
0: No input capture on channel x.
1: An input capture has occured on channel x.
Bit 7:0 = IC[7:0] Input Capture Data
These read only bits are set and cleared by hardware. An ARTICRx register contains the 8-bit auto-reload counter value transferred by the input capture channel x event.
68/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)
Table 15. PWM Auto-Reload Timer Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
0073h
0074h
0075h
0076h
0077h
0078h
0079h
007Ah
007Bh
007Ch
007Dh
Register
Label
PWMDCR3
Reset Value
PWMDCR2
Reset Value
PWMDCR1
Reset Value
PWMDCR0
Reset Value
PWMCR
Reset Value
ARTCSR
Reset Value
ARTCAR
Reset Value
ARTARR
Reset Value
ARTICCSR
Reset Value
ARTICR1
Reset Value
ARTICR2
Reset Value
7
DC5
0
DC5
0
AR5
0
CS2
0
IC5
0
IC5
0
DC5
0
DC5
0
OE1
0
CC1
0
CA5
0
DC6
0
DC6
0
DC6
0
DC6
0
OE2
0
CC2
0
CA6
0
AR6
0
DC7
0
DC7
0
DC7
0
DC7
0
OE3
0
EXCL
0
CA7
0
AR7
0
0
IC7
0
IC7
0
6
0
IC6
0
IC6
0
5 4 3
DC4
0
DC4
0
AR4
0
CS1
0
IC4
0
IC4
0
DC4
0
DC4
0
OE0
0
CC0
0
CA4
0
DC3
0
DC3
0
AR3
0
CIE2
0
IC3
0
IC3
0
DC3
0
DC3
0
OP3
0
TCE
0
CA3
0
2
DC2
0
DC2
0
AR2
0
CIE1
0
IC2
0
IC2
0
DC2
0
DC2
0
OP2
0
FCRL
0
CA2
0
1
DC1
0
DC1
0
AR1
0
CF2
0
IC1
0
IC1
0
DC1
0
DC1
0
OP1
0
RIE
0
CA1
0
0
DC0
0
DC0
0
AR0
0
CF1
0
IC0
0
IC0
0
DC0
0
DC0
0
OP0
0
OVF
0
CA0
0
69/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.4 16-BIT TIMER
■
■
■
■
10.4.1 Introduction
The timer consists of a 16-bit free-running counter driven by a programmable prescaler.
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including pulse length measurement of up to two input signals (input capture) or generation of up to two output waveforms (output compare and PWM).
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler and the CPU clock prescaler.
Some ST7 devices have two on-chip 16-bit timers.
They are completely independent, and do not share any resources. They are synchronized after a MCU reset as long as the timer clock frequencies are not modified.
This description covers one or two 16-bit timers. In
ST7 devices with two timers, register names are prefixed with TA (Timer A) or TB (Timer B).
10.4.2 Main Features
■
■
Programmable prescaler: f
CPU
divided by 2, 4 or 8.
Overflow status flag and maskable interrupt
■
■
External clock input (must be at least 4 times slower than the CPU clock speed) with the choice of active edge
1 or 2 Output Compare functions each with:
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers
– 2 dedicated programmable signals
– 2 dedicated status flags
■
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt
1 or 2 Input Capture functions each with:
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers
– 2 dedicated active edge selection signals
– 2 dedicated status flags
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt
Pulse width modulation mode (PWM)
One pulse mode
Reduced Power Mode
5 alternate functions on I/O ports (ICAP1, ICAP2,
OCMP1, OCMP2, EXTCLK)*
When reading an input signal on a non-bonded pin, the value will always be ‘1’.
10.4.3 Functional Description
10.4.3.1 Counter
The main block of the Programmable Timer is a
16-bit free running upcounter and its associated
16-bit registers. The 16-bit registers are made up of two 8-bit registers called high & low.
Counter Register (CR):
– Counter High Register (CHR) is the most significant byte (MS Byte).
– Counter Low Register (CLR) is the least significant byte (LS Byte).
Alternate Counter Register (ACR)
– Alternate Counter High Register (ACHR) is the m ost significant byte (MS Byte).
– Alternate Counter Low Register (ACLR) is the least significant byte (LS Byte).
These two read-only 16-bit registers contain the same value but with the difference that reading the
ACLR register does not clear the TOF bit (Timer overflow flag), located in the Status register, (SR),
(see note at the end of paragraph titled 16-bit read sequence).
Writing in the CLR register or ACLR register resets the free running counter to the FFFCh value.
Both counters have a reset value of FFFCh (this is the only value which is reloaded in the 16-bit timer). The reset value of both counters is also
FFFCh in One Pulse mode and PWM mode.
The timer clock depends on the clock control bits
of the CR2 register, as illustrated in Table 16 Clock
. The value in the counter register repeats every 131072, 262144 or 524288 CPU clock cycles depending on the CC[1:0] bits.
The timer frequency can be f
CPU or an external frequency.
/2, f
CPU
/4, f
CPU
/8
The Block Diagram is shown in
.
*Note: Some timer pins may not be available (not bonded) in some ST7 devices. Refer to the device pin out description.
70/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 42. Timer Block Diagram
ST7 INTERNAL BUS
EXTCLK pin f
CPU
MCU-PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
8 high
8 low
8-bit buffer
1/2
1/4
1/8
EXEDG
16
COUNTER
REGISTER
ALTERNATE
COUNTER
REGISTER
16
CC[1:0]
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
OUTPUT
COMPARE
REGISTER
1
OUTPUT
COMPARE
REGISTER
2
INPUT
CAPTURE
REGISTER
1
INPUT
CAPTURE
REGISTER
2
16 16
TIMER INTERNAL BUS
16 16
OVERFLOW
DETECT
CIRCUIT
OUTPUT COMPARE
CIRCUIT
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT1
ICAP1 pin
6
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT2
ICAP2 pin
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2 TIMD 0 0
(Control/Status Register)
CSR
LATCH1
LATCH2
OCMP1 pin
OCMP2 pin
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1
(Control Register 1) CR1
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG
(Control Register 2) CR2
(See note)
TIMER INTERRUPT Note: If IC, OC and TO interrupt requests have separate vectors then the last OR is not present (See device Interrupt Vector Table)
71/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
16-bit read sequence: (from either the Counter
Register or the Alternate Counter Register).
Beginning of the sequence
At t0
Read
MS Byte
LS Byte is buffered
Other instructions
At t0 +
∆ t
Read
LS Byte
Returns the buffered
LS Byte value at t0
Sequence completed
The user must read the MS Byte first, then the LS
Byte value is buffered automatically.
This buffered value remains unchanged until the
16-bit read sequence is completed, even if the user reads the MS Byte several times.
After a complete reading sequence, if only the
CLR register or ACLR register are read, they return the LS Byte of the count value at the time of the read.
Whatever the timer mode used (input capture, output compare, one pulse mode or PWM mode) an overflow occurs when the counter rolls over from
FFFFh to 0000h then:
– The TOF bit of the SR register is set.
– A timer interrupt is generated if:
– TOIE bit of the CR1 register is set and
– I bit of the CC register is cleared.
If one of these conditions is false, the interrupt remains pending to be issued as soon as they are both true.
Clearing the overflow interrupt request is done in two steps:
1. Reading the SR register while the TOF bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the CLR register.
Notes: The TOF bit is not cleared by accesses to
ACLR register. The advantage of accessing the
ACLR register rather than the CLR register is that it allows simultaneous use of the overflow function and reading the free running counter at random times (for example, to measure elapsed time) without the risk of clearing the TOF bit erroneously.
The timer is not affected by WAIT mode.
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until the mode is exited. Counting then resumes from the previous count (MCU awakened by an interrupt) or from the reset count (MCU awakened by a Reset).
10.4.3.2 External Clock
The external clock (where available) is selected if
CC0=1 and CC1=1 in the CR2 register.
The status of the EXEDG bit in the CR2 register determines the type of level transition on the external clock pin EXTCLK that will trigger the free running counter.
The counter is synchronized with the falling edge of the internal CPU clock.
A minimum of four falling edges of the CPU clock must occur between two consecutive active edges of the external clock; thus the external clock frequency must be less than a quarter of the CPU clock frequency.
72/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 43. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 2
CPU CLOCK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0003
Figure 44. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 4
CPU CLOCK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
FFFC
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)
FFFD 0000 0001
Figure 45. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 8
CPU CLOCK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
FFFC FFFD 0000
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)
Note: The MCU is in reset state when the internal reset signal is high, when it is low the MCU is running.
73/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.3 Input Capture
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because there are 2 input capture functions in the 16-bit timer.
The two 16-bit input capture registers (IC1R and
IC2R) are used to latch the value of the free running counter after a transition is detected on the
ICAPi pin (see figure 5).
ICiR
MS Byte
ICiHR
LS Byte
ICiLR
ICiR register is a read-only register.
The active transition is software programmable through the IEDGi bit of Control Registers (CRi).
Timing resolution is one count of the free running counter: ( f
CPU
/ CC[1:0]).
Procedure:
To use the input capture function select the following in the CR2 register:
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see
).
– Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP2 pin with the IEDG2 bit (the ICAP2 pin must be configured as floating input or input with pull-up without interrupt if this configuration is available).
And select the following in the CR1 register:
– Set the ICIE bit to generate an interrupt after an input capture coming from either the ICAP1 pin or the ICAP2 pin
– Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1pin must be configured as floating input or input with pullup without interrupt if this configuration is available).
When an input capture occurs:
– ICFi bit is set.
– The ICiR register contains the value of the free running counter on the active transition on the
).
– A timer interrupt is generated if the ICIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in the CC register. Otherwise, the interrupt remains pending until both conditions become true.
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.
Notes:
1. After reading the ICiHR register, transfer of input capture data is inhibited and ICFi will never be set until the ICiLR register is also read.
2. The ICiR register contains the free running counter value which corresponds to the most recent input capture.
3. The 2 input capture functions can be used together even if the timer also uses the 2 output compare functions.
4. In One pulse Mode and PWM mode only Input
Capture 2 can be used.
5. The alternate inputs (ICAP1 & ICAP2) are always directly connected to the timer. So any transitions on these pins activates the input capture function.
Moreover if one of the ICAPi pins is configured as an input and the second one as an output, an interrupt can be generated if the user toggles the output pin and if the ICIE bit is set.
This can be avoided if the input capture function i is disabled by reading the ICiHR (see note
1).
6. The TOF bit can be used with interrupt generation in order to measure events that go beyond the timer range (FFFFh).
74/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 46. Input Capture Block Diagram
ICAP1 pin
ICAP2 pin
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT2
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT1
IC2R Register IC1R Register
16-BIT
16-BIT FREE RUNNING
COUNTER
ICIE
ICF1
(Control Register 1) CR1
IEDG1
ICF2
(Status Register) SR
0 0 0
(Control Register 2) CR2
CC1 CC0 IEDG2
Figure 47. Input Capture Timing Diagram
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
ICAPi PIN
ICAPi FLAG
FF01 FF02
ICAPi REGISTER
Note: The rising edge is the a ctive edge.
FF03
FF03
75/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.4 Output Compare
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because there are 2 output compare functions in the 16-bit timer.
This function can be used to control an output waveform or indicate when a period of time has elapsed.
When a match is found between the Output Compare register and the free running counter, the output compare function:
– Assigns pins with a programmable value if the
OCiE bit is set
– Sets a flag in the status register
– Generates an interrupt if enabled
Two 16-bit registers Output Compare Register 1
(OC1R) and Output Compare Register 2 (OC2R) contain the value to be compared to the counter register each timer clock cycle.
OCiR
MS Byte
OCiHR
LS Byte
OCiLR
These registers are readable and writable and are not affected by the timer hardware. A reset event changes the OC i R value to 8000h.
Timing resolution is one count of the free running counter: ( f
CPU/ CC[1:0]
).
Procedure:
To use the output compare function, select the following in the CR2 register:
– Set the OCiE bit if an output is needed then the
OCMPi pin is dedicated to the output compare i signal.
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see
).
And select the following in the CR1 register:
– Select the OLVLi bit to applied to the OCMPi pins after the match occurs.
– Set the OCIE bit to generate an interrupt if it is needed.
When a match is found between OCRi register and CR register:
– OCFi bit is set.
– The OCMPi pin takes OLVLi bit value (OCMPi pin latch is forced low during reset).
– A timer interrupt is generated if the OCIE bit is set in the CR1 register and the I bit is cleared in the CC register (CC).
The OC i R register value required for a specific timing application can be calculated using the following formula:
∆
OCiR =
∆ t
*
f
CPU
PRESC
Where:
∆ t = Output compare period (in seconds) f
CPU
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)
PRESC
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depending on CC[1:0] bits, see
If the timer clock is an external clock, the formula is:
∆
OCiR =
∆ t
*
f
EXT
Where:
∆ t = Output compare period (in seconds) f
EXT
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)
Clearing the output compare interrupt request (i.e.
clearing the OCFi bit) is done by:
1. Reading the SR register while the OCFi bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the OCiLR register.
The following procedure is recommended to prevent the OCFi bit from being set between the time it is read and the write to the OC i R register:
– Write to the OCiHR register (further compares are inhibited).
– Read the SR register (first step of the clearance of the OCFi bit, which may be already set).
– Write to the OCiLR register (enables the output compare function and clears the OCFi bit).
76/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Notes:
1. After a processor write cycle to the OCiHR register, the output compare function is inhibited until the OCiLR register is also written.
2. If the OCiE bit is not set, the OCMPi pin is a general I/O port and the OLVLi bit will not appear when a match is found but an interrupt could be generated if the OCIE bit is set.
3. When the timer clock is f
CPU
/2, OCFi and
OCMPi are set while the counter value equals
the OCiR register value (see Figure 49 on page
). This behaviour is the same in OPM or
PWM mode.
When the timer clock is f
CPU
/4, f
CPU
/8 or in external clock mode, OCFi and OCMPi are set while the counter value equals the OCiR register value plus 1 (see
).
4. The output compare functions can be used both for generating external events on the OCMPi pins even if the input capture mode is also used.
5. The value in the 16-bit OC i R register and the
OLVi bit should be changed after each successful comparison in order to control an output waveform or establish a new elapsed timeout.
Figure 48. Output Compare Block Diagram
Forced Compare Output capability
When the FOLVi bit is set by software, the OLVLi bit is copied to the OCMPi pin. The OLVi bit has to be toggled in order to toggle the OCMPi pin when it is enabled (OCiE bit=1). The OCFi bit is then not set by hardware, and thus no interrupt request is generated.
The FOLVLi bits have no effect in both one pulse mode and PWM mode.
16 BIT FREE RUNNING
COUNTER
16-bit
OUTPUT COMPARE
CIRCUIT
16-bit 16-bit
OC1R Register
OC2R Register
OC1E OC2E
OCIE
CC1 CC0
(Control Register 2) CR2
(Control Register 1) CR1
FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 OLVL1
Latch
1
Latch
2
OCF1 OCF2 0 0 0
(Status Register) SR
OCMP1
Pin
OCMP2
Pin
77/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 49. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f
TIMER
=f
CPU
/2
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2 2ED3 2ED4
2ED3
Figure 50. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f
TIMER
=f
CPU
/4
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)
COMPARE REGISTER i LATCH
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2 2ED3 2ED4
2ED3
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)
78/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.5 One Pulse Mode
One Pulse mode enables the generation of a pulse when an external event occurs. This mode is selected via the OPM bit in the CR2 register.
The one pulse mode uses the Input Capture1 function and the Output Compare1 function.
Procedure:
To use one pulse mode:
1. Load the OC1R register with the value corresponding to the length of the pulse (see the formula in the opposite column).
2. Select the following in the CR1 register:
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin after the pulse.
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin during the pulse.
– Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1 pin must be configured as floating input).
3. Select the following in the CR2 register:
– Set the OC1E bit, the OCMP1 pin is then dedicated to the Output Compare 1 function.
– Set the OPM bit.
– Select the timer clock CC[1:0] (see Table 16
).
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.
The OC1R register value required for a specific timing application can be calculated using the following formula: t
* f
CPU
OCiR Value =
- 5
PRESC
Where: t = Pulse period (in seconds) f
CPU
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)
PRESC
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depending on the CC[1:0] bits, see
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:
OCiR = t
*
f
EXT
-5
Where: t = Pulse period (in seconds) f
EXT
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)
When the value of the counter is equal to the value of the contents of the OC1R register, the OLVL1
bit is output on the OCMP1 pin, (See Figure 51 ).
When event occurs on ICAP1
When
Counter
= OC1R
One pulse mode cycle
ICR1 = Counter
OCMP1 = OLVL2
Counter is reset to FFFCh
ICF1 bit is set
OCMP1 = OLVL1
Then, on a valid event on the ICAP1 pin, the counter is initialized to FFFCh and OLVL2 bit is loaded on the OCMP1 pin, the ICF1 bit is set and the value FFFDh is loaded in the IC1R register.
Because the ICF1 bit is set when an active edge occurs, an interrupt can be generated if the ICIE bit is set.
Notes:
1. The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in one pulse mode but the OCF2 bit can generate an
Output Compare interrupt.
2. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the
PWM mode is the only active one.
3. If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be seen on the OCMP1 pin.
4. The ICAP1 pin can not be used to perform input capture. The ICAP2 pin can be used to perform input capture (ICF2 can be set and IC2R can be loaded) but the user must take care that the counter is reset each time a valid edge occurs on the ICAP1 pin and ICF1 can also generates interrupt if ICIE is set.
5. When one pulse mode is used OC1R is dedicated to this mode. Nevertheless OC2R and
OCF2 can be used to indicate a period of time has been elapsed but cannot generate an output waveform because the level OLVL2 is dedicated to the one pulse mode.
79/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 51. One Pulse Mode Timing Example
IC1R
COUNTER
01F8 FFFC FFFD FFFE
ICAP1
OCMP1
OLVL2
01F8
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2
2ED3
2ED3
FFFC FFFD
OLVL2 compare1
OLVL1
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1
Figure 52. Pulse Width Modulation Mode Timing Example with 2 Output Compare Functions
COUNTER 34E2
FFFC FFFD FFFE
OLVL2
OCMP1 compare2
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2 34E2 FFFC compare1
OLVL1 OLVL2 compare2
Note: OC1R=2ED0h, OC2R=34E2, OLVL1=0, OLVL2= 1
Note: On timers with only 1 Output Compare register, a fixed frequency PWM signal can be generated using the output compare and the counter overflow to define the pulse length.
80/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode enables the generation of a signal with a frequency and pulse length determined by the value of the OC1R and
OC2R registers.
Pulse Width Modulation mode uses the complete
Output Compare 1 function plus the OC2R register, and so this functionality can not be used when
PWM mode is activated.
In PWM mode, double buffering is implemented on the output compare registers. Any new values written in the OC1R and OC2R registers are taken into account only at the end of the PWM period
(OC2) to avoid spikes on the PWM output pin
(OCMP1).
Procedure
To use pulse width modulation mode:
1. Load the OC2R register with the value corresponding to the period of the signal using the formula in the opposite column.
2. Load the OC1R register with the value corresponding to the period of the pulse if (OLVL1=0 and OLVL2=1) using the formula in the opposite column.
3. Select the following in the CR1 register:
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful comparison with the OC1R register.
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful comparison with the OC2R register.
4. Select the following in the CR2 register:
– Set OC1E bit: the OCMP1 pin is then dedicated to the output compare 1 function.
– Set the PWM bit.
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see
).
Pulse Width Modulation cycle
When
Counter
= OC1R
OCMP1 = OLVL1
When
Counter
= OC2R
OCMP1 = OLVL2
Counter is reset to FFFCh
ICF1 bit is set
If OLVL1=1 and OLVL2=0 the length of the positive pulse is the difference between the OC2R and
OC1R registers.
If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be seen on the OCMP1 pin.
The OC i R register value required for a specific timing application can be calculated using the following formula: t
* f
CPU
OCiR Value =
- 5
PRESC
Where: t = Signal or pulse period (in seconds) f
CPU
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)
PRESC
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-
ing on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 16 Clock
)
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:
OCiR = t
*
f
EXT
-5
Where: t = Signal or pulse period (in seconds) f
EXT
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)
The Output Compare 2 event causes the counter to be initialized to FFFCh (See
Notes:
1. After a write instruction to the OCiHR register, the output compare function is inhibited until the
OCiLR register is also written.
2. The OCF1 and OCF2 bits cannot be set by hardware in PWM mode therefore the Output
Compare interrupt is inhibited.
3. The ICF1 bit is set by hardware when the counter reaches the OC2R value and can produce a timer interrupt if the ICIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared.
4. In PWM mode the ICAP1 pin can not be used to perform input capture because it is disconnected to the timer. The ICAP2 pin can be used to perform input capture (ICF2 can be set and
IC2R can be loaded) but the user must take care that the counter is reset each period and
ICF1 can also generates interrupt if ICIE is set.
5. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the
PWM mode is the only active one.
81/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.4 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on 16-bit Timer.
Timer interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
16-bit Timer registers are frozen.
HALT
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until Halt mode is exited. Counting resumes from the previous count when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability or from the counter reset value when the MCU is woken up by a RESET.
If an input capture event occurs on the ICAPi pin, the input capture detection circuitry is armed. Consequently, when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability, the ICFi bit is set, and the counter value present when exiting from HALT mode is captured into the ICiR register.
10.4.5 Interrupts
Interrupt Event
Input Capture 1 event/Counter reset in PWM mode
Input Capture 2 event
Output Compare 1 event (not available in PWM mode)
Output Compare 2 event (not available in PWM mode)
Timer Overflow event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
ICF1
ICF2
OCF1
OCF2
TOF
ICIE
OCIE
TOIE
Exit from
Wait
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exit from
Halt
No
No
No
No
No
Note: The 16-bit Timer interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter). These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).
10.4.6 Summary of Timer modes
MODES
Input Capture (1 and/or 2)
Output Compare (1 and/or 2)
One Pulse Mode
PWM Mode
Input Capture 1
Yes
Yes
No
No
TIMER RESOURCES
Input Capture 2 Output Compare 1 Output Compare 2
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Not Recommended
1)
Not Recommended
3)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Partially
No
2)
1) See note 4 in
Section 10.4.3.5 One Pulse Mode
2) See note 5 in
Section 10.4.3.5 One Pulse Mode
3) See note 4 in
Section 10.4.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
82/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.7 Register Description
Each Timer is associated with three control and status registers, and with six pairs of data registers
(16-bit values) relating to the two input captures, the two output compares, the counter and the alternate counter.
Bit 4 = FOLV2 Forced Output Compare 2.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No effect on the OCMP2 pin.
1: Forces the OLVL2 bit to be copied to the
OCMP2 pin, if the OC2E bit is set and even if there is no successful comparison.
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1
Bit 7 = ICIE Input Capture Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the
ICF1 or ICF2 bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 3 = FOLV1 Forced Output Compare 1.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No effect on the OCMP1 pin.
1: Forces OLVL1 to be copied to the OCMP1 pin, if the OC1E bit is set and even if there is no successful comparison.
Bit 2 = OLVL2 Output Level 2.
This bit is copied to the OCMP2 pin whenever a successful comparison occurs with the OC2R register and OCxE is set in the CR2 register. This value is copied to the OCMP1 pin in One Pulse Mode and Pulse Width Modulation mode.
Bit 6 = OCIE Output Compare Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the
OCF1 or OCF2 bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 5 = TOIE Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is enabled whenever the TOF bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 1 = IEDG1 Input Edge 1.
This bit determines which type of level transition on the ICAP1 pin will trigger the capture.
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.
Bit 0 = OLVL1 Output Level 1.
The OLVL1 bit is copied to the OCMP1 pin whenever a successful comparison occurs with the
OC1R register and the OC1E bit is set in the CR2 register.
83/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG
Bit 4 = PWM Pulse Width Modulation.
0: PWM mode is not active.
1: PWM mode is active, the OCMP1 pin outputs a programmable cyclic signal; the length of the pulse depends on the value of OC1R register; the period depends on the value of OC2R register.
Bit 7 = OC1E Output Compare 1 Pin Enable.
This bit is used only to output the signal from the timer on the OCMP1 pin (OLV1 in Output Compare mode, both OLV1 and OLV2 in PWM and one-pulse mode). Whatever the value of the OC1E bit, the Output Compare 1 function of the timer remains active.
0: OCMP1 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin free for general-purpose I/O).
1: OCMP1 pin alternate function enabled.
Bit 6 = OC2E Output Compare 2 Pin Enable.
This bit is used only to output the signal from the timer on the OCMP2 pin (OLV2 in Output Compare mode). Whatever the value of the OC2E bit, the Output Compare 2 function of the timer remains active.
0: OCMP2 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin free for general-purpose I/O).
1: OCMP2 pin alternate function enabled.
Bit 5 = OPM One Pulse Mode.
0: One Pulse Mode is not active.
1: One Pulse Mode is active, the ICAP1 pin can be used to trigger one pulse on the OCMP1 pin; the active transition is given by the IEDG1 bit. The length of the generated pulse depends on the contents of the OC1R register.
Bit 3, 2 = CC[1:0] Clock Control.
The timer clock mode depends on these bits:
Table 16. Clock Control Bits
Timer Clock f
CPU
/ 4 f
CPU
/ 2 f
CPU
/ 8
External Clock (where available)
1
Note: If the external clock pin is not available, programming the external clock configuration stops the counter.
CC1
0
0
1
CC0
0
1
0
1
Bit 1 = IEDG2 Input Edge 2.
This bit determines which type of level transition on the ICAP2 pin will trigger the capture.
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.
Bit 0 = EXEDG External Clock Edge.
This bit determines which type of level transition on the external clock pin EXTCLK will trigger the counter register.
0: A falling edge triggers the counter register.
1: A rising edge triggers the counter register.
84/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)
Read/Write (bits 7:3 read only)
Reset Value: xxxx x0xx (xxh)
7
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2 TIMD 0
0
0
Bit 7 = ICF1 Input Capture Flag 1.
0: No input capture (reset value).
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP1 pin or the counter has reached the OC2R value in
PWM mode. To clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read or write the low byte of the
IC1R (IC1LR) register.
Bit 6 = OCF1 Output Compare Flag 1.
0: No match (reset value).
1: The content of the free running counter has matched the content of the OC1R register. To clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read or write the low byte of the OC1R (OC1LR) register.
Bit 5 = TOF Timer Overflow Flag.
0: No timer overflow (reset value).
1: The free running counter rolled over from FFFFh to 0000h. To clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read or write the low byte of the CR
(CLR) register.
Note: Reading or writing the ACLR register does not clear TOF.
Bit 4 = ICF2 Input Capture Flag 2.
0: No input capture (reset value).
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP2 pin. To clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read or write the low byte of the IC2R
(IC2LR) register.
Bit 3 = OCF2 Output Compare Flag 2.
0: No match (reset value).
1: The content of the free running counter has matched the content of the OC2R register. To clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read or write the low byte of the OC2R (OC2LR) register.
Bit 2 = TIMD Timer disable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it freezes the timer prescaler and counter and disabled the output functions (OCMP1 and OCMP2 pins) to reduce power consumption. Access to the timer registers is still available, allowing the timer configuration to be changed, or the counter reset, while it is disabled.
0: Timer enabled
1: Timer prescaler, counter and outputs disabled
Bits 1:0 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
85/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
INPUT CAPTURE 1 HIGH REGISTER (IC1HR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the high part of the counter value (transferred by the input capture 1 event).
7 0
MSB LSB
OUTPUT COMPARE 1 HIGH REGISTER
(OC1HR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part of the value to be compared to the CHR register.
7 0
MSB LSB
INPUT CAPTURE 1 LOW REGISTER (IC1LR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the low part of the counter value (transferred by the input capture 1 event).
7 0
MSB LSB
OUTPUT COMPARE 1 LOW REGISTER
(OC1LR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of the value to be compared to the CLR register.
7 0
MSB LSB
86/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
OUTPUT COMPARE 2 HIGH REGISTER
(OC2HR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part of the value to be compared to the CHR register.
7 0
MSB LSB
ALTERNATE COUNTER HIGH REGISTER
(ACHR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part of the counter value.
7 0
MSB LSB
OUTPUT COMPARE 2 LOW REGISTER
(OC2LR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of the value to be compared to the CLR register.
7 0
MSB LSB
ALTERNATE COUNTER LOW REGISTER
(ACLR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of the counter value. A write to this register resets the counter. An access to this register after an access to CSR register does not clear the TOF bit in the
CSR register.
7 0
MSB LSB
COUNTER HIGH REGISTER (CHR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part of the counter value.
7 0
MSB LSB
INPUT CAPTURE 2 HIGH REGISTER (IC2HR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the high part of the counter value (transferred by the
Input Capture 2 event).
7
MSB
0
LSB COUNTER LOW REGISTER (CLR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of the counter value. A write to this register resets the counter. An access to this register after accessing the CSR register clears the TOF bit.
7 0
MSB LSB
INPUT CAPTURE 2 LOW REGISTER (IC2LR)
Read Only
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the low part of the counter value (transferred by the Input Capture 2 event).
7
MSB
0
LSB
87/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)
Table 17. 16-Bit Timer Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Label
CR1
Reset Value
CR2
Reset Value
CSR
Reset Value
IC1HR
Reset Value
IC1LR
Reset Value
OC1HR
Reset Value
OC1LR
Reset Value
OC2HR
Reset Value
OC2LR
Reset Value
CHR
Reset Value
CLR
Reset Value
ACHR
Reset Value
ACLR
Reset Value
IC2HR
Reset Value
IC2LR
Reset Value
Timer A: 32
Timer B: 42
Timer A: 31
Timer B: 41
Timer A: 33
Timer B: 43
Timer A: 34
Timer B: 44
Timer A: 35
Timer B: 45
Timer A: 36
Timer B: 46
Timer A: 37
Timer B: 47
Timer A: 3E
Timer B: 4E
Timer A: 3F
Timer B: 4F
Timer A: 38
Timer B: 48
Timer A: 39
Timer B: 49
Timer A: 3A
Timer B: 4A
Timer A: 3B
Timer B: 4B
Timer A: 3C
Timer B: 4C
Timer A: 3D
Timer B: 4D
7
MSB
1
MSB
1
MSB
1
MSB x
MSB x
MSB x
MSB
1
MSB
0
MSB
1
ICIE
0
OC1E
0
ICF1 x
MSB x
MSB
0
MSB
1
6
OCIE
0
OC2E
0
OCF1 x x x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1 x x
5
TOIE
0
OPM
0
TOF x x x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1 x x
4
FOLV2
0
PWM
0
ICF2 x x x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1 x x
Related Documentation
AN 973: SCI software communications using 16bit timer
AN 974: Real Time Clock with ST7 Timer Output
Compare
AN 976: Driving a buzzer through the ST7 Timer
PWM function
3
FOLV1
0
CC1
0
OCF2 x x x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1 x
2
OLVL2
0
CC0
0
TIMD
0 x x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1 x
1
IEDG1
0
IEDG2
0
x x x
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0 x
0
LSB
0
LSB
1
LSB
0
LSB x
LSB x
LSB x
LSB
0
LSB
0
LSB
0
OLVL1
0
EXEDG
0
x
LSB x
LSB
0
LSB
1 x x x
AN1041: Using ST7 PWM signal to generate analog input (sinusoid)
AN1046: UART emulation software
AN1078: PWM duty cycle switch implementing true 0 or 100 per cent duty cycle
AN1504: Starting a PWM signal directly at high level using the ST7 16-Bit timer
88/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.5 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
10.5.1 Introduction
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows fullduplex, synchronous, serial communication with external devices. An SPI system may consist of a master and one or more slaves however the SPI interface can not be a master in a multi-master system.
10.5.2 Main Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Full duplex synchronous transfers (on 3 lines)
Simplex synchronous transfers (on 2 lines)
Master or slave operation
Six master mode frequencies (f
CPU
/4 max.) f
CPU
/2 max. slave mode frequency (see note)
SS Management by software or hardware
Programmable clock polarity and phase
End of transfer interrupt flag
Write collision, Master Mode Fault and Overrun flags
Figure 53. Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram
Note: In slave mode, continuous transmission is not possible at maximum frequency due to the software overhead for clearing status flags and to initiate the next transmission sequence.
10.5.3 General Description
shows the serial peripheral interface
(SPI) block diagram. There are 3 registers:
– SPI Control Register (SPICR)
– SPI Control/Status Register (SPICSR)
– SPI Data Register (SPIDR)
The SPI is connected to external devices through
4 pins:
– MISO: Master In / Slave Out data
– MOSI: Master Out / Slave In data
– SCK: Serial Clock out by SPI masters and input by SPI slaves
Data/Address Bus
Read
SPIDR
Read Buffer
Interrupt request
MOSI
MISO
8-Bit Shift Register
7
SPIF WCOL OVR MODF 0
SPICSR 0
SOD SSM SSI
Write
SOD bit
SS
1
0
SCK
SPI
STATE
CONTROL
7 SPICR 0
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0
MASTER
CONTROL
SERIAL CLOCK
GENERATOR
SS
89/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
– SS: Slave select:
This input signal acts as a ‘chip select’ to let the SPI master communicate with slaves individually and to avoid contention on the data lines. Slave SS inputs can be driven by standard I/O ports on the master MCU.
10.5.3.1 Functional Description
A basic example of interconnections between a single master and a single slave is illustrated in
.
The MOSI pins are connected together and the
MISO pins are connected together. In this way data is transferred serially between master and slave (most significant bit first).
Figure 54. Single Master/ Single Slave Application
The communication is always initiated by the master. When the master device transmits data to a slave device via MOSI pin, the slave device responds by sending data to the master device via the MISO pin. This implies full duplex communication with both data out and data in synchronized with the same clock signal (which is provided by the master device via the SCK pin).
To use a single data line, the MISO and MOSI pins must be connected at each node ( in this case only simplex communication is possible).
Four possible data/clock timing relationships may
) but master and slave must be programmed with the same timing mode.
MASTER
MSBit LSBit
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER
MISO
MOSI
MISO
MOSI
SLAVE
MSBit LSBit
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER
SPI
CLOCK
GENERATOR
SCK
SS
+5V
SCK
SS
Not used if SS is managed
by software
90/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.3.2 Slave Select Management
As an alternative to using the SS pin to control the
Slave Select signal, the application can choose to manage the Slave Select signal by software. This is configured by the SSM bit in the SPICSR register (see
)
In software management, the external SS pin is free for other application uses and the internal SS signal level is driven by writing to the SSI bit in the
SPICSR register.
In Master mode:
– SS internal must be held high continuously
In Slave Mode:
There are two cases depending on the data/clock
timing relationship (see Figure 55 ):
If CPHA=1 (data latched on 2nd clock edge):
– SS internal must be held low during the entire transmission. This implies that in single slave applications the SS pin either can be tied to
V
SS
, or made free for standard I/O by managing the SS function by software (SSM= 1 and
SSI=0 in the in the SPICSR register)
If CPHA=0 (data latched on 1st clock edge):
– SS internal must be held low during byte transmission and pulled high between each byte to allow the slave to write to the shift register. If SS is not pulled high, a Write Collision error will occur when the slave writes to the
shift register (see Section 10.5.5.3
Figure 55. Generic SS Timing Diagram
MOSI/MISO
Master SS
Slave SS
(if CPHA=0)
Slave SS
(if CPHA=1)
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
Figure 56. Hardware/Software Slave Select Management
SSM bit
SSI bit
SS external pin
1
0
SS internal
91/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.3.3 Master Mode Operation
In master mode, the serial clock is output on the
SCK pin. The clock frequency, polarity and phase are configured by software (refer to the description of the SPICSR register).
Note: The idle state of SCK must correspond to the polarity selected in the SPICSR register (by pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if
CPOL=0).
To operate the SPI in master mode, perform the following steps in order (if the SPICSR register is not written first, the SPICR register setting (MSTR bit) may be not taken into account):
1. Write to the SPICR register:
– Select the clock frequency by configuring the
SPR[2:0] bits.
– Select the clock polarity and clock phase by
configuring the CPOL and CPHA bits. Figure
57 shows the four possible configurations.
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL and CPHA settings as the master.
2. Write to the SPICSR register:
– Either set the SSM bit and set the SSI bit or clear the SSM bit and tie the SS pin high for the complete byte transmit sequence.
3. Write to the SPICR register:
– Set the MSTR and SPE bits
Note: MSTR and SPE bits remain set only if
SS is high).
The transmit sequence begins when software writes a byte in the SPIDR register.
10.5.3.4 Master Mode Transmit Sequence
When software writes to the SPIDR register, the data byte is loaded into the 8-bit shift register and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin most significant bit first.
When data transfer is complete:
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware
– An interrupt request is generated if the SPIE bit is set and the interrupt mask in the CCR register is cleared.
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following software sequence:
1. An access to the SPICSR register while the
SPIF bit is set
2. A read to the SPIDR register.
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR register is read.
10.5.3.5 Slave Mode Operation
In slave mode, the serial clock is received on the
SCK pin from the master device.
To operate the SPI in slave mode:
1. Write to the SPICSR register to perform the following actions:
– Select the clock polarity and clock phase by configuring the CPOL and CPHA bits (see
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL and CPHA settings as the master.
– Manage the SS pin as described in
and
. If CPHA=1 SS must be held low continuously. If CPHA=0 SS must be held low during byte transmission and pulled up between each byte to let the slave write in the shift register.
2. Write to the SPICR register to clear the MSTR bit and set the SPE bit to enable the SPI I/O functions.
10.5.3.6 Slave Mode Transmit Sequence
When software writes to the SPIDR register, the data byte is loaded into the 8-bit shift register and then shifted out serially to the MISO pin most significant bit first.
The transmit sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the most significant bit of the data on its MOSI pin.
When data transfer is complete:
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware
– An interrupt request is generated if SPIE bit is set and interrupt mask in the CCR register is cleared.
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following software sequence:
1. An access to the SPICSR register while the
SPIF bit is set.
2. A write or a read to the SPIDR register.
Notes: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR register is read.
The SPIF bit can be cleared during a second transmission; however, it must be cleared before the second SPIF bit in order to prevent an Overrun
condition (see Section 10.5.5.2
92/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.4 Clock Phase and Clock Polarity
Four possible timing relationships may be chosen by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits (See
).
Note: The idle state of SCK must correspond to the polarity selected in the SPICSR register (by pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if
CPOL=0).
The combination of the CPOL clock polarity and
CPHA (clock phase) bits selects the data capture clock edge
Figure 57. Data Clock Timing Diagram
CPHA =1
Figure 57 , shows an SPI transfer with the four
combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin, the MOSI pin are directly connected between the master and the slave device.
Note: If CPOL is changed at the communication byte boundaries, the SPI must be disabled by resetting the SPE bit.
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
MISO
(from master)
MSBit Bit 6
MOSI
(from slave)
SS
(to slave)
CAPTURE STROBE
MSBit Bit 6
Bit 5 Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 4
Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSBit
Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSBit
CPHA =0
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
MISO
(from master)
MOSI
(from slave)
MSBit
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 1
SS
(to slave)
CAPTURE STROBE
Note: This figure should not be used as a replacement for parametric information.
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics chapter.
LSBit
LSBit
93/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.5 Error Flags
10.5.5.1 Master Mode Fault (MODF)
Master mode fault occurs when the master device has its SS pin pulled low.
When a Master mode fault occurs:
– The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt request is generated if the SPIE bit is set.
– The SPE bit is reset. This blocks all output from the device and disables the SPI peripheral.
– The MSTR bit is reset, thus forcing the device into slave mode.
Clearing the MODF bit is done through a software sequence:
1. A read access to the SPICSR register while the
MODF bit is set.
2. A write to the SPICR register.
Notes: To avoid any conflicts in an application with multiple slaves, the SS pin must be pulled high during the MODF bit clearing sequence. The
SPE and MSTR bits may be restored to their original state during or after this clearing sequence.
Hardware does not allow the user to set the SPE and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set except in the MODF bit clearing sequence.
10.5.5.2 Overrun Condition (OVR)
An overrun condition occurs, when the master device has sent a data byte and the slave device has not cleared the SPIF bit issued from the previously transmitted byte.
When an Overrun occurs:
– The OVR bit is set and an interrupt request is generated if the SPIE bit is set.
In this case, the receiver buffer contains the byte sent after the SPIF bit was last cleared. A read to the SPIDR register returns this byte. All other bytes are lost.
The OVR bit is cleared by reading the SPICSR register.
10.5.5.3 Write Collision Error (WCOL)
A write collision occurs when the software tries to write to the SPIDR register while a data transfer is taking place with an external device. When this happens, the transfer continues uninterrupted; and the software write will be unsuccessful.
Write collisions can occur both in master and slave mode. See also
.
Note: a "read collision" will never occur since the received data byte is placed in a buffer in which access is always synchronous with the MCU operation.
The WCOL bit in the SPICSR register is set if a write collision occurs.
No SPI interrupt is generated when the WCOL bit is set (the WCOL bit is a status flag only).
Clearing the WCOL bit is done through a software
Figure 58. Clearing the WCOL bit (Write Collision Flag) Software Sequence
Clearing sequence after SPIF = 1 (end of a data byte transfer)
Read SPICSR
1st Step
2nd Step
Read SPIDR
RESULT
SPIF =0
WCOL=0
Clearing sequence before SPIF = 1 (during a data byte transfer)
Read SPICSR
1st Step
2nd Step Read SPIDR
RESULT
WCOL=0
Note: Writing to the SPIDR register instead of reading it does not reset the WCOL bit
94/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.5.4 Single Master Systems
A typical single master system may be configured, using an MCU as the master and four MCUs as slaves (see
).
The master device selects the individual slave devices by using four pins of a parallel port to control the four SS pins of the slave devices.
The SS pins are pulled high during reset since the master device ports will be forced to be inputs at that time, thus disabling the slave devices.
Note: To prevent a bus conflict on the MISO line the master allows only one active slave device during a transmission.
For more security, the slave device may respond to the master with the received data byte. Then the master will receive the previous byte back from the slave device if all MISO and MOSI pins are connected and the slave has not written to its SPIDR register.
Other transmission security methods can use ports for handshake lines or data bytes with command fields.
Figure 59. Single Master / Multiple Slave Configuration
SCK
Slave
MCU
SS
MOSI MISO
SCK
Slave
MCU
SS
MOSI MISO
SCK
Slave
MCU
SS
MOSI MISO
SCK
Slave
MCU
SS
MOSI MISO
5V
MOSI MISO
SCK
Master
MCU
SS
95/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.6 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
WAIT
HALT
No effect on SPI.
SPI interrupt events cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
SPI registers are frozen.
In HALT mode, the SPI is inactive. SPI operation resumes when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability. The data received is subsequently read from the SPIDR register when the software is running (interrupt vector fetching). If several data are received before the wakeup event, then an overrun error is generated.
This error can be detected after the fetch of the interrupt routine that woke up the device.
Note: When waking up from Halt mode, if the SPI remains in Slave mode, it is recommended to perform an extra communications cycle to bring the
SPI from Halt mode state to normal state. If the
SPI exits from Slave mode, it returns to normal state immediately.
Caution: The SPI can wake up the ST7 from Halt mode only if the Slave Select signal (external SS pin or the SSI bit in the SPICSR register) is low when the ST7 enters Halt mode. So if Slave selection is configured as external (see
), make sure the master drives a low level on the SS pin when the slave enters Halt mode.
10.5.7 Interrupts
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit from
Wait
Exit from
Halt
10.5.6.1 Using the SPI to wakeup the MCU from
Halt mode
In slave configuration, the SPI is able to wakeup the ST7 device from HALT mode through a SPIF interrupt. The data received is subsequently read from the SPIDR register when the software is running (interrupt vector fetch). If multiple data transfers have been performed before software clears the SPIF bit, then the OVR bit is set by hardware.
SPI End of Transfer
Event
Master Mode Fault
Event
Overrun Error
SPIF
MODF
OVR
SPIE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Note: The SPI interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).
They generate an interrupt if the corresponding
Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in
96/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.8 Register Description
CONTROL REGISTER (SPICR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 xxxx (0xh)
7 0
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0
Bit 7 = SPIE Serial Peripheral Interrupt Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SPI interrupt is generated whenever
SPIF=1, MODF=1 or OVR=1 in the SPICSR register
Bit 3 = CPOL Clock Polarity.
This bit is set and cleared by software. This bit determines the idle state of the serial Clock. The
CPOL bit affects both the master and slave modes.
0: SCK pin has a low level idle state
1: SCK pin has a high level idle state
Note: If CPOL is changed at the communication byte boundaries, the SPI must be disabled by resetting the SPE bit.
Bit 2 = CPHA Clock Phase.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: The first clock transition is the first data capture edge.
1: The second clock transition is the first capture edge.
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL and
CPHA settings as the master.
Bit 6 = SPE Serial Peripheral Output Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0
(see
Section 10.5.5.1 Master Mode Fault
(MODF) ). The SPE bit is cleared by reset, so the
SPI peripheral is not initially connected to the external pins.
0: I/O pins free for general purpose I/O
1: SPI I/O pin alternate functions enabled
Bit 5 = SPR2 Divider Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software and is cleared by reset. It is used with the SPR[1:0] bits to set the baud rate. Refer to
Table 18 SPI Master mode SCK Frequency
.
0: Divider by 2 enabled
1: Divider by 2 disabled
Note: This bit has no effect in slave mode.
Bit 4 = MSTR Master Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0
(see
Section 10.5.5.1 Master Mode Fault
0: Slave mode
1: Master mode. The function of the SCK pin changes from an input to an output and the functions of the MISO and MOSI pins are reversed.
Bits 1:0 = SPR[1:0] Serial Clock Frequency.
These bits are set and cleared by software. Used with the SPR2 bit, they select the baud rate of the
SPI serial clock SCK output by the SPI in master mode.
Note: These 2 bits have no effect in slave mode.
Table 18. SPI Master mode SCK Frequency
Serial Clock f
CPU
/4 f
CPU
/8 f
CPU
/16 f
CPU
/32 f
CPU
/64 f
CPU
/128
SPR2 SPR1 SPR0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
97/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (SPICSR)
Read/Write (some bits Read Only)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
SPIF WCOL OVR MODF SOD SSM SSI
Bit 7 = SPIF Serial Peripheral Data Transfer Flag
(Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when a transfer has been completed. An interrupt is generated if
SPIE=1 in the SPICR register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SPICSR register followed by a write or a read to the
SPIDR register).
0: Data transfer is in progress or the flag has been cleared.
1: Data transfer between the device and an external device has been completed.
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR register is read.
Bit 6 = WCOL Write Collision status (Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when a write to the
SPIDR register is done during a transmit sequence. It is cleared by a software sequence (see
).
0: No write collision occurred
1: A write collision has been detected
Bit 5 = OVR SPI Overrun error (Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when the byte currently being received in the shift register is ready to be transferred into the SPIDR register while SPIF = 1
). An interrupt is generated if
SPIE = 1 in SPICR register. The OVR bit is cleared by software reading the SPICSR register.
0: No overrun error
1: Overrun error detected
Bit 4 = MODF Mode Fault flag (Read only).
This bit is set by hardware when the SS pin is pulled low in master mode (see
0: No master mode fault detected
). An SPI interrupt can be generated if SPIE=1 in the SPICSR register.
This bit is cleared by a software sequence (An access to the SPICR register while MODF=1 followed by a write to the SPICR register).
1: A fault in master mode has been detected
Bit 3 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 2 = SOD SPI Output Disable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it disables the alternate function of the SPI output
(MOSI in master mode / MISO in slave mode)
0: SPI output enabled (if SPE=1)
1: SPI output disabled
Bit 1 = SSM SS Management.
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it disables the alternate function of the SPI SS pin and uses the SSI bit value instead. See
10.5.3.2 Slave Select Management
.
0: Hardware management (SS managed by external pin)
1: Software management (internal SS signal controlled by SSI bit. External SS pin free for general-purpose I/O)
Bit 0 = SSI SS Internal Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It acts as a
‘chip select’ by controlling the level of the SS slave select signal when the SSM bit is set.
0 : Slave selected
1 : Slave deselected
DATA I/O REGISTER (SPIDR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
0
D0
The SPIDR register is used to transmit and receive data on the serial bus. In a master device, a write to this register will initiate transmission/reception of another byte.
Notes: During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a copy of the received data byte in the shift register is moved to a buffer. When the user reads the serial peripheral data I/O register, the buffer is actually being read.
While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR register is read.
Warning: A write to the SPIDR register places data directly into the shift register for transmission.
A read to the SPIDR register returns the value located in the buffer and not the content of the shift
98/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Table 19. SPI Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
0021h
0022h
0023h
Register
Label
SPIDR
Reset Value
SPICR
Reset Value
SPICSR
Reset Value
7
MSB x
SPIE
0
SPIF
0
6 x
SPE
0
WCOL
0
5 x
SPR2
0
OR
0
4 x
MSTR
0
MODF
0
3 2 x
CPOL x
0 x
CPHA x
SOD
0
1 x
SPR1 x
SSM
0
0
LSB x
SPR0 x
SSI
0
99/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.6 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
■
■
10.6.1 Introduction
The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) offers a flexible means of full-duplex data exchange with external equipment requiring an industry standard
NRZ asynchronous serial data format. The SCI offers a very wide range of baud rates using two baud rate generator systems.
10.6.2 Main Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Full duplex, asynchronous communications
NRZ standard format (Mark/Space)
Dual baud rate generator systems
Independently programmable transmit and receive baud rates up to 500K baud.
Programmable data word length (8 or 9 bits)
Receive buffer full, Transmit buffer empty and
End of Transmission flags
Two receiver wake-up modes:
■
– Address bit (MSB)
– Idle line
Muting function for multiprocessor configurations
Separate enable bits for Transmitter and
Receiver
Four error detection flags:
– Overrun error
■
■
■
– Noise error
– Frame error
– Parity error
Five interrupt sources with flags:
– Transmit data register empty
– Transmission complete
– Receive data register full
– Idle line received
– Overrun error detected
Parity control:
– Transmits parity bit
– Checks parity of received data byte
Reduced power consumption mode
10.6.3 General Description
The interface is externally connected to another device by two pins (see
):
– TDO: Transmit Data Output. When the transmitter and the receiver are disabled, the output pin returns to its I/O port configuration. When the transmitter and/or the receiver are enabled and nothing is to be transmitted, the TDO pin is at high level.
– RDI: Receive Data Input is the serial data input.
Oversampling techniques are used for data recovery by discriminating between valid incoming data and noise.
Through these pins, serial data is transmitted and received as frames comprising:
– An Idle Line prior to transmission or reception
– A start bit
– A data word (8 or 9 bits) least significant bit first
– A Stop bit indicating that the frame is complete.
This interface uses two types of baud rate generator:
– A conventional type for commonly-used baud rates,
– An extended type with a prescaler offering a very wide range of baud rates even with non-standard oscillator frequencies.
100/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 60. SCI Block Diagram
Write
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
Read
(DATA REGISTER) DR
Received Data Register (RDR)
TDO
RDI
Transmit Shift Register Received Shift Register
CR1
R8 T8 SCID M WAKE PCE PS PIE
TRANSMIT
CONTROL
WAKE
UP
UNIT
CR2
TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK
SCI
INTERRUPT
CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
CLOCK f
CPU
/16 /PR
RECEIVER
CONTROL
RECEIVER
CLOCK
TDRE TC RDRF IDLE OR NF FE PE
SR
TRANSMITTER RATE
CONTROL
BRR
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1SCR0
RECEIVER RATE
CONTROL
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR
101/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4 Functional Description
The block diagram of the Serial Control Interface,
. It contains 6 dedicated registers:
– Two control registers (SCICR1 & SCICR2)
– A status register (SCISR)
– A baud rate register (SCIBRR)
– An extended prescaler receiver register (SCIER-
PR)
– An extended prescaler transmitter register (SCI-
ETPR)
Refer to the register descriptions in
for the definitions of each bit.
10.6.4.1 Serial Data Format
Word length may be selected as being either 8 or 9 bits by programming the M bit in the SCICR1 register (see
).
The TDO pin is in low state during the start bit.
The TDO pin is in high state during the stop bit.
An Idle character is interpreted as an entire frame of “1”s followed by the start bit of the next frame which contains data.
A Break character is interpreted on receiving “0”s for some multiple of the frame period. At the end of the last break frame the transmitter inserts an extra “1” bit to acknowledge the start bit.
Transmission and reception are driven by their own baud rate generator.
Figure 61. Word Length Programming
9-bit Word length (M bit is set)
Start
Bit Bit0 Bit1
Data Frame
Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7
Possible
Parity
Bit
Bit8
Next Data Frame
Stop
Bit
Next
Start
Bit
Idle Frame
Start
Bit
Break Frame Extra
’1’
Start
Bit
8-bit Word length (M bit is reset)
Start
Bit Bit0
Data Frame
Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6
Possible
Parity
Bit
Bit7
Stop
Bit
Next Data Frame
Next
Start
Bit
Idle Frame
Break Frame
Start
Bit
Extra
’1’
Start
Bit
102/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.2 Transmitter
The transmitter can send data words of either 8 or
9 bits depending on the M bit status. When the M bit is set, word length is 9 bits and the 9th bit (the
MSB) has to be stored in the T8 bit in the SCICR1 register.
Character Transmission
During an SCI transmission, data shifts out least significant bit first on the TDO pin. In this mode, the SCIDR register consists of a buffer (TDR) between the internal bus and the transmit shift register (see
).
Procedure
– Select the M bit to define the word length.
– Select the desired baud rate using the SCIBRR and the SCIETPR registers.
– Set the TE bit to assign the TDO pin to the alternate function and to send a idle frame as first transmission.
– Access the SCISR register and write the data to send in the SCIDR register (this sequence clears the TDRE bit). Repeat this sequence for each data to be transmitted.
Clearing the TDRE bit is always performed by the following software sequence:
1. An access to the SCISR register
2. A write to the SCIDR register
The TDRE bit is set by hardware and it indicates:
– The TDR register is empty.
– The data transfer is beginning.
– The next data can be written in the SCIDR register without overwriting the previous data.
This flag generates an interrupt if the TIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the SCIDR register stores the data in the TDR register and which is copied in the shift register at the end of the current transmission.
When no transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the SCIDR register places the data directly in the shift register, the data transmission starts, and the TDRE bit is immediately set.
When a frame transmission is complete (after the stop bit or after the break frame) the TC bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the TCIE is set and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
Clearing the TC bit is performed by the following software sequence:
1. An access to the SCISR register
2. A write to the SCIDR register
Note: The TDRE and TC bits are cleared by the same software sequence.
Break Characters
Setting the SBK bit loads the shift register with a break character. The break frame length depends on the M bit (see
).
As long as the SBK bit is set, the SCI send break frames to the TDO pin. After clearing this bit by software the SCI insert a logic 1 bit at the end of the last break frame to guarantee the recognition of the start bit of the next frame.
Idle Characters
Setting the TE bit drives the SCI to send an idle frame before the first data frame.
Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a transmission sends an idle frame after the current word.
Note: Resetting and setting the TE bit causes the data in the TDR register to be lost. Therefore the best time to toggle the TE bit is when the TDRE bit is set i.e. before writing the next byte in the SCIDR.
103/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.3 Receiver
The SCI can receive data words of either 8 or 9 bits. When the M bit is set, word length is 9 bits and the MSB is stored in the R8 bit in the SCICR1 register.
Character reception
During a SCI reception, data shifts in least significant bit first through the RDI pin. In this mode, the
SCIDR register consists or a buffer (RDR) between the internal bus and the received shift register (see
).
Procedure
– Select the M bit to define the word length.
– Select the desired baud rate using the SCIBRR and the SCIERPR registers.
– Set the RE bit, this enables the receiver which begins searching for a start bit.
When a character is received:
– The RDRF bit is set. It indicates that the content of the shift register is transferred to the RDR.
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
– The error flags can be set if a frame error, noise or an overrun error has been detected during reception.
Clearing the RDRF bit is performed by the following software sequence done by:
1. An access to the SCISR register
2. A read to the SCIDR register.
The RDRF bit must be cleared before the end of the reception of the next character to avoid an overrun error.
Break Character
When a break character is received, the SPI handles it as a framing error.
Idle Character
When a idle frame is detected, there is the same procedure as a data received character plus an interrupt if the ILIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
Overrun Error
An overrun error occurs when a character is received when RDRF has not been reset. Data can not be transferred from the shift register to the
RDR register as long as the RDRF bit is not cleared.
When a overrun error occurs:
– The OR bit is set.
– The RDR content will not be lost.
– The shift register will be overwritten.
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.
The OR bit is reset by an access to the SCISR register followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
Noise Error
Oversampling techniques are used for data recovery by discriminating between valid incoming data and noise. Normal data bits are considered valid if three consecutive samples (8th, 9th, 10th) have the same bit value, otherwise the NF flag is set. In the case of start bit detection, the NF flag is set on the basis of an algorithm combining both valid edge detection and three samples (8th, 9th, 10th).
Therefore, to prevent the NF flag getting set during start bit reception, there should be a valid edge detection as well as three valid samples.
When noise is detected in a frame:
– The NF flag is set at the rising edge of the RDRF bit.
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the
SCIDR register.
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself generates an interrupt.
The NF flag is reset by a SCISR register read operation followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
During reception, if a false start bit is detected (e.g.
8th, 9th, 10th samples are 011,101,110), the frame is discarded and the receiving sequence is not started for this frame. There is no RDRF bit set for this frame and the NF flag is set internally (not accessible to the user). This NF flag is accessible along with the RDRF bit when a next valid frame is received.
Note: If the application Start Bit is not long enough to match the above requirements, then the NF
Flag may get set due to the short Start Bit. In this case, the NF flag may be ignored by the application software when the first valid byte is received.
.
104/215
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 62. SCI Baud Rate and Extended Prescaler Block Diagram
EXTENDED PRESCALER TRANSMITTER RATE CONTROL
SCIETPR
EXTENDED TRANSMITTER PRESCALER REGISTER
SCIERPR
EXTENDED RECEIVER PRESCALER REGISTER
EXTENDED PRESCALER RECEIVER RATE CONTROL
EXTENDED PRESCALER
ST72F521, ST72521B
TRANSMITTER
CLOCK
RECEIVER
CLOCK f
CPU
/16 /PR
TRANSMITTER RATE
CONTROL
SCIBRR
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1SCR0
RECEIVER RATE
CONTROL
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR
105/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Framing Error
A framing error is detected when:
– The stop bit is not recognized on reception at the expected time, following either a de-synchronization or excessive noise.
– A break is received.
When the framing error is detected:
– the FE bit is set by hardware
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the
SCIDR register.
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself generates an interrupt.
The FE bit is reset by a SCISR register read operation followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
10.6.4.4 Conventional Baud Rate Generation
The baud rate for the receiver and transmitter (Rx and Tx) are set independently and calculated as follows:
Tx = f
CPU
(16
*
PR)
*
TR f
CPU
Rx =
(16
*
PR)
*
RR with:
PR = 1, 3, 4 or 13 (see SCP[1:0] bits)
TR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128
(see SCT[2:0] bits)
RR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128
(see SCR[2:0] bits)
All these bits are in the SCIBRR register.
Example: If f
CPU
is 8 MHz (normal mode) and if
PR=13 and TR=RR=1, the transmit and receive baud rates are 38400 baud.
Note: the baud rate registers MUST NOT be changed while the transmitter or the receiver is enabled.
10.6.4.5 Extended Baud Rate Generation
The extended prescaler option gives a very fine tuning on the baud rate, using a 255 value prescaler, whereas the conventional Baud Rate Generator retains industry standard software compatibility.
The extended baud rate generator block diagram is described in the
.
The output clock rate sent to the transmitter or to the receiver will be the output from the 16 divider divided by a factor ranging from 1 to 255 set in the
SCIERPR or the SCIETPR register.
Note: the extended prescaler is activated by setting the SCIETPR or SCIERPR register to a value other than zero. The baud rates are calculated as follows:
Tx = f
CPU
16
*
ETPR*(PR*TR)
Rx = f
CPU
16
*
ERPR*(PR*RR) with:
ETPR = 1,..,255 (see SCIETPR register)
ERPR = 1,.. 255 (see SCIERPR register)
10.6.4.6 Receiver Muting and Wake-up Feature
In multiprocessor configurations it is often desirable that only the intended message recipient should actively receive the full message contents, thus reducing redundant SCI service overhead for all non addressed receivers.
The non addressed devices may be placed in sleep mode by means of the muting function.
Setting the RWU bit by software puts the SCI in sleep mode:
All the reception status bits can not be set.
All the receive interrupts are inhibited.
A muted receiver may be awakened by one of the following two ways:
– by Idle Line detection if the WAKE bit is reset,
– by Address Mark detection if the WAKE bit is set.
Receiver wakes-up by Idle Line detection when the Receive line has recognised an Idle Frame.
Then the RWU bit is reset by hardware but the
IDLE bit is not set.
Receiver wakes-up by Address Mark detection when it received a “1” as the most significant bit of a word, thus indicating that the message is an address. The reception of this particular word wakes up the receiver, resets the RWU bit and sets the
RDRF bit, which allows the receiver to receive this word normally and to use it as an address word.
Caution: In Mute mode, do not write to the
SCICR2 register. If the SCI is in Mute mode during the read operation (RWU=1) and a address mark wake up event occurs (RWU is reset) before the write operation, the RWU bit will be set again by this write operation. Consequently the address byte is lost and the SCI is not woken up from Mute mode.
106/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.7 Parity Control
Parity control (generation of parity bit in transmission and parity checking in reception) can be enabled by setting the PCE bit in the SCICR1 register.
Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit, the possible SCI frame formats are as listed in
.
Table 20. Frame Formats
M bit
0
0
PCE bit
0
1
SCI frame
| SB | 8 bit data | STB |
| SB | 7-bit data | PB | STB |
1 0 | SB | 9-bit data | STB |
1 1 | SB | 8-bit data PB | STB |
Legend: SB = Start Bit, STB = Stop Bit,
PB = Parity Bit
Note: In case of wake up by an address mark, the
MSB bit of the data is taken into account and not the parity bit
Even parity: the parity bit is calculated to obtain an even number of “1s” inside the frame made of the 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is equal to 0 or 1) and the parity bit.
Ex: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be
0 if even parity is selected (PS bit = 0).
Odd parity: the parity bit is calculated to obtain an odd number of “1s” inside the frame made of the 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is equal to
0 or 1) and the parity bit.
Ex: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be
1 if odd parity is selected (PS bit = 1).
Transmission mode: If the PCE bit is set then the
MSB bit of the data written in the data register is not transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
Reception mode: If the PCE bit is set then the interface checks if the received data byte has an even number of “1s” if even parity is selected
(PS=0) or an odd number of “1s” if odd parity is selected (PS=1). If the parity check fails, the PE flag is set in the SCISR register and an interrupt is generated if PIE is set in the SCICR1 register.
10.6.4.8 SCI Clock Tolerance
During reception, each bit is sampled 16 times.
The majority of the 8th, 9th and 10th samples is considered as the bit value. For a valid bit detection, all the three samples should have the same value otherwise the noise flag (NF) is set. For example: if the 8th, 9th and 10th samples are 0, 1 and 1 respectively, then the bit value will be “1”, but the Noise Flag bit is be set because the three samples values are not the same.
Consequently, the bit length must be long enough so that the 8th, 9th and 10th samples have the desired bit value. This means the clock frequency should not vary more than 6/16 (37.5%) within one bit. The sampling clock is resynchronized at each start bit, so that when receiving 10 bits (one start bit, 1 data byte, 1 stop bit), the clock deviation must not exceed 3.75%.
Note: The internal sampling clock of the microcontroller samples the pin value on every falling edge.
Therefore, the internal sampling clock and the time the application expects the sampling to take place may be out of sync. For example: If the baud rate is 15.625 kbaud (bit length is 64µs), then the 8th,
9th and 10th samples will be at 28µs, 32µs & 36µs respectively (the first sample starting ideally at
0µs). But if the falling edge of the internal clock occurs just before the pin value changes, the samples would then be out of sync by ~4us. This means the entire bit length must be at least 40µs
(36µs for the 10th sample + 4µs for synchronization with the internal sampling clock).
107/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.9 Clock Deviation Causes
The causes which contribute to the total deviation are:
– D
TRA
: Deviation due to transmitter error (Local oscillator error of the transmitter or the transmitter is transmitting at a different baud rate).
– D
QUANT
: Error due to the baud rate quantisation of the receiver.
– D
REC
: Deviation of the local oscillator of the receiver: This deviation can occur during the reception of one complete SCI message assuming that the deviation has been compensated at the beginning of the message.
– D
TCL
: Deviation due to the transmission line
(generally due to the transceivers)
All the deviations of the system should be added and compared to the SCI clock tolerance:
D
TRA
+ D
QUANT
+ D
REC
+ D
TCL
< 3.75%
10.6.4.10 Noise Error Causes
See also description of Noise error in
.
Start bit
The noise flag (NF) is set during start bit reception if one of the following conditions occurs:
1. A valid falling edge is not detected. A falling edge is considered to be valid if the 3 consecutive samples before the falling edge occurs are detected as '1' and, after the falling edge occurs, during the sampling of the 16 samples, if one of the samples numbered 3, 5 or 7 is detected as a “1”.
2. During sampling of the 16 samples, if one of the samples numbered 8, 9 or 10 is detected as a
“1”.
Therefore, a valid Start Bit must satisfy both the above conditions to prevent the Noise Flag getting set.
Data Bits
The noise flag (NF) is set during normal data bit reception if the following condition occurs:
– During the sampling of 16 samples, if all three samples numbered 8, 9 and10 are not the same.
The majority of the 8th, 9th and 10th samples is considered as the bit value.
Therefore, a valid Data Bit must have samples 8, 9 and 10 at the same value to prevent the Noise
Flag getting set.
Figure 63. Bit Sampling in Reception Mode
RDI LINE
Sample
clock sampled values
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7/16
6/16
7/16
One bit time
108/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.5 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
No effect on SCI.
WAIT SCI interrupts cause the device to exit from Wait mode.
SCI registers are frozen.
HALT
In Halt mode, the SCI stops transmitting/receiving until Halt mode is exited.
10.6.6 Interrupts
The SCI interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector.
These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the inter-
Interrupt Event
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
Exit from
Wait
Transmit Data Register
Empty
Transmission Complete
TDRE
TC
TIE
TCIE
Received Data Ready to be Read
RDRF
RIE
Overrun Error Detected OR
Idle Line Detected IDLE ILIE
Parity Error PE PIE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exit from
Halt
No
No
No
No
No
No rupt mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).
109/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.7 Register Description
STATUS REGISTER (SCISR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 1100 0000 (C0h)
Note: The IDLE bit will not be set again until the
RDRF bit has been set itself (i.e. a new idle line occurs).
7
TDRE TC RDRF IDLE OR NF FE
Bit 7 = TDRE Transmit data register empty.
0
PE
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the
TDR register has been transferred into the shift register. An interrupt is generated if the TIE bit=1 in the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a write to the SCIDR register).
0: Data is not transferred to the shift register
1: Data is transferred to the shift register
Note: Data will not be transferred to the shift register unless the TDRE bit is cleared.
Bit 3 = OR Overrun error.
This bit is set by hardware when the word currently being received in the shift register is ready to be transferred into the RDR register while RDRF=1.
An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No Overrun error
1: Overrun error is detected
Note: When this bit is set RDR register content will not be lost but the shift register will be overwritten.
Bit 6 = TC Transmission complete.
This bit is set by hardware when transmission of a frame containing Data is complete. An interrupt is generated if TCIE=1 in the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the
SCISR register followed by a write to the SCIDR register).
0: Transmission is not complete
1: Transmission is complete
Note: TC is not set after the transmission of a Preamble or a Break.
Bit 2 = NF Noise flag.
This bit is set by hardware when noise is detected on a received frame. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No noise is detected
1: Noise is detected
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it appears at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself generates an interrupt.
Bit 5 = RDRF Received data ready flag.
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the
RDR register has been transferred to the SCIDR register. An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the
SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: Data is not received
1: Received data is ready to be read
Bit 1 = FE Framing error.
This bit is set by hardware when a de-synchronization, excessive noise or a break character is detected. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No Framing error is detected
1: Framing error or break character is detected
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it appears at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself generates an interrupt. If the word currently being transferred causes both frame error and overrun error, it will be transferred and only the OR bit will be set.
Bit 4 = IDLE Idle line detect.
This bit is set by hardware when a Idle Line is detected. An interrupt is generated if the ILIE=1 in the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No Idle Line is detected
1: Idle Line is detected
Bit 0 = PE Parity error.
This bit is set by hardware when a parity error occurs in receiver mode. It is cleared by a software sequence (a read to the status register followed by an access to the SCIDR data register). An interrupt is generated if PIE=1 in the SCICR1 register.
0: No parity error
1: Parity error
110/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (SCICR1)
Read/Write
Reset Value: x000 0000 (x0h)
7 0
Bit 3 = WAKE Wake-Up method.
This bit determines the SCI Wake-Up method, it is set or cleared by software.
0: Idle Line
1: Address Mark
R8 T8 SCID M WAKE PCE PS PIE
Bit 7 = R8 Receive data bit 8.
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the received word when M=1.
Bit 6 = T8 Transmit data bit 8.
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the transmitted word when M=1.
Bit 2 = PCE Parity control enable.
This bit selects the hardware parity control (generation and detection). When the parity control is enabled, the computed parity is inserted at the MSB position (9th bit if M=1; 8th bit if M=0) and parity is checked on the received data. This bit is set and cleared by software. Once it is set, PCE is active after the current byte (in reception and in transmission).
0: Parity control disabled
1: Parity control enabled
Bit 5 = SCID Disabled for low power consumption
When this bit is set the SCI prescalers and outputs are stopped and the end of the current byte transfer in order to reduce power consumption.This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: SCI enabled
1: SCI prescaler and outputs disabled
Bit 1 = PS Parity selection.
This bit selects the odd or even parity when the parity generation/detection is enabled (PCE bit set). It is set and cleared by software. The parity will be selected after the current byte.
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
Bit 4 = M Word length.
This bit determines the word length. It is set or cleared by software.
0: 1 Start bit, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
1: 1 Start bit, 9 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
Note: The M bit must not be modified during a data transfer (both transmission and reception).
Bit 0 = PIE Parity interrupt enable.
This bit enables the interrupt capability of the hardware parity control when a parity error is detected
(PE bit set). It is set and cleared by software.
0: Parity error interrupt disabled
1: Parity error interrupt enabled.
111/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (SCICR2)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU
0
SBK
Notes:
– During transmission, a “0” pulse on the TE bit
(“0” followed by “1”) sends a preamble (idle line) after the current word.
– When TE is set there is a 1 bit-time delay before the transmission starts.
Caution: The TDO pin is free for general purpose
I/O only when the TE and RE bits are both cleared
(or if TE is never set).
Bit 7 = TIE Transmitter interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever
TDRE=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 6 = TCIE Transmission complete interrupt ena- ble
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever TC=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 2 = RE Receiver enable.
This bit enables the receiver. It is set and cleared by software.
0: Receiver is disabled
1: Receiver is enabled and begins searching for a start bit
Bit 5 = RIE Receiver interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever OR=1 or RDRF=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 1 = RWU Receiver wake-up.
This bit determines if the SCI is in mute mode or not. It is set and cleared by software and can be cleared by hardware when a wake-up sequence is recognized.
0: Receiver in Active mode
1: Receiver in Mute mode
Note: Before selecting Mute mode (setting the
RWU bit), the SCI must receive some data first, otherwise it cannot function in Mute mode with wakeup by idle line detection.
Bit 4 = ILIE Idle line interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever IDLE=1 in the SCISR register.
Bit 3 = TE Transmitter enable.
This bit enables the transmitter. It is set and cleared by software.
0: Transmitter is disabled
1: Transmitter is enabled
Bit 0 = SBK Send break.
This bit set is used to send break characters. It is set and cleared by software.
0: No break character is transmitted
1: Break characters are transmitted
Note: If the SBK bit is set to “1” and then to “0”, the transmitter will send a BREAK word at the end of the current word.
112/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
DATA REGISTER (SCIDR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
Contains the Received or Transmitted data character, depending on whether it is read from or written to.
Bits 5:3 = SCT[2:0] SCI Transmitter rate divisor
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0 bits define the total division applied to the bus clock to yield the transmit rate clock in conventional Baud Rate Generator mode.
7
(RDR).
0
DR7 DR6 DR5 DR4 DR3 DR2 DR1 DR0
The Data register performs a double function (read and write) since it is composed of two registers, one for transmission (TDR) and one for reception
The TDR register provides the parallel interface between the internal bus and the output shift register (see
The RDR register provides the parallel interface between the input shift register and the internal
TR dividing factor
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bits 2:0 = SCR[2:0] SCI Receiver rate divisor.
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP[1:0] bits define the total division applied to the bus clock to yield the receive rate clock in conventional Baud
Rate Generator mode.
1
1
1
1
SCT2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
SCT1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
SCT0
0
1
0
1
BAUD RATE REGISTER (SCIBRR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 clock division ranges:
0
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0
Bits 7:6= SCP[1:0] First SCI Prescaler
These 2 prescaling bits allow several standard
RR Dividing factor
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
SCR2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SCR1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
SCR0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
PR Prescaling factor
1
3
4
13
SCP1
0
0
1
1
SCP0
0
1
0
1
113/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
EXTENDED RECEIVE PRESCALER DIVISION
REGISTER (SCIERPR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Allows setting of the Extended Prescaler rate division factor for the receive circuit.
EXTENDED TRANSMIT PRESCALER DIVISION
REGISTER (SCIETPR)
Read/Write
Reset Value:0000 0000 (00h)
Allows setting of the External Prescaler rate division factor for the transmit circuit.
7 0
ERPR
7
ERPR
6
ERPR
5
ERPR
4
ERPR
3
ERPR
2
ERPR
1
ERPR
0
7 0
ETPR
7
ETPR
6
ETPR
5
ETPR
4
ETPR
3
ETPR
2
ETPR
1
ETPR
0
Bits 7:0 = ERPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Receive
Prescaler Register.
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated when a value different from 00h is stored in this register. Therefore the clock frequency issued
from the 16 divider (see Figure 62
) is divided by the binary factor set in the SCIERPR register (in the range 1 to 255).
The extended baud rate generator is not used after a reset.
Table 21. Baudrate Selection
Bits 7:0 = ETPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Transmit
Prescaler Register.
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated when a value different from 00h is stored in this register. Therefore the clock frequency issued
from the 16 divider (see Figure 62
) is divided by the binary factor set in the SCIETPR register (in the range 1 to 255).
The extended baud rate generator is not used after a reset.
Symbol f f
Tx
Rx
Parameter f
CPU
Communication frequency 8MHz
Conditions
Accuracy vs. Standard
Prescaler
~0.16%
~0.79%
Conventional Mode
TR (or RR)=128, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 32, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 16, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 8, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 4, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 16, PR= 3
TR (or RR)= 2, PR=13
TR (or RR)= 1, PR=13
Extended Mode
ETPR (or ERPR) = 35,
TR (or RR)= 1, PR=1
Standard
Baud
Rate
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
10400
19200
38400
~300.48
~1201.92
~2403.84
~4807.69
~9615.38
~10416.67
~19230.77
~38461.54
Hz
14400 ~14285.71
Unit
114/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SERIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Table 22. SCI Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
0050h
0051h
0052h
0053h
0054h
0055h
0057h
Register
Label
SCISR
Reset Value
SCIDR
Reset Value
SCIBRR
Reset Value
SCICR1
Reset Value
SCICR2
Reset Value
SCIERPR
Reset Value
SCIPETPR
Reset Value
7
TDRE
1
MSB x
SCP1
0
R8 x
TIE
0
MSB
0
MSB
0
6
TC
1 x
SCP0
0
T8
0
TCIE
0
0
0
5
RDRF
0 x
SCT2
0
SCID
0
RIE
0
0
0
4
IDLE
0 x
SCT1
0
M
0
ILIE
0
0
0
3
OR
0 x
SCT0
0
WAKE
0
TE
0
0
0
2
NF
0 x
SCR2
0
PCE
0
RE
0
0
0
1
FE
0 x
SCR1
0
PS
0
RWU
0
0
0
0
PE
0
LSB x
SCR0
0
PIE
0
SBK
0
LSB
0
LSB
0
115/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.7 I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (I2C)
10.7.1 Introduction
The I
2
C Bus Interface serves as an interface between the microcontroller and the serial I
2
C bus. It provides both multimaster and slave functions, and controls all I
2
C bus-specific sequencing, protocol, arbitration and timing. It supports fast I
2
C mode (400kHz).
10.7.2 Main Features
■ Parallel-bus/I
2
C protocol converter
■
■
Multi-master capability
7-bit/10-bit Addressing
■
■
SMBus V1.1 Compliant
Transmitter/Receiver flag
■ End-of-byte transmission flag
■ Transfer problem detection
I
2
C Master Features:
■
■
■
Clock generation
I
2
C bus busy flag
Arbitration Lost Flag
■
■
End of byte transmission flag
Transmitter/Receiver Flag
■
■
■
Start bit detection flag
■ Start and Stop generation
I
2
C Slave Features:
Stop bit detection
I
2
C bus busy flag
■
■
■
■
■
Detection of misplaced start or stop condition
Programmable I
2
C Address detection
Transfer problem detection
End-of-byte transmission flag
Transmitter/Receiver flag
10.7.3 General Description
In addition to receiving and transmitting data, this interface converts it from serial to parallel format
Figure 64. I
2
C BUS Protocol
SDA
MSB and vice versa, using either an interrupt or polled handshake. The interrupts are enabled or disabled by software. The interface is connected to the I
2
C bus by a data pin (SDAI) and by a clock pin (SCLI).
It can be connected both with a standard I
2
C bus and a Fast I
2
C bus. This selection is made by software.
Mode Selection
The interface can operate in the four following modes:
– Slave transmitter/receiver
– Master transmitter/receiver
By default, it operates in slave mode.
The interface automatically switches from slave to master after it generates a START condition and from master to slave in case of arbitration loss or a
STOP generation, allowing then Multi-Master capability.
Communication Flow
In Master mode, it initiates a data transfer and generates the clock signal. A serial data transfer always begins with a start condition and ends with a stop condition. Both start and stop conditions are generated in master mode by software.
In Slave mode, the interface is capable of recognising its own address (7 or 10-bit), and the General Call address. The General Call address detection may be enabled or disabled by software.
Data and addresses are transferred as 8-bit bytes,
MSB first. The first byte(s) following the start condition contain the address (one in 7-bit mode, two in 10-bit mode). The address is always transmitted in Master mode.
A 9th clock pulse follows the 8 clock cycles of a byte transfer, during which the receiver must send an acknowledge bit to the transmitter. Refer to
.
ACK
SCL
1 2 8 9
START
CONDITION
STOP
CONDITION
VR02119B
116/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Acknowledge may be enabled and disabled by software.
The I
2
C interface address and/or general call address can be selected by software.
The speed of the I
2
C interface may be selected between Standard (up to 100KHz) and Fast I
2
C
(up to 400KHz).
The SCL frequency (F scl
) is controlled by a pro-
I grammable clock divider which depends on the
2
C bus mode.
When the I
2
C cell is enabled, the SDA and SCL ports must be configured as floating inputs. In this case, the value of the external pull-up resistor used depends on the application.
When the I
2
C cell is disabled, the SDA and SCL ports revert to being standard I/O port pins.
SDA/SCL Line Control
Transmitter mode: the interface holds the clock line low before transmission to wait for the microcontroller to write the byte in the Data Register.
Receiver mode: the interface holds the clock line low after reception to wait for the microcontroller to read the byte in the Data Register.
Figure 65. I
2
C Interface Block Diagram
DATA REGISTER (DR)
SDA or SDAI
DATA CONTROL
DATA SHIFT REGISTER
COMPARATOR
OWN ADDRESS REGISTER 1 (OAR1)
OWN ADDRESS REGISTER 2 (OAR2)
SCL or SCLI
CLOCK CONTROL
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CCR)
CONTROL REGISTER (CR)
STATUS REGISTER 1 (SR1)
STATUS REGISTER 2 (SR2)
CONTROL LOGIC
INTERRUPT
117/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4 Functional Description
Refer to the CR, SR1 and SR2 registers in
. for the bit definitions.
By default the I
2
C interface operates in Slave mode (M/SL bit is cleared) except when it initiates a transmit or receive sequence.
First the interface frequency must be configured using the FRi bits in the OAR2 register.
10.7.4.1 Slave Mode
As soon as a start condition is detected, the address is received from the SDA line and sent to the shift register; then it is compared with the address of the interface or the General Call address (if selected by software).
Note: In 10-bit addressing mode, the comparison includes the header sequence (11110xx0) and the two most significant bits of the address.
Header matched (10-bit mode only): the interface generates an acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set.
Address not matched: the interface ignores it and waits for another Start condition.
Address matched: the interface generates in sequence:
– Acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set.
– EVF and ADSL bits are set with an interrupt if the
ITE bit is set.
Then the interface waits for a read of the SR1 register, holding the SCL line low (see
Transfer sequencing EV1).
Next, in 7-bit mode read the DR register to determine from the least significant bit (Data Direction
Bit) if the slave must enter Receiver or Transmitter mode.
In 10-bit mode, after receiving the address sequence the slave is always in receive mode. It will enter transmit mode on receiving a repeated Start condition followed by the header sequence with matching address bits and the least significant bit set (11110xx1).
Slave Receiver
Following the address reception and after SR1 register has been read, the slave receives bytes from the SDA line into the DR register via the internal shift register. After each byte the interface generates in sequence:
– Acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set
– EVF and BTF bits are set with an interrupt if the
ITE bit is set.
Then the interface waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a read of the DR register, holding
the SCL line low (see
Transfer sequencing EV2).
Slave Transmitter
Following the address reception and after SR1 register has been read, the slave sends bytes from the DR register to the SDA line via the internal shift register.
The slave waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register, holding the
SCL line low (see
EV3).
When the acknowledge pulse is received:
– The EVF and BTF bits are set by hardware with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
Closing slave communication
After the last data byte is transferred a Stop Condition is generated by the master. The interface detects this condition and sets:
– EVF and STOPF bits with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
Then the interface waits for a read of the SR2 register (see
Transfer sequencing EV4).
Error Cases
– BERR: Detection of a Stop or a Start condition during a byte transfer. In this case, the EVF and the BERR bits are set with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
If it is a Stop then the interface discards the data, released the lines and waits for another Start condition.
If it is a Start then the interface discards the data and waits for the next slave address on the bus.
– AF: Detection of a non-acknowledge bit. In this case, the EVF and AF bits are set with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
The AF bit is cleared by reading the I2CSR2 register. However, if read before the completion of the transmission, the AF flag will be set again, thus possibly generating a new interrupt. Software must ensure either that the SCL line is back at 0 before reading the SR2 register, or be able to correctly handle a second interrupt during the
9th pulse of a transmitted byte.
Note: In case of errors, SCL line is not held low; however, the SDA line can remain low if the last bits transmitted are all 0. While AF=1, the SCL line may be held low due to SB or BTF flags that are set at the same time. It is then necessary to release both lines by software.
118/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C INTERFACE (Cont’d)
How to release the SDA / SCL lines
Set and subsequently clear the STOP bit while
BTF is set. The SDA/SCL lines are released after the transfer of the current byte.
Then the second address byte is sent by the interface.
SMBus Compatibility
ST7 I
2
C is compatible with SMBus V1.1 protocol. It supports all SMBus adressing modes, SMBus bus protocols and CRC-8 packet error checking. Refer to AN1713: SMBus Slave Driver For ST7 I
2
C Peripheral.
After completion of this transfer (and acknowledge from the slave if the ACK bit is set):
– The EVF bit is set by hardware with interrupt generation if the ITE bit is set.
Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the CR register (for exam-
ple set PE bit), holding the SCL line low (see Figure 66
Transfer sequencing EV6).
10.7.4.2 Master Mode
To switch from default Slave mode to Master mode a Start condition generation is needed.
Start condition
Setting the START bit while the BUSY bit is cleared causes the interface to switch to Master mode (M/SL bit set) and generates a Start condition.
Once the Start condition is sent:
– The EVF and SB bits are set by hardware with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register with the
Slave address, holding the SCL line low (see
Transfer sequencing EV5).
Slave address transmission
Then the slave address is sent to the SDA line via the internal shift register.
In 7-bit addressing mode, one address byte is sent.
In 10-bit addressing mode, sending the first byte including the header sequence causes the following event:
– The EVF bit is set by hardware with interrupt generation if the ITE bit is set.
Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register, holding
the SCL line low (see
Transfer sequencing EV9).
Next the master must enter Receiver or Transmitter mode.
Note: In 10-bit addressing mode, to switch the master to Receiver mode, software must generate a repeated Start condition and resend the header sequence with the least significant bit set
(11110xx1).
Master Receiver
Following the address transmission and after SR1 and CR registers have been accessed, the master receives bytes from the SDA line into the DR register via the internal shift register. After each byte the interface generates in sequence:
– Acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set
– EVF and BTF bits are set by hardware with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
Then the interface waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a read of the DR register, holding
the SCL line low (see
Transfer sequencing EV7).
To close the communication: before reading the last byte from the DR register, set the STOP bit to generate the Stop condition. The interface goes automatically back to slave mode (M/SL bit cleared).
Note: In order to generate the non-acknowledge pulse after the last received data byte, the ACK bit must be cleared just before reading the second last data byte.
119/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Master Transmitter
Following the address transmission and after SR1 register has been read, the master sends bytes from the DR register to the SDA line via the internal shift register.
The master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register, holding the
SCL line low (see Figure 66 Transfer sequencing
EV8).
When the acknowledge bit is received, the interface sets:
– EVF and BTF bits with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set.
To close the communication: after writing the last byte to the DR register, set the STOP bit to generate the Stop condition. The interface goes automatically back to slave mode (M/SL bit cleared).
Error Cases
– BERR: Detection of a Stop or a Start condition during a byte transfer. In this case, the EVF and
BERR bits are set by hardware with an interrupt if ITE is set.
Note that BERR will not be set if an error is detected during the first or second pulse of each 9bit transaction:
Single Master Mode
If a Start or Stop is issued during the first or second pulse of a 9-bit transaction, the BERR flag will not be set and transfer will continue however the BUSY flag will be reset. To work around this, slave devices should issue a NACK when they receive a misplaced Start or Stop. The reception of a NACK or BUSY by the master in the middle of communication gives the possibility to reinitiate transmission.
Multimaster Mode
Normally the BERR bit would be set whenever unauthorized transmission takes place while transfer is already in progress. However, an issue will arise if an external master generates an unauthorized Start or Stop while the I
2
C master is on the first or second pulse of a 9-bit transaction. It is possible to work around this by polling the BUSY bit during I
2
C master mode transmission. The resetting of the BUSY bit can then be handled in a similar manner as the BERR flag being set.
– AF: Detection of a non-acknowledge bit. In this case, the EVF and AF bits are set by hardware with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set. To resume, set the Start or Stop bit.
The AF bit is cleared by reading the I2CSR2 register. However, if read before the completion of the transmission, the AF flag will be set again, thus possibly generating a new interrupt. Software must ensure either that the SCL line is back at 0 before reading the SR2 register, or be able to correctly handle a second interrupt during the
9th pulse of a transmitted byte.
– ARLO: Detection of an arbitration lost condition.
In this case the ARLO bit is set by hardware (with an interrupt if the ITE bit is set and the interface goes automatically back to slave mode (the M/SL bit is cleared).
Note: In all these cases, the SCL line is not held low; however, the SDA line can remain low due to possible «0» bits transmitted last. It is then necessary to release both lines by software.
120/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 66. Transfer Sequencing
7-bit Slave receiver:
S Address A Data1 A
EV1 EV2
Data2 A
EV2
.....
DataN
7-bit Slave transmitter:
S Address A
EV1 EV3
Data1
7-bit Master receiver:
S Address A
EV5 EV6
A
Data1 A
EV3
EV7
Data2 A
Data2 A
EV3
EV7
.....
.....
A
DataN
EV2
NA
DataN NA
P
EV7
EV4
EV3-1
P
P
EV4
7-bit Master transmitter:
S Address A
EV5 EV6 EV8
10-bit Slave receiver:
S Header A Address A
EV1
Data1 A
Data1 A
EV8
EV2
Data2 A
EV8
.....
.....
DataN A
EV2
DataN A
P
EV4
EV8
P
10-bit Slave transmitter:
S r
Header A
10-bit Master transmitter
S Header A
EV5 EV9
Address A
EV6 EV8
10-bit Master receiver:
EV1 EV3
Data1 A
EV3
....
.
DataN A
Data1 A
EV8
.....
EV3-1
DataN A
EV8
P
P
EV4
S r
EV5
Header A
EV6
Data1 A
EV7
.....
DataN A
EV7
P
Legend: S=Start, Sr = Repeated Start, P=Stop, A=Acknowledge, NA=Non-acknowledge,
EVx=Event (with interrupt if ITE=1)
EV1: EVF=1, ADSL=1, cleared by reading SR1 register.
EV2: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading DR register.
EV3: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
EV3-1: EVF=1, AF=1, BTF=1; AF is cleared by reading SR1 register. BTF is cleared by releasing the lines (STOP=1, STOP=0) or by writing DR register (DR=FFh). Note: If lines are released by
STOP=1, STOP=0, the subsequent EV4 is not seen.
EV4: EVF=1, STOPF=1, cleared by reading SR2 register.
EV5: EVF=1, SB=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
EV6: EVF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing CR register (for example PE=1).
EV7: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading DR register.
EV8: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
EV9: EVF=1, ADD10=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
121/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.5 Low Power Modes
Mode Description
WAIT
No effect on I
2
C interface.
I
2
C interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.
HALT
I
2
C registers are frozen.
In HALT mode, the I
2
C interface is inactive and does not acknowledge data on the bus. The I
2
C interface resumes operation when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability.
10.7.6 Interrupts
Figure 67. Event Flags and Interrupt Generation
ADD10
BTF
ADSL
SB
AF
STOPF
ARLO
BERR
ITE
*
*
EVF can also be set by EV6 or an error from the SR2 register.
INTERRUPT
EVF
Interrupt Event
10-bit Address Sent Event (Master mode)
End of Byte Transfer Event
Address Matched Event (Slave mode)
Start Bit Generation Event (Master mode)
Acknowledge Failure Event
Stop Detection Event (Slave mode)
Arbitration Lost Event (Multimaster configuration)
Bus Error Event
Note: The I
2
C interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).
They generate an interrupt if the corresponding
Enable Control Bit is set and the I-bit in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).
Event
Flag
Enable
Control
Bit
ADD10
BTF
ADSEL
SB
AF
STOPF
ARLO
BERR
ITE
Exit from
Wait
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exit from
Halt
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
122/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.7 Register Description
I
2
C CONTROL REGISTER (CR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0 0
0
PE ENGC START ACK STOP ITE
– In slave mode:
0: No start generation
1: Start generation when the bus is free
Bit 2 = ACK Acknowledge enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
0: No acknowledge returned
1: Acknowledge returned after an address byte or a data byte is received
Bit 7:6 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 5 = PE Peripheral enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Peripheral disabled
1: Master/Slave capability
Notes:
– When PE=0, all the bits of the CR register and the SR register except the Stop bit are reset. All outputs are released while PE=0
– When PE=1, the corresponding I/O pins are selected by hardware as alternate functions.
– To enable the I
2
C interface, write the CR register
TWICE with PE=1 as the first write only activates the interface (only PE is set).
Bit 4 = ENGC Enable General Call.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0). The 00h General Call address is acknowledged (01h ignored).
0: General Call disabled
1: General Call enabled
Note: In accordance with the I2C standard, when
GCAL addressing is enabled, an I2C slave can only receive data. It will not transmit data to the master.
Bit 3 = START Generation of a Start condition.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0) or when the Start condition is sent
(with interrupt generation if ITE=1).
– In master mode:
0: No start generation
1: Repeated start generation
Bit 1 = STOP Generation of a Stop condition.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware in master mode. Note: This bit is not cleared when the interface is disabled
(PE=0).
– In master mode:
0: No stop generation
1: Stop generation after the current byte transfer or after the current Start condition is sent. The
STOP bit is cleared by hardware when the Stop condition is sent.
– In slave mode:
0: No stop generation
1: Release the SCL and SDA lines after the current byte transfer (BTF=1). In this mode the
STOP bit has to be cleared by software.
Bit 0 = ITE Interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software and cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled
(PE=0).
0: Interrupts disabled
1: Interrupts enabled
Refer to
for the relationship between the events and the interrupt.
SCL is held low when the ADD10, SB, BTF or
ADSL flags or an EV6 event (See Figure 66 ) is de-
tected.
123/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
I
2
C STATUS REGISTER 1 (SR1)
Read Only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
EVF ADD10 TRA BUSY BTF ADSL M/SL SB
Bit 7 = EVF Event flag.
This bit is set by hardware as soon as an event occurs. It is cleared by software reading SR2 register in case of error event or as described in
It is also cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
0: No event
1: One of the following events has occurred:
– BTF=1 (Byte received or transmitted)
– ADSL=1 (Address matched in Slave mode while ACK=1)
– SB=1 (Start condition generated in Master mode)
– AF=1 (No acknowledge received after byte transmission)
– STOPF=1 (Stop condition detected in Slave mode)
– ARLO=1 (Arbitration lost in Master mode)
– BERR=1 (Bus error, misplaced Start or Stop condition detected)
– ADD10=1 (Master has sent header byte)
– Address byte successfully transmitted in Master mode.
Bit 6 = ADD10 10-bit addressing in Master mode.
This bit is set by hardware when the master has sent the first byte in 10-bit address mode. It is cleared by software reading SR2 register followed by a write in the DR register of the second address byte. It is also cleared by hardware when the peripheral is disabled (PE=0).
0: No ADD10 event occurred.
1: Master has sent first address byte (header)
Bit 5 = TRA Transmitter/Receiver.
When BTF is set, TRA=1 if a data byte has been transmitted. It is cleared automatically when BTF is cleared. It is also cleared by hardware after detection of Stop condition (STOPF=1), loss of bus arbitration (ARLO=1) or when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
0: Data byte received (if BTF=1)
1: Data byte transmitted
Bit 4 = BUSY Bus busy.
This bit is set by hardware on detection of a Start condition and cleared by hardware on detection of a Stop condition. It indicates a communication in progress on the bus. The BUSY flag of the I2CSR1 register is cleared if a Bus Error occurs.
0: No communication on the bus
1: Communication ongoing on the bus
Note:
– The BUSY flag is NOT updated when the interface is disabled (PE=0). This can have consequences when operating in Multimaster mode; i.e. a second active I
2
C master commencing a transfer with an unset BUSY bit can cause a conflict resulting in lost data. A software workaround consists of checking that the I
2
C is not busy before enabling the I
2
C Multimaster cell.
Bit 3 = BTF Byte transfer finished.
This bit is set by hardware as soon as a byte is correctly received or transmitted with interrupt generation if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading
SR1 register followed by a read or write of DR register. It is also cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
– Following a byte transmission, this bit is set after reception of the acknowledge clock pulse. In case an address byte is sent, this bit is set only
after the EV6 event (See Figure 66 ). BTF is
cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing the next byte in DR register.
– Following a byte reception, this bit is set after transmission of the acknowledge clock pulse if
ACK=1. BTF is cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading the byte from DR register.
The SCL line is held low while BTF=1.
0: Byte transfer not done
1: Byte transfer succeeded
Bit 2 = ADSL Address matched (Slave mode).
This bit is set by hardware as soon as the received slave address matched with the OAR register content or a general call is recognized. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading SR1 register or by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
The SCL line is held low while ADSL=1.
0: Address mismatched or not received
1: Received address matched
124/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Bit 1 = M/SL Master/Slave.
This bit is set by hardware as soon as the interface is in Master mode (writing START=1). It is cleared by hardware after detecting a Stop condition on the bus or a loss of arbitration (ARLO=1). It is also cleared when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
0: Slave mode
1: Master mode
Bit 0 = SB Start bit (Master mode).
This bit is set by hardware as soon as the Start condition is generated (following a write
START=1). An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading SR1 register followed by writing the address byte in DR register.
It is also cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
0: No Start condition
1: Start condition generated
I
2
C STATUS REGISTER 2 (SR2)
Read Only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
0 0 0 AF STOPF ARLO BERR GCAL
The SCL line is not held low while STOPF=1.
0: No Stop condition detected
1: Stop condition detected
Bit 2 = ARLO Arbitration lost.
This bit is set by hardware when the interface loses the arbitration of the bus to another master. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading SR2 register or by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
After an ARLO event the interface switches back automatically to Slave mode (M/SL=0).
The SCL line is not held low while ARLO=1.
0: No arbitration lost detected
1: Arbitration lost detected
Note:
– In a Multimaster environment, when the interface is configured in Master Receive mode it does not perform arbitration during the reception of the
Acknowledge Bit. Mishandling of the ARLO bit from the I2CSR2 register may occur when a second master simultaneously requests the same data from the same slave and the I
2
C master does not acknowledge the data. The ARLO bit is then left at 0 instead of being set.
Bit 7:5 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 4 = AF Acknowledge failure.
This bit is set by hardware when no acknowledge is returned. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading SR2 register or by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
The SCL line is not held low while AF=1 but by other flags (SB or BTF) that are set at the same time.
0: No acknowledge failure
1: Acknowledge failure
Note:
– When an AF event occurs, the SCL line is not held low; however, the SDA line can remain low if the last bits transmitted are all 0. It is then necessary to release both lines by software.
Bit 1 = BERR Bus error.
This bit is set by hardware when the interface detects a misplaced Start or Stop condition. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading SR2 register or by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
The SCL line is not held low while BERR=1.
0: No misplaced Start or Stop condition
1: Misplaced Start or Stop condition
Note:
– If a Bus Error occurs, a Stop or a repeated Start condition should be generated by the Master to re-synchronize communication, get the transmission acknowledged and the bus released for further communication
Bit 3 = STOPF Stop detection (Slave mode).
This bit is set by hardware when a Stop condition is detected on the bus after an acknowledge (if
ACK=1). An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading SR2 register or by hardware when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
Bit 0 = GCAL General Call (Slave mode).
This bit is set by hardware when a general call address is detected on the bus while ENGC=1. It is cleared by hardware detecting a Stop condition
(STOPF=1) or when the interface is disabled
(PE=0).
0: No general call address detected on bus
1: general call address detected on bus
125/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
I
2
C CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CCR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
FM/SM CC6 CC5 CC4 CC3 CC2 CC1 CC0
Bit 7 = FM/SM Fast/Standard I
2
C mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
It is not cleared when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
0: Standard I
2
C mode
1: Fast I
2
C mode
I
2
C DATA REGISTER (DR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
0
D0
Bit 6:0 = CC[6:0] 7-bit clock divider.
These bits select the speed of the bus (F
SCL pending on the I
2
) de-
C mode. They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics section for the table of values.
Note: The programmed F
SCL
SCL and SDA lines.
assumes no load on
Bit 7:0 = D[7:0] 8-bit Data Register.
These bits contain the byte to be received or transmitted on the bus.
– Transmitter mode: Byte transmission start automatically when the software writes in the DR register.
– Receiver mode: the first data byte is received automatically in the DR register using the least significant bit of the address.
Then, the following data bytes are received one by one after reading the DR register.
126/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I
2
C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
I
2
C OWN ADDRESS REGISTER (OAR1)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
ADD7 ADD6 ADD5 ADD4 ADD3 ADD2 ADD1 ADD0
7-bit Addressing Mode
0
Bit 7:1 = ADD[7:1] Interface address.
These bits define the I
2
C bus address of the interface. They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
Bit 0 = ADD0 Address direction bit.
This bit is don’t care, the interface acknowledges either 0 or 1. It is not cleared when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
Note: Address 01h is always ignored.
I
2
C OWN ADDRESS REGISTER (OAR2)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0100 0000 (40h)
7
FR1 FR0 0 0
0
0 ADD9 ADD8 0
Bit 7:6 = FR[1:0] Frequency bits.
These bits are set by software only when the interface is disabled (PE=0). To configure the interface to I
2
C specified delays select the value corresponding to the microcontroller frequency F
CPU
. f
CPU
< 6 MHz
6 to 8 MHz
Bit 5:3 = Reserved
FR1
0
0
FR0
0
1
10-bit Addressing Mode
Bit 7:0 = ADD[7:0] Interface address.
These are the least significant bits of the I
2
C bus address of the interface. They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (PE=0).
Bit 2:1 = ADD[9:8] Interface address.
These are the most significant bits of the I
2
C bus address of the interface (10-bit mode only). They are not cleared when the interface is disabled
(PE=0).
Bit 0 = Reserved.
127/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I²C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Table 23. I
2
C Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
001Ch
001Dh
001Eh
Register
Label
I2CCR
Reset Value
I2CSR1
Reset Value
I2CSR2
Reset Value
I2CCCR
Reset Value
I2COAR1
Reset Value
I2COAR2
Reset Value
I2CDR
Reset Value
7
0
EVF
0
0
FM/SM
0
ADD7
0
FR1
0
MSB
0
6
0
ADD10
0
0
CC6
0
ADD6
0
FR0
1
0
5
PE
0
TRA
0
0
CC5
0
ADD5
0
0
0
4
ENGC
0
BUSY
0
AF
0
CC4
0
ADD4
0
0
3 2
START
0
BTF
0
STOPF
0
CC3
0
ADD3
0
0
ACK
0
ADSL
0
ARLO
0
CC2
0
ADD2
0
ADD9
0
0 0 0
1
STOP
0
M/SL
0
BERR
0
CC1
0
ADD1
0
ADD8
0
0
0
ITE
0
SB
0
GCAL
0
CC0
0
ADD0
0
0
LSB
0
128/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.8 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
10.8.1 Introduction
This peripheral is designed to support serial data exchanges using a multi-master contention based priority scheme as described in CAN specification
Rev. 2.0 part A. It can also be connected to a 2.0 B network without problems, since extended frames
Figure 68. CAN Block Diagram are checked for correctness and acknowledged accordingly although such frames cannot be transmitted nor received. The same applies to overload frames which are recognized but never initiated.
ST7 Internal Bus
ST7 Interface
RX
TX
TX/RX
Buffer 1
10 Bytes
TX/RX
Buffer 2
10 Bytes
TX/RX
Buffer 3
10 Bytes
ID
Filter 0
4 Bytes
ID
Filter 1
4 Bytes
BTL BCDL
EML
SHREG
CAN 2.0B passive Core
CRC
ICR
ISR
CSR
TECR
RECR
PSR
BRPR
BTR
129/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.2 Main Features
– Support of CAN specification 2.0A and 2.0B passive
– Three prioritized 10-byte Transmit/Receive message buffers
– Two programmable global 12-bit message acceptance filters
– Programmable baud rates up to 1 MBit/s
– Buffer flip-flopping capability in transmission
– Maskable interrupts for transmit, receive (one per buffer), error and wake-up
– Automatic low-power mode after 20 recessive bits or on demand (standby mode)
– Interrupt-driven wake-up from standby mode upon reception of dominant pulse
– Optional dominant pulse transmission on leaving standby mode
– Automatic message queuing for transmission upon writing of data byte 7
– Programmable loop-back mode for self-test operation
– Advanced error detection and diagnosis functions
– Software-efficient buffer mapping at a unique address space
– Scalable architecture.
10.8.3 Functional Description
10.8.3.1 Frame Formats
A summary of all the CAN frame formats is given
in Figure 69 for reference. It covers only the stand-
ard frame format since the extended one is only acknowledged.
A message begins with a start bit called Start Of
Frame (SOF). This bit is followed by the arbitration field which contains the 11-bit identifier (ID) and the Remote Transmission Request bit (RTR). The
RTR bit indicates whether it is a data frame or a remote request frame. A remote request frame does not have any data byte.
The control field contains the Identifier Extension bit (IDE), which indicates standard or extended format, a reserved bit (ro) and, in the last four bits, a count of the data bytes (DLC). The data field ranges from zero to eight bytes and is followed by the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) used as a frame integrity check for detecting bit errors.
The acknowledgement (ACK) field comprises the
ACK slot and the ACK delimiter. The bit in the ACK slot is placed on the bus by the transmitter as a recessive bit (logical 1). It is overwritten as a dominant bit (logical 0) by those receivers which have at this time received the data correctly. In this way, the transmitting node can be assured that at least one receiver has correctly received its message.
Note that messages are acknowledged by the receivers regardless of the outcome of the acceptance test.
The end of the message is indicated by the End Of
Frame (EOF). The intermission field defines the minimum number of bit periods separating consecutive messages. If there is no subsequent bus access by any station, the bus remains idle.
10.8.3.2 Hardware Blocks
The CAN controller contains the following func-
tional blocks (refer to Figure 68 ):
– ST7 Interface: buffering of the ST7 internal bus and address decoding of the CAN registers.
– TX/RX Buffers: three 10-byte buffers for transmission and reception of maximum length messages.
– ID Filters: two 12-bit compare and don’t care masks for message acceptance filtering.
– PSR: page selection register (see memory map).
– BRPR: clock divider for different data rates.
– BTR: bit timing register.
– ICR: interrupt control register.
– ISR: interrupt status register.
– CSR: general purpose control/status register.
– TECR: transmit error counter register.
– RECR: receive error counter register.
– BTL: bit timing logic providing programmable bit sampling and bit clock generation for synchronization of the controller.
– BCDL: bit coding logic generating a NRZ-coded datastream with stuff bits.
– SHREG: 8-bit shift register for serialization of data to be transmitted and parallelisation of received data.
– CRC: 15-bit CRC calculator and checker.
– EML: error detection and management logic.
– CAN Core: CAN 2.0B passive protocol controller.
130/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 69. CAN Frames
Inter-Frame Space Data Frame
44 + 8 * N
Arbitration Field Control Field Data Field
12 6 8 * N
ID DLC
CRC Field
16
CRC
Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame
Ack Field
2
7
EOF
Inter-Frame Space Remote Frame
44
Arbitration Field Control Field
12 6
ID DLC
CRC Field
16
CRC
Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame
Ack Field End Of Frame
2
7
Data Frame or
Remote Frame Error Frame
Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame
Error Flag Flag Echo
6
≤
6
Error Delimiter
8
Any Frame Inter-Frame Space
Intermission
3
Suspend
Transmission
8
Bus Idle
Data Frame or
Remote Frame
End Of Frame or
Error Delimiter or
Overload Delimiter Overload Frame
Inter-Frame Space or Error Frame
Overload Flag Overload Delimiter
6 8
Notes:
• 0
<=
• SOF = Start Of Frame
<=
8
• ID = Identifier
• RTR = Remote Transmission Request
• IDE = Identifier Extension Bit
• r0 = Reserved Bit
• DLC = Data Length Code
• CRC = Cyclic Redundancy Code
• Error flag: 6 dominant bits if node is error active else 6 recessive bits.
• Suspend transmission: applies to error passive nodes only.
• EOF = End of Frame
• ACK = Acknowledge bit
131/215
n
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.3.3 Modes of Operation
The CAN Core unit assumes one of the seven states described below:
– STANDBY. Standby mode is entered either on a chip reset or on resetting the RUN bit in the Control/Status Register (CSR). Any on-going transmission or reception operation is not interrupted and completes normally before the Bit Time Logic and the clock prescaler are turned off for minimum power consumption. This state is signalled by the RUN bit being read-back as 0.
Once in standby, the only event monitored is the reception of a dominant bit which causes a wakeup interrupt if the SCIE bit of the Interrupt Control
Register (ICR) is set.
The STANDBY mode is left by setting the RUN
Figure 70. CAN Controller State Diagram
ARESET bit. If the WKPS bit is set in the CSR register, then the controller passes through WAKE-UP otherwise it enters RESYNC directly.
It is important to note that the wake-up mechanism is software-driven and therefore carries a significant time overhead. All messages received after the wake-up bit and before the controller is set to run and has completed synchronization are ignored.
Note: Standby mode is not entered on resetting the RUN bit in the Control/Status register (CSR) if the CANRX pin is shorted to GND.
– WAKE-UP. The CAN bus line is forced to dominant for one bit time signalling the wake-up condition to all other bus members.
RUN & WKPS
STANDBY
RUN RUN & WKPS WAKE-UP
RESYNC
FSYN & BOFF & 11 Recessive bits |
( FSYN | BOFF) & 128 * 11 Recessive bits
RUN
IDLE
Write to DATA7 |
TX Error & NRTX
TRANSMISSION
TX OK RX OK
Arbitration lost
Start Of Frame
RECEPTION
TX Error
ERROR
RX Error
BOFF
BOFF
132/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
– RESYNC. The resynchronization mode is used to find the correct entry point for starting transmission or reception after the node has gone asynchronous either by going into the STANDBY or bus-off states.
Resynchronization is achieved when 128 sequences of 11 recessive bits have been monitored unless the node is not bus-off and the
FSYN bit in the CSR register is set in which case a single sequence of 11 recessive bits needs to be monitored.
– IDLE. The CAN controller looks for one of the following events: the RUN bit is reset, a Start Of
Frame appears on the CAN bus or the DATA7 register of the currently active page is written to.
– TRANSMISSION. Once the LOCK bit of a Buffer
Control/Status Register (BCSRx) has been set and read back as such, a transmit job can be submitted by writing to the DATA7 register. The message with the highest priority will be transmitted as soon as the CAN bus becomes idle.
Among those messages with a pending transmission request, the highest priority is given to
Buffer 3 then 2 and 1. If the transmission fails due to a lost arbitration or to an error while the NRTX bit of the CSR register is reset, then a new transmission attempt is performed. This goes on until the transmission ends successfully or until the job is cancelled by unlocking the buffer, by setting the NRTX bit or if the node ever enters busoff or if a higher priority message becomes pending. The RDY bit in the BCSRx register, which was set since the job was submitted, gets reset.
When a transmission is in progress, the BUSY bit in the BCSRx register is set. If it ends successfully then the TXIF bit in the Interrupt Status Register (ISR) is set, else the TEIF bit is set. An interrupt is generated in either case provided the
TXIE and TEIE bits of the ICR register are set.
Note 1: Setting the SRTE bit of the CSR register allows transmitted messages to be simultaneously received when they pass the acceptance filtering. This is particularly useful for checking the integrity of the communication path.
RECEPTION. Once the CAN controller has synchronized itself onto the bus activity, it is ready for reception of new messages. Every incoming message gets its identifier compared to the acceptance filters. If the bitwise comparison of the selected bits ends up with a match for at least one of the filters then that message is elected for reception and a target buffer is searched for. This buffer will be the first one - order is 1 to 3 - that has the LOCK and RDY bits of its BCSRx register reset.
– When no such buffer exists then an overrun interrupt is generated if the ORIE bit of the ICR register has been set. In this case the identifier of the last message is made available in the
Last Identifier Register (LIDHR and LIDLR) at least until it gets overwritten by a new identifier picked-up from the bus.
– When a buffer does exist, the accepted message gets written into it, the ACC bit in the
BCSRx register gets the number of the matching filter, the RDY and RXIF bits get set and an interrupt is generated if the RXIE bit in the ISR register is set.
Up to three messages can be automatically received without intervention from the CPU because each buffer has its own set of status bits, greatly reducing the reactiveness requirements in the processing of the receive interrupts.
133/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
– ERROR. The error management as described in the CAN protocol is completely handled by hardware using 2 error counters which get incremented or decremented according to the error condition. Both of them may be read by the appli-
Figure 71. CAN Error State Diagram cation to determine the stability of the network.
Moreover, as one of the node status bits (EPSV or BOFF of the CSR register) changes, an interrupt is generated if the SCIE bit is set in the ICR
Register. Refer to
When TECR or RECR > 127, the EPSV bit gets set
ERROR ACTIVE
ERROR PASSIVE
When 128 * 11 recessive bits occur:
- the BOFF bit gets cleared
- the TECR register gets cleared
- the RECR register gets cleared
When TECR and RECR < 128, the EPSV bit gets cleared
When TECR > 255 the BOFF bit gets set and the EPSV bit gets cleared
BUS OFF
134/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.3.4 Bit Timing Logic
The bit timing logic monitors the serial bus-line and performs sampling and adjustment of the sample point by synchronizing on the start-bit edge and resynchronizing on following edges.
Its operation may be explained simply when the nominal bit time is divided into three segments as follows:
– Synchronisation segment (SYNC_SEG): a bit change is expected to lie within this time segment. It has a fixed length of one time quanta (1 x t
CAN
).
– Bit segment 1 (BS1): defines the location of the sample point. It includes the PROP_SEG and
PHASE_SEG1 of the CAN standard. Its duration is programmable between 1 and 16 time quanta but may be automatically lengthened to compensate for positive phase drifts due to differences in the frequency of the various nodes of the network.
– Bit segment 2 (BS2): defines the location of the transmit point. It represents the PHASE_SEG2 of the CAN standard. Its duration is programmable between 1 and 8 time quanta but may also be automatically shortened to compensate for negative phase drifts.
Figure 72. Bit Timing
– Resynchronization Jump Width (RJW): defines an upper bound to the amount of lengthening or shortening of the bit segments. It is programmable between 1 and 4 time quanta.
To guarantee the correct behaviour of the CAN controller, SYNC_SEG + BS1 + BS2 must be greater than or equal to 5 time quanta.
The CAN controller resynchronizes on recessive to dominant edges only.
For a detailed description of the CAN resynchronization mechanism and other bit timing configuration constraints, please refer to the Bosch CAN standard 2.0.
As a safeguard against programming errors, the configuration of the Bit Timing Register (BTR) is only possible while the device is in STANDBY mode.
SYNC_SEG
1 x t
CAN
NOMINAL BIT TIME
BIT SEGMENT 1 (BS1) t
BS1
SAMPLE POINT
BIT SEGMENT 2 (BS2) t
BS2
TRANSMIT POINT
135/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.4 Register Description
The CAN registers are organized as 6 general purpose registers plus 5 pages of 16 registers spanning the same address space and primarily used for message and filter storage. The page actually selected is defined by the content of the Page Selection Register.
10.8.4.1 General Purpose Registers
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER (ISR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
RXIF3 RXIF2 RXIF1 TXIF SCIF ORIF TEIF EPND
Bit 7 = RXIF3 Receive Interrupt Flag for Buffer 3
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that a new error-free message is available in buffer 3.
Cleared by software to release buffer 3.
Also cleared by resetting bit RDY of BCSR3.
Bit 6 = RXIF2 Receive Interrupt Flag for Buffer 2
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that a new error-free message is available in buffer 2.
Cleared by software to release buffer 2.
Also cleared by resetting bit RDY of BCSR2.
−
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that a new error-free message is available in buffer 1.
Cleared by software to release buffer 1.
Also cleared by resetting bit RDY of BCSR1.
−
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that the highest priority message queued for transmission has been successfully transmitted.
Cleared by software.
−
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal the reception of a dominant bit while in standby mode. In Run mode this bit
is set when EPVS is set or reset (refer to Figure 71.
CAN Error State Diagram ). This bit also signals any
receive error when ESCI=1.
Cleared by software.
−
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that a message could not be stored because no receive buffer was available.
Cleared by software.
−
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that an error occurred during the transmission of the highest priority message queued for transmission.
Cleared by software.
−
Read Only
Set by hardware when at least one of the three error interrupt flags SCIF, ORIF or TEIF is set.
Reset by hardware when all error interrupt flags have been cleared.
Caution:
Interrupt flags are reset by writing a “0” to the corresponding bit position. The appropriate way consists in writing an immediate mask or the one’s complement of the register content initially read by the interrupt handler. Bit manipulation instruction
BRES should never be used due to its read-modifywrite nature.
136/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (ICR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
0 ESCI RXIE TXIE SCIE ORIE TEIE 0
Bit 7 = Reserved.
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to specify that SCIF is to be set on receive errors also.
Cleared by software to set SCIF only on status changes and wake-up but not on all receive errors.
Bit 5 = RXIE Receive Interrupt Enable
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable an interrupt request whenever a message has been received free of errors.
Cleared by software to disable receive interrupt requests.
Bit 4 = TXIE Transmit Interrupt Enable
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable an interrupt request whenever a message has been successfully transmitted.
Cleared by software to disable transmit interrupt requests.
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable an interrupt request whenever the node’s status changes in run mode or whenever a dominant pulse is received in standby mode.
Cleared by software to disable status change interrupt requests.
Bit 2 = ORIE Overrun Interrupt Enable
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable an interrupt request whenever a message should be stored and no receive buffer is avalaible.
Cleared by software to disable overrun interrupt requests.
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable an interrupt whenever an error has been detected during transmission of a message.
Cleared by software to disable transmit error interrupts.
Bit 0 = Reserved.
137/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
0 BOFF EPSV SRTE NRTX FSYN WKPS RUN
−
Read Only
Set by hardware to indicate that the node is in busoff state, i.e. the Transmit Error Counter exceeds
255.
Reset by hardware to indicate that the node is involved in bus activities.
−
Read Only
Set by hardware to indicate that the node is error passive.
Reset by hardware to indicate that the node is either error active (BOFF = 0) or bus-off.
able
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable simultaneous transmission and reception of a message passing the acceptance filtering. Allows to check the integrity of the communication path.
Reset by software to discard all messages transmitted by the node. Allows remote and data frames to share the same identifier.
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to disable the retransmission of unsuccessful messages. It does not stop transmission in case of Arbitration Lost.
Cleared by software to enable retransmission of messages until success is met.
Bit 2 = FSYN Fast Synchronization
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to enable a fast resynchronization when leaving standby mode, i.e. wait for only 11 recessive bits in a row.
Cleared by software to enable the standard resynchronization when leaving standby mode, i.e. wait for 128 sequences of 11 recessive bits.
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to generate a dominant pulse when leaving standby mode.
Cleared by software for no dominant wake-up pulse.
Bit 0 = RUN CAN Enable
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to leave standby mode after 128 sequences of 11 recessive bits or just 11 recessive bits if FSYN is set.
Cleared by software to request a switch to the standby or low-power mode as soon as any on-going transfer is complete. Read-back as 1 in the meantime to enable proper signalling of the standby state. The CPU clock may therefore be safely switched OFF whenever RUN is read as 0.
138/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
BAUD RATE PRESCALER REGISTER (BRPR)
Read/Write in Standby mode
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
RJW1 RJW0 BRP5 BRP4 BRP3 BRP2 BRP1 BRP0
RJW[1:0] determine the maximum number of time quanta by which a bit period may be shortened or lengthened to achieve resynchronization.
t
RJW
= t
CAN
* (RJW + 1)
BRP[5:0] determine the CAN system clock cycle time or time quanta which is used to build up the individual bit timing.
t
CAN
= t
CPU
* (BRP + 1)
Where t
CPU
= time period of the CPU clock.
The resulting baud rate can be computed by the formula:
BR = t
CPU
× ( BRP + 1 ) × ( BS1 + BS2 + 3 )
BIT TIMING REGISTER (BTR)
Read/Write in Standby mode
Reset Value: 23h
7
0
0
BS22 BS21 BS20 BS13 BS12 BS11 BS10
BS2[2:0] determine the length of Bit Segment 2.
t
BS2
= t
CAN
* (BS2 + 1)
BS1[3:0] determine the length of Bit Segment 1.
t
BS1
= t
CAN
* (BS1 + 1)
Note: Writing to this register is allowed only in
Standby mode to prevent any accidental CAN protocol violation through programming errors.
PAGE SELECTION REGISTER (PSR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 00h
7
0 0 0 0 0
0
PAGE
2
PAGE
1
PAGE
0
PAGE[2:0] determine which buffer or filter page is mapped at addresses 0010h to 001Fh.
Note: Writing to this register is allowed only in
Standby mode to prevent any accidental CAN protocol violation through programming errors.
PAGE2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
PAGE1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
PAGE0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Page Title
Diagnosis
Buffer 1
Buffer 2
Buffer 3
Filters
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
139/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.4.2 Paged Registers
LAST IDENTIFIER HIGH REGISTER (LIDHR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7 0
LID10 LID9 LID8 LID7 LID6 LID5 LID4 LID3
TRANSMIT ERROR COUNTER REG. (TECR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
TEC7 TEC6 TEC5 TEC4 TEC3 TEC2 TEC1 TEC0
LID[10:3] are the most significant 8 bits of the last
Identifier read on the CAN bus.
LAST IDENTIFIER LOW REGISTER (LIDLR)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7 0
LID2 LID1 LID0 LRTR
LDLC
3
LDLC
2
LDLC
1
LDLC
0
TEC[7:0] is the least significant byte of the 9-bit
Transmit Error Counter implementing part of the fault confinement mechanism of the CAN protocol.
In case of an error during transmission, this counter is incremented by 8. It is decremented by 1 after every successful transmission. When the counter value exceeds 127, the CAN controller enters the error passive state. When a value of 256 is reached, the CAN controller is disconnected from the bus.
RECEIVE ERROR COUNTER REG. (RECR)
Page: 00h — Read Only
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
REC7 REC6 REC5 REC4 REC3 REC2 REC1 REC0
LID[2:0] are the least significant 3 bits of the last
Identifier read on the CAN bus.
LRTR is the last Remote Transmission Request bit read on the CAN bus.
LDLC[3:0] is the last Data Length Code read on the
CAN bus.
REC[7:0] is the Receive Error Counter implementing part of the fault confinement mechanism of the
CAN protocol. In case of an error during reception, this counter is incremented by 1 or by 8 depending on the error condition as defined by the CAN standard. After every successful reception the counter is decremented by 1 or reset to 120 if its value was higher than 128. When the counter value exceeds
127, the CAN controller enters the error passive state.
IDENTIFIER HIGH REGISTERS (IDHRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7
ID10 ID9 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4
0
ID3
ID[10:3] are the most significant 8 bits of the 11-bit message identifier.The identifier acts as the message’s name, used for bus access arbitration and acceptance filtering.
140/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
IDENTIFIER LOW REGISTERS (IDLRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7 0
ID2 ID1 ID0 RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0
BUFFER CONTROL/STATUS REGs. (BCSRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: 00h
7 0
0 0 0 0 ACC RDY BUSY LOCK
ID[2:0] are the least significant 3 bits of the 11-bit message identifier.
RTR is the Remote Transmission Request bit. It is set to indicate a remote frame and reset to indicate a data frame.
DLC[3:0] is the Data Length Code. It gives the number of bytes in the data field of the message.The valid range is 0 to 8.
DATA REGISTERS (DATA0-7x)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7 0
DATA
7
DATA
6
DATA
5
DATA
4
DATA
3
DATA
2
DATA
1
DATA
0
DATA[7:0] is a message data byte. Up to eight such bytes may be part of a message. Writing to byte
DATA7 initiates a transmit request and should always be done even when DATA7 is not part of the message.
−
Read Only
Set by hardware with the id of the highest priority filter which accepted the message stored in the buffer.
ACC = 0: Match for Filter/Mask0. Possible match for Filter/Mask1.
ACC = 1: No match for Filter/Mask0 and match for
Filter/Mask1.
Reset by hardware when either RDY or RXIF gets reset.
−
Read/Clear
Set by hardware to signal that a new error-free message is available (LOCK = 0) or that a transmission request is pending (LOCK = 1).
Cleared by software when LOCK = 0 to release the buffer and to clear the corresponding RXIF bit in the Interrupt Status Register.
Cleared by hardware when LOCK = 1 to indicate that the transmission request has been serviced or cancelled.
−
Read Only
Set by hardware when the buffer is being filled
(LOCK = 0) or emptied (LOCK = 1) and reset after the 2nd intermission bit.
Reset by hardware when the buffer is not accessed by the CAN core for transmission nor reception purposes.
−
Read/Set/Clear
Set by software to lock a buffer. No more message can be received into the buffer thus preserving its content and making it available for transmission.
Cleared by software to make the buffer available for reception. Cancels any pending transmission request.
Cleared by hardware once a message has been successfully transmitted provided the early transmit interrupt mode is on. Left untouched otherwise.
Note that in order to prevent any message corruption or loss of context, LOCK cannot be set nor reset while BUSY is set. Trying to do so will result in
LOCK not changing state.
141/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
FILTER HIGH REGISTERS (FHRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7 0
FIL11 FIL10 FIL9 FIL8 FIL7 FIL6 FIL5 FlL4
MASK HIGH REGISTERS (MHRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7 0
MSK1
1
MSK1
0
MSK9 MSK8 MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4
FIL[11:3] are the most significant 8 bits of a 12-bit message filter. The acceptance filter is compared bit by bit with the identifier and the RTR bit of the incoming message. If there is a match for the set of bits specified by the acceptance mask then the message is stored in a receive buffer.
FILTER LOW REGISTERS (FLRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7
FIL3 FIL2 FIL1 FIL0 0 0 0
0
0
MSK[11:3] are the most significant 8 bits of a 12bit message mask. The acceptance mask defines which bits of the acceptance filter should match the identifier and the RTR bit of the incoming message.
MSK i
MSK i
= 0: don’t care.
= 1: match required.
MASK LOW REGISTERS (MLRx)
Read/Write
Reset Value: Undefined
7
MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 0 0 0
0
0
FIL[3:0] are the least significant 4 bits of a 12-bit message filter.
MSK[3:0] are the least significant 4 bits of a 12-bit message mask.
142/215
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 73. CAN Register Map
5Ah
5Bh
5Ch
5Dh
5Eh
5Fh
60h
6Fh
Interrupt Status
Interrupt Control
Control/Status
Baud Rate Prescaler
Bit Timing
Page Selection
Paged Reg1
Paged Reg1
Paged Reg0
Paged Reg2
Paged Reg1
Paged Reg2
Paged Reg3
Paged Reg4
Paged Reg5
Paged Reg6
Paged Reg7
Paged Reg8
Paged Reg9
Paged Reg10
Paged Reg11
Paged Reg12
Paged Reg13
Paged Reg15
Paged Reg15
ST72F521, ST72521B
143/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 74. Page Maps
6Ah
6Bh
6Ch
6Dh
6Eh
6Fh
64h
65h
66h
67h
68h
69h
60h
61h
62h
63h
PAGE 0
LIDHR
LIDLR
Reserved
TECR
RECR
Diagnosis
BCSR1
Buffer 1
PAGE 1
IDHR1
IDLR1
DATA01
DATA11
DATA21
DATA31
DATA41
DATA51
DATA61
DATA71
Reserved
PAGE 2
IDHR2
IDLR2
DATA02
DATA12
DATA22
DATA32
DATA42
DATA52
DATA62
DATA72
Reserved
BCSR2
Buffer 2
PAGE 3
IDHR3
IDLR3
DATA03
DATA13
DATA23
DATA33
DATA43
DATA53
DATA63
DATA73
Reserved
PAGE 4
FHR0
FLR0
MHR0
MLR0
FHR1
FLR1
MHR1
MLR1
Reserved
BCSR3
Buffer 3 Acceptance Filters
144/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Table 24. CAN Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
60, 64
61
61, 65
62 to 69 1 to 3
62, 66
63, 67
6E
6F
Page
0
1 to 3
4
0
1 to 3
4
4
4
0
1 to 3
Register
Label
CANIDLRx
Reset Value
CANFLRx
Reset Value
CANDRx
Reset Value
CANMHRx
Reset Value
CANMLRx
Reset Value
CANTECR
Reset Value
CANRECR
Reset Value
CANBCSRx
Reset Value
CANISR
Reset Value
CANICR
Reset Value
CANCSR
Reset Value
CANBRPR
Reset Value
CANBTR
Reset Value
CANPSR
Reset Value
CANLIDHR
Reset Value
CANIDHRx
Reset Value
CANFHRx
Reset Value
CANLIDLR
Reset Value
7
RXIF3
0
0
0
RJW1
0
0
0
6 x
MSK10 x
MSK2 x
0
0
0
ID2 x
FIL3 x
MSB x
MSK11 x
MSK3 x
MSB
0
MSB
0
0
LID10 x
ID10 x
FIL11 x
LID2 x
RXIF2
0
ESCI
0
BOFF
0
RJW0
0
BS22
0
0
LID9 x
ID9 x
FIL10 x
LID1 x
ID1 x
FIL2 x
5
RXIF1
0
RXIE
0
EPSV
0
BRP5
0
BS21
1 x
MSK9 x
MSK1 x
0
0
0
0
LID8 x
ID8 x
FIL9 x
LID0 x
ID0 x
FIL1 x
4 3 2 1 0
0
LID7 x
ID7 x
FIL8 x
LRTR x
RTR x
FIL0 x
TXIF
0
TXIE
0
SRTE
0
BRP4
0
BS20
0
SCIF
0
SCIE
0
NRTX
0
BRP3
0
BS13
0
0
LID6 x
ID6 x
FIL7 x
LDLC3 x
DLC3 x
BS12
0
PAGE2
0
LID5 x
ID5 x
ORIF
0
ORIE
0
FSYN
0
BRP2
0
FIL6 x
LDLC2 x
DLC2 x
EPND
0
ETX
0
RUN
0
BRP0
0
BS10
1
PAGE0
0
LID3 x
ID3 x
FIL4 x
LDLC0 x
DLC0 x
TEIF
0
TEIE
0
WKPS
0
BRP1
0
BS11
1
PAGE1
0
LID4 x
ID4 x
FIL5 x
LDLC1 x
DLC1 x
0 0 0 x
MSK8 x
MSK0 x x
MSK7 x
0 x
MSK6 x
0 x
MSK5 x
0
0
LSB x
MSK4 x
0
0
0
0
0
ACC
0
0
0
RDY
0
0
0
BUSY
0
0
LSB
0
LSB
0
LOCK
0
145/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.5 List of CAN Cell Limitations
10.8.5.1 Omitted SOF bit
Symptom:
Start of Frame (SOF) bit is omitted if transmission is requested in the last Intermission bit.
Test Case:
5.3.1 10-Kbit Stress Test
Details:
The IUT is requested to start transmission immediately after the completion of the previous transmission. The LT also starts its transmission and asserts the SOF bit just after the 3 rd
Intermission bit.
The IUT also starts transmission but omits the
SOF bit. The IUT wins the arbitration and continues the transmission. The frame is sent correctly.
Impact On The Application:
As this effect only occurs when the IUT detects a
SOF bit on the CAN bus, the fact that it omits its own SOF bit has no impact on the communication.
10.8.5.2 CAN: CPU Write Access (More Than
One Cycle) Corrupts CAN Frame
Symptoms:
For CAN received messages the identifier high byte or last data byte can be corrupted.
For CAN transmitted messages the 2nd data byte can be corrupted.
Details:
The CAN transmit and receive buffers are implemented as dual ported RAM. During the reception of a CAN frame the CAN core writes the received identifier and the data byte-by-byte in the corresponding buffer.
IF the CAN bit timing configuration is t
BS2 quanta
< 5 time
AND
IF concurrently with the pCAN, the CPU executes a write access to the dual ported RAM using an instruction with more than one cycle access, e.g.
CLR, BSET, BRES
THEN the access conflict can lead to the corruption described in the symptoms paragraph above.
Impact On The Application:
Several CAN frames with erroneous data or identifier will be received/transmitted.
Software Workaround:
Program t
BS2
> 4 time quanta or, when accessing the receive or transmit buffers, do not use the critical instructions which are:
BSET, BRES, CLR, CPL, DEC, INC, NEG, RLC,
SLL, SRL, RRC, SRA, SWAP.
146/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.5.3 Unexpected message transmission
Symptom:
The previous message received by pCAN, even if this message did not pass the receive filter, will be retransmitted by pCAN with a correct identifier and
DLC but with corrupted data. The data bytes will be a copy of the identifier bytes IDHR and IDLR in the following repetitive pattern:
DATA_0 = IDHR
DATA_1 = IDLR
DATA_2 = IDHR
DATA_3 = IDLR etc.
DATA_7 = IDLR
If no message has been received before the problem occurs then identifier byte values are random but the data bytes are in the same repetitive pattern.
Details:
The buffers of the pCAN cell are configurable as receive or transmit buffers. By default, all buffers are configured in reception. To use a buffer to transmit a CAN message the application has to reserve this buffer for transmission by setting the
LOCK bit in the BCSR register. So the buffer is then locked for any further reception and reserved for transmission.
Once a transmission has been requested by a write access to data byte 7 of the buffer the application might need to abort this transmission request. To do so, the application can reset the
LOCK bit in the BCSR register.
If the message is pending (RDY bit set) but not currently being transmitted, then clearing the
LOCK bit will abort it immediately.
If the message is pending (RDY bit set) and currently being transmitted then the message will not be interrupted but the CAN core will wait until the end of this transmission attempt. Then software must clear the LOCK bit again to abort the transmission.
An unexpected transmission can occur:
IF the application resets the LOCK bit
WHILE the CAN core is preparing the transmission
1)
AND there is no other transmission pending in another buffer
THEN the LOCK bit is reset but the transmission is not stopped. Instead the content of the page 0 buffer will be transmitted.
Impact On The Application: pCAN will echo some messages sent by other nodes. Identifier and DLC will be correct but data are corrupted as described previously.
Note 1: The preparation lasts two bit times just before SOF, this is the critical window during which the LOCK bit must not be reset by the application.
147/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Software Work-around - Devices with Hardware Fix (ST72F521 rev “R”):
To implement a transmission abort under safe conditions, the LOCK bit must not be reset during the critical window (2 bit times). A new function has been implemented in the MCU allowing the application to synchronize the reset of the LOCK bit (abort request) with the reset of the TXRQST bit
(internal signal) in the pCAN core.
The synchronization is done using the WKPS bit in the CANCSR register, the function of this bit has been modified and no more Wake-up Pulse (dominant bit) is sent on the CAN_TX signal when the
WKPS bit is set. This means the functionality described in the datasheet is no longer applicable
).
To abort the transmission, first the application sets the WKPS bit and polls it until it is set. The maximum time needed to set this bit is two CAN bit times. Once the application has read the WKPS bit as one, it can reset the LOCK bit to stop the current transmission.
The abort is completed when the LOCK bit is read back as zero by the application. Once the abort has been completed, the application must reset the WKPS bit to be able to transmit again. Of course the transmit buffer must be in LOCK state as usual before any transmission attempt.
The “C” code sequence below shows the software work-around using the WKPS bit.
CANCSR |= WKPS; // Set WKPS bit while(!(CANCSR & WKPS) );// Wait until WKPS bit is set while( CANBCSR & LOCK )// Wait until abort has been confirmed
{
CANBCSR &= ~LOCK;
}
CANCSR &= ~WKPS; // Allow transmission again
CANBCSR |= LOCK; //Alloc buffer for next transmission
148/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Software Work-around - Devices without Hardware Fix:
To implement a transmission abort under safe conditions, any reset of the LOCK bit during the critical window (2 bit times) must be avoided. Two different cases have to be considered, either the pCAN enters standby mode after the abort, or the abort is performed and pCAN keeps running.
Abort followed by STANDBY mode (RUN=0)
In this case, aborting the pending transmissions can safely be done by first entering STANDBY mode and then releasing the transmit buffers.
STANDBY mode is entered by resetting the RUN bit in the CSR register and once the current transmission attempt, even if it fails due to error or lost arbitration, has been performed, pCAN enters
STANDBY mode (RUN=0). Once in STANDBY mode the application can abort all pending transmissions by resetting the corresponding LOCK bit.
Abort while staying in RUN mode (RUN=1)
Contrary to the STANDBY case described previously, in the RUN case the application has to handle the error or arbitration lost conditions. In case of transmission errors, causing the frame to be transmitted again and again, the application must set the NRTX bit in the CSR register. This will cause pCAN to abort the transmission at the end of the current attempt.
In case of arbitration lost, setting the NRTX bit does not abort the transmission, therefore the application must reset the LOCK bit to abort the transmission. To avoid resetting the LOCK bit during the critical time window, leading to the problem described at the start of this section, the application must monitor the BUSY bit in the BCSR register and reset the LOCK bit just after the falling edge of the BUSY bit. The time between the falling edge of the BUSY bit and the SOF of the next transmission attempt is in any case long enough to guarantee that the LOCK bit is reset before the critical time window.
The “C” code sequence below shows the software work-around for both the error and arbitration lost cases.
_asm("SIM\n"); // Mask interrupts
CANCSR |= NRTX; // Set non automatic retransmission bit while(!(CANBCSR & BUSY) &&// Wait till BUSY bit is set
(CANBCSR & RDY) ); // or transmission done while( CANBCSR & BUSY ); // Wait till BUSY bit is reset (falling edge) if( CANBCSR & RDY )
{ // transmission still pending -> must be aborted
CANBCSR &= ~LOCK; //Arbitration lost => cancel transmission safel while( CANBCSR & RDY );// Wait for unlock confirmed
CANCSR &= ~NRTX;// Reset NRTX bit once abort sequence done
_asm("RIM\n");
} else
{ // No more abort required as RDY bit already reset
CANCSR &= ~NRTX;// Reset NRTX bit once abort sequence done
_asm("RIM\n"); // Enable interrupts
}
149/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Figure 75. Work-around Flowchart
Application Requests an Abort
YES
READY == 1
MASK INT
SET NRTX
YES
BUSY == 0
AND
READY == 1
NO
YES
YES
BUSY == 0
NO
READY == 1
RESET LOCK
NO
NO
NO
READY == 1
SET LOCK
YES
RESET NRTX
ENABLE INT
Abort Done
150/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
The figures below show the abort behaviour in the four possible cases.
Figure 76. Abort and successful transmission
TX RQST
ABORT RQST
CAN TX
CAN RX
LOCK
READY
BUSY
NRTX
In this case the abort request performed during the transmission has no effect, as the first transmission is successful.
Figure 77. Abort and transmission delayed by busy CAN bus
TX RQST
ABORT RQST
CAN TX
CAN RX
LOCK
READY
BUSY
NRTX
In this case the NRTX bit is set to abort the transmission after the first attempt. As the first attempt is successful the READY and BUSY bits are reset by pCAN and the transmit buffer becomes empty.
An abort is no longer required.
Figure 78. Abort and error during transmission
Error
TX RQST
ABORT RQST
CAN TX
CAN RX
LOCK
READY
BUSY
NRTX the error (the first attempt). The abort has been successful and the transmit buffer is empty.
Figure 79. Abort and arbitration lost
TX RQST
ABORT RQST
CAN TX
CAN RX
LOCK
READY
BUSY
NRTX
In this case the NRTX bit is set but has no effect, as the previous transmission attempt failed due to an arbitration lost. The application waits for the falling edge of BUSY bit and checks that READY is still set. This is the case, this means pCAN has lost the arbitration and LOCK bit can be safely reset.
Abort is immediate and pCAN resets the READY and BUSY bits.
Timing Considerations
As no interrupt signals that an abort has been successful, the application has to wait until the transmit buffer is empty (transmission has been aborted or transmitted successfully). This time can vary depending on the case in which the abort is performed (arbitration lost, error or successful transmission). To show the impact of the software work-
around on this timing behaviour Figure 80 and
compare the reference behaviour (worst case when abort is done by LOCK only) with the behaviour when NRTX, BUSY and LOCK bits are used.
Figure 80. Abort by LOCK only - Reference behaviour
TX RQST
ABORT RQST
CAN TX
CAN RX
LOCK
READY
BUSY
NRTX
In this case NRTX (abort request) is set before the error, thus pCAN resets READY and BUSY after
151/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
The worst case is when the abort request is done when the transmission has just started. In this case the LOCK bit cannot be reset as long as the
BUSY bit is set, this means until the end of the frame. So the application will wait for READY to be reset during the whole frame and in this case the worst case will be the longest frame the application is expected to transmit.
Figure 81. Abort with the software work-around
- by NRTX, BUSY and LOCK
TX RQST
ABORT RQST
CAN TX
CAN RX
LOCK
READY
BUSY
NRTX
Using the software work-around the worst case occurs in the arbitration lost case. If the abort is requested just after pCAN has lost the arbitration then the application has to wait for the next falling edge of the BUSY bit before the LOCK bit can be reset. If the next arbitration is won by pCAN then the BUSY bit will be reset by the end of the successful transmission. The longest time the application has to wait in this case is the time of the longest message expected on the bus (minus identifier) plus the longest message expected to be transmitted by the application. This roughly double the time the application may have to wait before the abort sequence is performed.
10.8.5.4 WKPS Functionality
Due to a fix implemented to solve the “Unexpected
Message Transmission” issue (see
) the WKPS functionality has been modified as follows in Flash ST72F521 devices:
Device
Flash
ST72F521
Rev R
Modification
WKPS bit does not generate a wakeup pulse. It is used to synchronize the re-
set of the LOCK bit (see “Software
Work-around - Devices with Hardware
Fix (ST72F521 rev “R”):” on page 148 )
ROM
ST72521 All revisions
WKPS bit functions according to the datasheet description.
152/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.8.5.5 Bus-off state not entered
Symptom: pCAN does not enter bus-off state under certain conditions. This is fixed in FLASH version of
ST72F521 starting from silicon Rev R and in ROM version ST72521B starting from silicon Rev Y.
Details:
According to the CAN standard, pCAN is expected to enter bus-off state when TEC (Transmit Error
Counter) is greater than 255.
But if REC (Receive Error Counter) is greater than
127 (Error Passive State) pCAN does not enter bus-off and the BOFF bit of the CSR register is not set. To enter bus-off, REC must decrease to a value lower than 128, this is the case with any correct reception even if the message is filtered out.
As bus-off state is not entered and pCAN still attempts to transmit its message, after the overflow the TEC register continues to increment as long as transmission errors occur.
Impact on the application:
The application will not stop attempting to transmit
CAN messages, even when the bus-off conditions have been reached, until the transmission has been successful or the value of REC becomes lower than 128. However the application will not disturb the communication of the other nodes on the CAN network as pCAN is in Error Passive
State.
Figure 82. CAN Error State Diagram showing “BUSOFF not entered” limitation
When TECR or RECR > 127, the EPSV bit gets set
ERROR ACTIVE
ERROR PASSIVE
When 128 * 11 recessive bits occur:
- the BOFF bit gets cleared
- the TECR register gets cleared
- the RECR register gets cleared
When TECR and RECR < 128, the EPSV bit gets cleared
When TECR > 255 and RECR < 128 the BOFF bit
gets set and the EPSV bit gets cleared
BUS OFF
153/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Workaround Description
The bus-off entry works correctly in almost all cases, only when REC is greater than 127 a bus-off will not be recognized by pCAN. Therefore the pCAN bus-off signalling (BOFF) is still used but it needs to be complemented by monitoring TEC by software.
To detect the bus-off condition by software the application has to monitor the value of the TEC register periodically. An overflow signals a bus-off condition. When a bus-off condition has been detected the application must execute the following sequence to recover from bus-off properly: the application stops pCAN by clearing the RUN bit in the
CANCSR register resets all pending transmission by clearing the LOCK bit in the BCSR register and starts it again by setting the RUN bit.
To detect the bus-off condition properly, the TEC monitoring period must be lower than the time between two overflows. As the problem only occurs when pCAN is in Error Passive State (REC > 127) pCAN will continuously try to send a SOF followed by an Error Passive Flag and a Suspend Transmission. This leads to 26 (1 + 6 + 8 + 3 + 8) bit times. Each time TEC is incremented by 8, hence
* ***********************************************/
/* INITIALISATION
/************************************************/ unsigned char TECReg=0; //Previous value of TEC unsigned char BusOffFlag=0; //Set to one if bus-off to reach 256 the sequence must be executed 32 times. Under these conditions the shortest sequence leading to a TEC overflow lasts 832 bit times.
Depending on the baudrate the application will have to adapt the monitoring period, for example at 500kbps the period must be less than 1600us.
The ‘C’ code below shows an implementation example of the monitoring sequence. This code is called periodically as described above.
To detect the overflow, the test condition must take into account that TEC might also have been decremented due to a successful transmission. So an overflow condition is detected:
IF the current TEC value is lower than the previous
TEC value
AND the difference is greater than the number of possible successful transmissions during the monitoring period.
In the example above, one message can be sent, therefore one is added to CANTECR.
/************************************************/
/* BUS-OFF MONITORING SEQUENCE
/************************************************/ if( (CANCSR & BOFF) || ( CANTECR+1 < TECReg) )
{
BusOffFlag = 1;
} else
{
TECReg = CANTECR;
}
154/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10.9 10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC)
10.9.1 Introduction
The on-chip Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) peripheral is a 10-bit, successive approximation converter with internal sample and hold circuitry. This peripheral has up to 16 multiplexed analog input channels (refer to device pin out description) that allow the peripheral to convert the analog voltage levels from up to 16 different sources.
The result of the conversion is stored in a 10-bit
Data Register. The A/D converter is controlled through a Control/Status Register.
Figure 83. ADC Block Diagram f
CPU DIV 4
0 f
ADC
DIV 2 1
10.9.2 Main Features
■ 10-bit conversion
■
■
Up to 16 channels with multiplexed input
Linear successive approximation
■
■
■
Data register (DR) which contains the results
Conversion complete status flag
On/off bit (to reduce consumption)
The block diagram is shown in
EOC SPEED ADON 0 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 ADCCSR
4
AIN0
AIN1
AINx
ANALOG
MUX
ANALOG TO DIGITAL
CONVERTER
ADCDRH D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2
ADCDRL 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 D0
155/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)
10.9.3 Functional Description
The conversion is monotonic, meaning that the result never decreases if the analog input does not and never increases if the analog input does not.
If the input voltage (V
AIN
) is greater than V
AREF
(high-level voltage reference) then the conversion result is FFh in the ADCDRH register and 03h in the ADCDRL register (without overflow indication).
If the input voltage (V
AIN
) is lower than V
SSA
(lowlevel voltage reference) then the conversion result in the ADCDRH and ADCDRL registers is 00 00h.
The A/D converter is linear and the digital result of the conversion is stored in the ADCDRH and AD-
CDRL registers. The accuracy of the conversion is described in the Electrical Characteristics Section.
R
AIN
is the maximum recommended impedance for an analog input signal. If the impedance is too high, this will result in a loss of accuracy due to leakage and sampling not being completed in the alloted time.
10.9.3.1 A/D Converter Configuration
The analog input ports must be configured as input, no pull-up, no interrupt. Refer to the «I/O ports» chapter. Using these pins as analog inputs does not affect the ability of the port to be read as a logic input.
In the ADCCSR register:
– Select the CS[3:0] bits to assign the analog channel to convert.
10.9.3.2 Starting the Conversion
In the ADCCSR register:
– Set the ADON bit to enable the A/D converter and to start the conversion. From this time on, the ADC performs a continuous conversion of the selected channel.
To read the 10 bits, perform the following steps:
1. Poll the EOC bit
2. Read the ADCDRL register
3. Read the ADCDRH register. This clears EOC automatically.
Note: The data is not latched, so both the low and the high data register must be read before the next conversion is complete, so it is recommended to disable interrupts while reading the conversion result.
To read only 8 bits, perform the following steps:
1. Poll the EOC bit
2. Read the ADCDRH register. This clears EOC automatically.
10.9.3.3 Changing the conversion channel
The application can change channels during conversion. When software modifies the CH[3:0] bits in the ADCCSR register, the current conversion is stopped, the EOC bit is cleared, and the A/D converter starts converting the newly selected channel.
10.9.4 Low Power Modes
Note: The A/D converter may be disabled by resetting the ADON bit. This feature allows reduced power consumption when no conversion is needed and between single shot conversions.
Mode Description
WAIT No effect on A/D Converter
A/D Converter disabled.
HALT
After wakeup from Halt mode, the A/D
Converter requires a stabilization time t
STAB
(see Electrical Characteristics) before accurate conversions can be performed.
When a conversion is complete:
– The EOC bit is set by hardware.
– The result is in the ADCDR registers.
A read to the ADCDRH resets the EOC bit.
10.9.5 Interrupts
None.
156/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)
10.9.6 Register Description
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (ADCCSR)
Read/Write (Except bit 7 read only)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
EOC SPEED ADON 0 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0
Bit 7 = EOC End of Conversion
This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by hardware when software reads the ADCDRH register or writes to any bit of the ADCCSR register.
0: Conversion is not complete
1: Conversion complete
Bit 6 = SPEED ADC clock selection
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: f
ADC
= f
CPU
1: f
ADC
= f
CPU
/4
/2
Bit 5 = ADON A/D Converter on
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable ADC and stop conversion
1: Enable ADC and start conversion
Bit 4 = Reserved. Must be kept cleared.
Bit 3:0 = CH[3:0] Channel Selection
These bits are set and cleared by software. They select the analog input to convert.
Channel Pin*
AIN0
AIN1
AIN2
AIN3
AIN4
AIN5
AIN6
AIN7
AIN8
AIN9
AIN10
AIN11
AIN12
AIN13
AIN14
AIN15
CH3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CH2
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
CH1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
CH0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
*The number of channels is device dependent. Refer to the device pinout description.
DATA REGISTER (ADCDRH)
Read Only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3
0
D2
Bit 7:0 = D[9:2] MSB of Converted Analog Value
DATA REGISTER (ADCDRL)
Read Only
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 D1
Bit 7:2 = Reserved. Forced by hardware to 0.
D0
Bit 1:0 = D[1:0] LSB of Converted Analog Value
157/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (Cont’d)
Table 25. ADC Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
0070h
0071h
0072h
Register
Label
ADCCSR
Reset Value
ADCDRH
Reset Value
ADCDRL
Reset Value
7
EOC
0
D9
0
0
6
SPEED
0
D8
0
0
5
ADON
0
D7
0
0
4
0
D6
0
0
3
CH3
0
D5
0
0
2
CH2
0
D4
0
0
1
CH1
0
D3
0
D1
0
0
CH0
0
D2
0
D0
0
158/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
11 INSTRUCTION SET
11.1 CPU ADDRESSING MODES
The CPU features 17 different addressing modes which can be classified in 7 main groups:
Addressing Mode
Inherent
Immediate
Direct
Indexed
Indirect
Relative
Bit operation
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Inherent
Immediate
Short
Long
No Offset
Short
Long
Short
Long
Short
Long
Relative
Relative
Example nop ld A,#$55 ld A,$55 ld A,($55,X) ld A,([$55],X) jrne loop bset byte,#5 so, most of the addressing modes may be subdivided in two sub-modes called long and short:
– Long addressing mode is more powerful because it can use the full 64 Kbyte address space, however it uses more bytes and more CPU cycles.
– Short addressing mode is less powerful because it can generally only access page zero (0000h -
00FFh range), but the instruction size is more compact, and faster. All memory to memory instructions use short addressing modes only
(CLR, CPL, NEG, BSET, BRES, BTJT, BTJF,
INC, DEC, RLC, RRC, SLL, SRL, SRA, SWAP)
The ST7 Assembler optimizes the use of long and short addressing modes.
The CPU Instruction set is designed to minimize the number of bytes required per instruction: To do
Table 26. CPU Addressing Mode Overview
Mode Syntax Destination
Pointer
Address
(Hex.)
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Indirect
Indirect
Indexed nop ld A,#$55 ld A,$10 ld A,$1000 ld A,(X)
Indexed ld A,($10,X)
Indexed ld A,($1000,X) ld A,[$10] ld A,[$10.w]
Indirect Indexed ld A,([$10],X)
Indirect Indexed ld A,([$10.w],X)
Direct
Indirect jrne loop jrne [$10]
00..FF
0000..FFFF
00..FF
00..1FE
0000..FFFF
00..FF
00..FF
0000..FFFF
00..FF
00..1FE
00..FF
0000..FFFF
00..FF
PC+/-127
PC+/-127 00..FF
Direct
Indirect bset $10,#7 bset [$10],#7
00..FF
00..FF
Direct Relative btjt $10,#7,skip 00..FF
Indirect Relative btjt [$10],#7,skip 00..FF
00..FF
00..FF
Pointer Size
(Hex.) byte word byte word byte byte byte
Length
(Bytes)
+ 2
+ 2
+ 1
+ 2
+ 1
+ 2
+ 2
+ 2
+ 1
+ 2
+ 2
+ 3
+ 0
+ 1
+ 1
+ 2
+ 0
159/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)
11.1.1 Inherent
All Inherent instructions consist of a single byte.
The opcode fully specifies all the required information for the CPU to process the operation.
Inherent Instruction
NOP
TRAP
WFI
HALT
RET
IRET
SIM
RIM
SCF
RCF
RSP
LD
CLR
PUSH/POP
INC/DEC
TNZ
CPL, NEG
MUL
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,
RRC
SWAP
Function
No operation
S/W Interrupt
Wait For Interrupt (Low Power Mode)
Halt Oscillator (Lowest Power
Mode)
Sub-routine Return
Interrupt Sub-routine Return
Set Interrupt Mask (level 3)
Reset Interrupt Mask (level 0)
Set Carry Flag
Reset Carry Flag
Reset Stack Pointer
Load
Clear
Push/Pop to/from the stack
Increment/Decrement
Test Negative or Zero
1 or 2 Complement
Byte Multiplication
Shift and Rotate Operations
Swap Nibbles
11.1.2 Immediate
Immediate instructions have two bytes, the first byte contains the opcode, the second byte contains the operand value.
Immediate Instruction
LD
CP
Function
Load
Compare
BCP
AND, OR, XOR
Bit Compare
Logical Operations
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC Arithmetic Operations
11.1.3 Direct
In Direct instructions, the operands are referenced by their memory address.
The direct addressing mode consists of two submodes:
Direct (short)
The address is a byte, thus requires only one byte after the opcode, but only allows 00 - FF addressing space.
Direct (long)
The address is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space, but requires 2 bytes after the opcode.
11.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long)
In this mode, the operand is referenced by its memory address, which is defined by the unsigned addition of an index register (X or Y) with an offset.
The indirect addressing mode consists of three sub-modes:
Indexed (No Offset)
There is no offset, (no extra byte after the opcode), and allows 00 - FF addressing space.
Indexed (Short)
The offset is a byte, thus requires only one byte after the opcode and allows 00 - 1FE addressing space.
Indexed (long)
The offset is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space and requires 2 bytes after the opcode.
11.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long)
The required data byte to do the operation is found by its memory address, located in memory (pointer).
The pointer address follows the opcode. The indirect addressing mode consists of two sub-modes:
Indirect (short)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a byte, thus allowing 00 - FF addressing space, and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Indirect (long)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space, and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
160/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)
11.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long)
This is a combination of indirect and short indexed addressing modes. The operand is referenced by its memory address, which is defined by the unsigned addition of an index register value (X or Y) with a pointer value located in memory. The pointer address follows the opcode.
The indirect indexed addressing mode consists of two sub-modes:
Indirect Indexed (Short)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a byte, thus allowing 00 - 1FE addressing space, and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Indirect Indexed (Long)
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space, and requires 1 byte after the opcode.
Table 27. Instructions Supporting Direct,
Indexed, Indirect and Indirect Indexed
Addressing Modes
Long and Short
Instructions
LD
CP
AND, OR, XOR
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC
BCP
Function
Load
Compare
Logical Operations
Arithmetic Additions/Substractions operations
Bit Compare
11.1.7 Relative mode (Direct, Indirect)
This addressing mode is used to modify the PC register value, by adding an 8-bit signed offset to it.
Available Relative
Direct/Indirect
Instructions
JRxx
CALLR
Function
Conditional Jump
Call Relative
The relative addressing mode consists of two submodes:
Relative (Direct)
The offset is following the opcode.
Relative (Indirect)
The offset is defined in memory, which address follows the opcode.
Short Instructions
Only
CLR
INC, DEC
TNZ
CPL, NEG
BSET, BRES
BTJT, BTJF
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,
RRC
SWAP
CALL, JP
Function
Clear
Increment/Decrement
Test Negative or Zero
1 or 2 Complement
Bit Operations
Bit Test and Jump Operations
Shift and Rotate Operations
Swap Nibbles
Call or Jump subroutine
161/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)
11.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS
The ST7 family devices use an Instruction Set consisting of 63 instructions. The instructions may
Load and Transfer
Stack operation
Increment/Decrement
Compare and Tests
Logical operations
Bit Operation
Conditional Bit Test and Branch
Arithmetic operations
Shift and Rotates
Unconditional Jump or Call
Conditional Branch
Interruption management
Condition Code Flag modification
LD CLR
PUSH POP
INC DEC
CP
AND
BSET
TNZ
OR
BRES
BTJT
ADC
SLL
JRA
JRxx
TRAP WFI
SIM RIM
BTJF
ADD
SRL
JRT be subdivided into 13 main groups as illustrated in the following table:
RSP
BCP
XOR
SUB
SRA
JRF
CPL
SBC MUL
RLC
JP
RRC SWAP
CALL CALLR
HALT IRET
SCF RCF
NEG
SLA
NOP RET
Using a pre-byte
The instructions are described with one to four opcodes.
In order to extend the number of available opcodes for an 8-bit CPU (256 opcodes), three different prebyte opcodes are defined. These prebytes modify the meaning of the instruction they precede.
The whole instruction becomes:
PC-2 End of previous instruction
PC-1
PC
Prebyte opcode
PC+1 Additional word (0 to 2) according to the number of bytes required to compute the effective address
These prebytes enable instruction in Y as well as indirect addressing modes to be implemented.
They precede the opcode of the instruction in X or the instruction using direct addressing mode. The prebytes are:
PDY 90 Replace an X based instruction using immediate, direct, indexed, or inherent addressing mode by a Y one.
PIX 92 Replace an instruction using direct, direct bit, or direct relative addressing mode to an instruction using the corresponding indirect addressing mode.
It also changes an instruction using X indexed addressing mode to an instruction using indirect X indexed addressing mode.
PIY 91 Replace an instruction using X indirect indexed addressing mode by a Y one.
162/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)
Mnemo
ADC
ADD
AND
BCP
BRES
BSET
BTJF
BTJT
CALL
Description
Add with Carry
Addition
Jump if bit is false (0)
Jump if bit is true (1)
Call subroutine
Function/Example
A = A + M + C
A = A + M
Logical And A = A . M
Bit compare A, Memory tst (A . M)
Bit Reset
Bit Set bres Byte, #3 bset Byte, #3 btjf Byte, #3, Jmp1 btjt Byte, #3, Jmp1
CALLR Call subroutine relative
CLR Clear
CP
CPL
DEC
HALT
IRET
INC
JP
JRA
JRT
JRF
JRIH
Arithmetic Compare
One Complement tst(Reg - M)
A = FFH-A dec Y Decrement
Halt
Interrupt routine return
Increment
Absolute Jump
Pop CC, A, X, PC inc X jp [TBL.w]
Jump relative always
Jump relative
Never jump jrf *
Jump if ext. INT pin = 1 (ext. INT pin high)
JRIL
JRH
JRNH
JRM
JRNM
JRMI
JRPL
JREQ
JRNE
Jump if ext. INT pin = 0
Jump if H = 1
Jump if H = 0
Jump if I1:0 = 11
Jump if I1:0 <> 11
Jump if N = 1 (minus)
Jump if N = 0 (plus)
JRC
JRNC
Jump if C = 1
Jump if C = 0
JRULT Jump if C = 1
JRUGE Jump if C = 0
JRUGT Jump if (C + Z = 0)
(ext. INT pin low)
H = 1 ?
H = 0 ?
I1:0 = 11 ?
I1:0 <> 11 ?
N = 1 ?
N = 0 ?
Jump if Z = 1 (equal) Z = 1 ?
Jump if Z = 0 (not equal) Z = 0 ?
C = 1 ?
C = 0 ?
Unsigned <
Jmp if unsigned >=
Unsigned >
M
M
M
M
A
A
A
A
Dst reg, M reg reg, M reg, M reg, M
M
Src
M
M
M
M
I1 H I0 N Z C
H N Z C
H N Z C
N Z
N Z
0 1
N Z C
N Z 1
N Z
1 0
I1 H I0 N Z C
N Z
C
C
163/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)
Mnemo Description
JRULE Jump if (C + Z = 1)
LD Load
MUL
NEG
NOP
OR
Multiply
Negate (2's compl)
No Operation
OR operation
Function/Example
Unsigned <= dst <= src
X,A = X * A neg $10
POP Pop from the Stack
A = A + M pop reg pop CC push Y
C = 0
PUSH
RCF
RET
RIM
RLC
RRC
RSP
SBC
SCF
SIM
Push onto the Stack
Reset carry flag
Subroutine Return
Enable Interrupts
Rotate left true C
Rotate right true C
Reset Stack Pointer
Substract with Carry
Set carry flag
Disable Interrupts
SLA
SLL
SRL
SRA
Shift left Arithmetic
Shift left Logic
Shift right Logic
Shift right Arithmetic
SUB Substraction
SWAP SWAP nibbles
TNZ
TRAP
WFI
XOR
Test for Neg & Zero
S/W trap
Wait for Interrupt
Exclusive OR
I1:0 = 10 (level 0)
C <= A <= C
C => A => C
S = Max allowed
A = A - M - C
C = 1
I1:0 = 11 (level 3)
C <= A <= 0
C <= A <= 0
0 => A => C
A7 => A => C
A = A - M
A7-A4 <=> A3-A0 tnz lbl1
S/W interrupt
A = A XOR M
Dst
M
M
M reg, CC
M
M
M
Src reg, M M, reg
A, X, Y X, Y, A reg, M
A reg
CC
M reg, M reg, M
A reg, M reg, M reg, M reg, M
A reg, M
A
I1 H I0 N Z C
0
N Z
0
N Z C
N Z
I1 H I0 N Z C
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
N Z C
N Z C
N Z C
1
N Z C
N Z C
0 Z C
N Z C
N Z C
N Z
N Z
N Z
0
164/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
12.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all voltages are referred to V
SS
.
12.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values
Unless otherwise specified the minimum and maximum values are guaranteed in the worst conditions of ambient temperature, supply voltage and frequencies by tests in production on 100% of the devices with an ambient temperature at T
A and T
A range).
=T
A
=25°C max (given by the selected temperature
Data based on characterization results, design simulation and/or technology characteristics are indicated in the table footnotes and are not tested in production. Based on characterization, the minimum and maximum values refer to sample tests and represent the mean value plus or minus three times the standard deviation (mean±3 Σ ).
12.1.2 Typical values
Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T
A
=25°C, V
DD
=5V.They are given only as design guidelines and are not tested.
12.1.3 Typical curves
Unless otherwise specified, all typical curves are given only as design guidelines and are not tested.
12.1.4 Loading capacitor
The loading conditions used for pin parameter measurement are shown in
.
Figure 84. Pin loading conditions
Figure 85. Pin input voltage
V
IN
ST7 PIN
ST7 PIN
C
L
12.1.5 Pin input voltage
The input voltage measurement on a pin of the device is described in
165/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Stresses above those listed as “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device under these condi-
12.2.1 Voltage Characteristics tions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Symbol Ratings
V
DD
- V
SS
V
PP
- V
SS
Supply voltage
Programming Voltage
V
IN
1) & 2)
Input Voltage on true open drain pin
V
ESD(MM)
Input voltage on any other pin
|
∆
V
DDx
| and |
∆
V
SSx
| Variations between different digital power pins
|V
SSA
- V
SSx
| Variations between digital and analog ground pins
V
ESD(HBM)
Electro-static discharge voltage (Human Body Model)
Electro-static discharge voltage (Machine Model)
12.2.2 Current Characteristics
Maximum value
6.5
13
V
SS
-0.3 to 6.5
V
SS
-0.3 to V
DD
+0.3
50
50
Unit
V mV see
Symbol
I
I
VDD
VSS
I
IO
Ratings
Total current into V
DD
power lines (source)
3)
Total current out of V
SS
ground lines (sink)
3)
Output current sunk by any standard I/O and control pin
Output current sunk by any high sink I/O pin
Maximum value
150
150
25
50
Unit mA
Output current source by any I/Os and control pin - 25
Injected current on V
PP
pin
Injected current on RESET pin
± 5
± 5 mA
I
INJ(PIN)
2) & 4)
Injected current on OSC1 and OSC2 pins ± 5
Injected current on PC6 (Flash devices only)
Injected current on any other pin
5) & 6)
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and control pins)
5)
+ 5
± 5
Σ
I
INJ(PIN)
2)
± 25
Notes:
1. Directly connecting the RESET and I/O pins to V
DD
or V
SS could damage the device if an unintentional internal reset is generated or an unexpected change of the I/O configuration occurs (for example, due to a corrupted program counter).
To guarantee safe operation, this connection has to be done through a pull-up or pull-down resistor (typical: 4.7k
Ω
for
RESET, 10k
Ω
for I/Os). For the same reason, unused I/O pins must not be directly tied to V
DD
2. I
INJ(PIN)
must never be exceeded. This is implicitly insured if V
IN
or V
SS
.
maximum cannot be respected, the injection current must be limited externally to the I while a negative injection is induced by V
IN
<V
SS
maximum must always be respected
maximum is respected. If V
IN
INJ(PIN)
value. A positive injection is induced by V
IN
>V
DD
. For true open-drain pads, there is no positive injection current, and the corresponding V
IN
3. All power (V
DD
) and ground (V
SS
) lines must always be connected to the external supply.
For best reliability, it is recommended to avoid negative injection of more than 1.6mA.
5. When several inputs are submitted to a current injection, the maximum
Σ
I and negative injected currents (instantaneous values). These results are based on characterisation with
Σ
I mum current injection on four I/O port pins of the device.
INJ(PIN)
is the absolute sum of the positive
INJ(PIN)
maxi-
6. True open drain I/O port pins do not accept positive injection.
166/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.2.3 Thermal Characteristics
Symbol
T
STG
T
J
Ratings Value
Storage temperature range -65 to +150
Maximum junction temperature (see Section 13.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS )
Unit
°C
12.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS
12.3.1 General Operating Conditions
Symbol f
CPU
V
DD
T
A
Parameter
Internal clock frequency
Conditions
Standard voltage range (except Flash
Write/Erase)
Operating Voltage for Flash Write/Erase V
PP
= 11.4 to 12.6V
1 Suffix Version
5 Suffix Version
Ambient temperature range 6 or A Suffix Versions
7 or B Suffix Versions
C Suffix Version
Figure 86. f
CPU
Max Versus V
DD
Min
0
3.8
4.5
0
-10
-40
-40
-40
Max
8
5.5
5.5
70
85
85
105
125
Unit
MHz
V
°C f
CPU
[MHz]
8
FUNCTIONALITY
NOT GUARANTEED
IN THIS AREA
6
4
2
1
0
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.5
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]
5.5
FUNCTIONALITY
GUARANTEED
IN THIS AREA
(UNLESS
OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
IN THE TABLES
OF PARAMETRIC
DATA)
Note: Some temperature ranges are only available with a specific package and memory size. Refer to Ordering Information.
167/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
OPERATING CONDITIONS (Cont’d)
12.3.2 Operating Conditions with Low Voltage Detector (LVD)
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
.
Symbol
V
IT+(LVD)
V
IT-(LVD)
V hys(LVD)
Vt
POR t g(VDD)
Reset release threshold
(V
DD
rise)
Reset generation threshold
(V
DD
fall)
Parameter Conditions Min
VD level = High in option byte 4.0
1)
VD level = Med. in option byte
3)
VD level = Low in option byte
3)
3.55
2.95
1)
1)
VD level = High in option byte
VD level = Med. in option byte
3)
VD level = Low in option byte
3)
3.8
3.35
1)
2.8
1)
LVD voltage threshold hysteresis
1)
V
IT+(LVD)
-V
IT-(LVD)
150
V
DD
rise time
1)2)
Flash device, LVD enabled
ROM device, LVD enabled
6
µ s/V
6
µ s/V
V
DD
glitches filtered (not detected) by LVD
1)
Typ
4.2
3.75
3.15
4.0
3.55
3.0
200
Max
4.5
4.0
1)
3.35
1)
4.25
1)
3.75
1)
3.15
1)
250
20ms/V
100ms/V
40
Unit
V mV ns
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production for ROM devices only.
2. When Vt
POR
V
IT+(LVD)
is faster than 100
threshold.
µ s/V, the Reset signal is released after a delay of max. 42µs after V
DD
crosses the
3. If the medium or low thresholds are selected, the detection may occur outside the specified operating voltage range.
Below 3.8V, device operation is not guaranteed.
12.3.3 Auxiliary Voltage Detector (AVD) Thresholds
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
.
V
V
V
Symbol
IT+(AVD)
IT-(AVD) hys(AVD)
∆
V
IT-
1
(V
DD
0
⇒
⇒
0 AVDF flag toggle threshold rise)
1 AVDF flag toggle threshold
(V
DD
fall)
Parameter
AVD voltage threshold hysteresis
Voltage drop between AVD flag set and LVD reset activated
V
IT+(AVD)
Conditions
VD level = High in option byte
VD level = Med. in option byte
VD level = Low in option byte
VD level = High in option byte
VD level = Med. in option byte
VD level = Low in option byte
-V
IT-(AVD)
V
IT-(AVD)
-V
IT-(LVD)
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production for ROM devices only.
Min
4.4
1)
3.95
1)
3.4
1)
4.2
3.75
1)
3.2
1)
Typ
4.6
4.15
3.6
4.4
4.0
3.4
200
450
Max
4.9
4.4
1)
3.8
1)
4.65
1)
4.2
1)
3.6
1)
Unit
V mV mV
12.3.4 External Voltage Detector (EVD) Thresholds
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
.
V
V
Symbol
IT+(EVD)
IT-(EVD)
V hys(EVD)
Parameter
1
⇒
0 AVDF flag toggle threshold
(V
DD rise)
1)
0
⇒
1 AVDF flag toggle threshold
(V
DD
fall)
1)
EVD voltage threshold hysteresis V
IT+(EVD)
Conditions
-V
IT-(EVD)
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
Min
1.15
1.1
Typ
1.26
1.2
200
Max
1.35
1.3
Unit
V mV
168/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS
The following current consumption specified for the ST7 functional operating modes over temperature range does not take into account the clock source current consumption. To get the total device consumption, the two current values must be added (except for HALT mode for which the clock is stopped).
12.4.1 CURRENT CONSUMPTION
Symbol Parameter Conditions
Flash Devices ROM Devices
Unit
I
I
DD
DD
Supply current in RUN mode
2)
Supply current in SLOW mode
Supply current in WAIT mode
Supply current in SLOW WAIT mode
Supply current in HALT mode
2)
2)
3)
2)
Supply current in ACTIVE-HALT mode
4) f f f
OSC f
OSC
OSC
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=4MHz, f
CPU
=8MHz, f
CPU
=16MHz, f
=1MHz
=2MHz
=4MHz
CPU
=8MHz f f f
OSC f
OSC
OSC
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=4MHz, f
CPU
=8MHz, f
CPU
=16MHz, f
=62.5kHz
=125kHz
=250kHz
CPU
=500kHz f f f
OSC f
OSC
OSC
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=4MHz, f
CPU
=8MHz, f
CPU
=16MHz, f
=1MHz
=2MHz
=4MHz
CPU
=8MHz f f f
OSC f
OSC
OSC
OSC
=2MHz, f
CPU
=4MHz, f
CPU
=8MHz, f
CPU
=16MHz, f
=62.5kHz
=125kHz
=250kHz
CPU
=500kHz
-40°C
≤
T
A
≤
+85°C
-40°C
≤
T
A
≤
+125°C f f
OSC
OSC
=2MHz
=4MHz f
OSC
=8MHz f
OSC
=16MHz
1.3
2.0
3.6
7.1
600
700
800
1100
1.0
1.5
2.5
4.5
580
650
770
1050
<1
<1
80
160
325
650
10
50
25
50
100
200
1.3
2.0
3.3
6.0
200
300
600
1200
2.0
3.0
5.0
10.0
1800
2100
2400
3000
<1
<1
15
30
60
120
1.0
1.5
2.5
4.5
70
100
200
350
1.3
2.0
3.6
7.1
600
700
800
1100
3.0
4.0
5.0
7.0
1200
1300
1800
2000
3.0
5.0
8.0
15.0
2700
3000
3600
4000
10
50
No max. guaranteed mA
µ mA
µ
µ
µ
A
A
A
A
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V
DD
max. and f
CPU
max.
2. Measurements are done in the following conditions:
- Program executed from RAM, CPU running with RAM access. The increase in consumption when executing from Flash is 50%.
- All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V
DD
or V
SS
(no load)
- All peripherals in reset state.
- LVD disabled.
- Clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave.
- In SLOW and SLOW WAIT mode, f
CPU
is based on f
OSC
divided by 32.
To obtain the total current consumption of the device, add the clock source (
3. All I/O pins in push-pull 0 mode (when applicable) with a static value at V
DD based on characterization results, tested in production at V
DD
max. and f
CPU
or VSS (no load), LVD disabled. Data
max.
4. Data based on characterisation results, not tested in production. All I/O pins in push-pull 0 mode (when applicable) with a static value at V
DD
or V
SS
(no load); clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, LVD disabled. To obtain the
total current consumption of the device, add the clock source consumption ( Section 12.4.2
).
169/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
7
6
5
4
9
8
3
2
1
0
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.4.1.1 Power Consumption vs f
CPU
: Flash Devices
Figure 87. Typical I
DD
in RUN mode Figure 89. Typical I
DD
in WAIT mode
8MHz
4MHz
2MHz
1MHz
6
5
8MHz
4MHz
2MHz
1MHz
4
3
2
1
0
3.2
3.6
4 4.4
Vdd (V)
4.8
5.2
5.5
3.2
3.6
4 4.4
Vdd (V)
4.8
5.2
Figure 88. Typical I
DD
1.20
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
3.2
500kHz
250kHz
125kHz
62.5kHz
3.6
in SLOW mode
4 4.4
Vdd (V)
4.8
5.2
5.5
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
Figure 90. Typ. I
DD
in SLOW-WAIT mode
1.20
1.00
500kHz
250kHz
125kHz
62.5kHz
0.80
3.2
3.6
4 4.4
Vdd (V)
4.8
5.2
5.5
5.5
170/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.4.2 Supply and Clock Managers
The previous current consumption specified for the ST7 functional operating modes over temperature range does not take into account the clock source current consumption. To get the total device consumption, the two current values must be added (except for HALT mode).
Symbol
I
DD(RCINT)
Parameter
Supply current of internal RC oscillator
I
DD(RES)
I
DD(PLL)
I
DD(LVD)
Supply current of resonator oscillator
1) & 2)
PLL supply current
LVD supply current
V
DD
= 5V
V
DD
= 5V
Conditions Typ Max
625
360
150 300
Unit
µ
A
Notes:
1.. Data based on characterization results done with the external components specified in
production.
2. As the oscillator is based on a current source, the consumption does not depend on the voltage.
171/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.4.3 On-Chip Peripherals
Measured on S72F521R9T3 on TQFP64 generic board T
A
= 25°C f
CPU
=4MHz.
Symbol
I
DD(TIM)
I
DD(ART)
I
DD(SPI)
I
DD(SCI)
I
DD(I2C)
I
DD(ADC)
I
DD(CAN)
Parameter
16-bit Timer supply current
1)
ART PWM supply current
2)
SPI supply current
3)
SCI supply current
4)
I2C supply current
5)
ADC supply current when converting
6)
CAN supply current
5)
Conditions
V
DD
=
5.0V
V
DD
=
5.0V
V
DD
=
5.0V
V
DD
=
5.0V
V
DD
=
5.0V
V
DD
=
5.0V
V
DD
=
5.0V
Typ
50
75
400
400
175
400
400
Notes:
1. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration (timer counter running at f
CPU
/4) and timer counter stopped (only TIMD bit set). Data valid for one timer.
2. Data based on a differential I
DD
(only TCE bit set).
measurement between reset configuration (timer stopped) and timer counter enabled
3. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration (SPI disabled) and a permanent SPI master communication at maximum speed (data sent equal to 55h).This measurement includes the pad toggling consumption.
4. Data based on a differential I
DD mit sequence.
measurement between SCI low power state (SCID=1) and a permanent SCI data trans-
5. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration (I2C disabled) and a permanent I2C master communication at 100kHz (data sent equal to 55h). This measurement include the pad toggling consumption (27kOhm external pull-up on clock and data lines).
6. Data based on a differential I
DD
measurement between reset configuration and continuous A/D conversions.
7. Data based on a differential IDD measurement between reset configuration (CAN disabled) and a permanent CAN data transmit sequence with RX and TX connected together. This measurement include the pad toggling consumption.
Unit
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
µ
A
172/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
.
12.5.1 General Timings
Symbol Parameter Conditions t c(INST)
Instruction cycle time f
CPU
=8MHz t v(IT)
Interrupt reaction time
2) t v(IT)
=
∆ t c(INST)
+ 10 f
CPU
=8MHz
12.5.2 External Clock Source
Symbol
V
OSC1H
V
OSC1L t w(OSC1H) t w(OSC1L) t r(OSC1) t f(OSC1)
I
L
Parameter
OSC1 input pin high level voltage
OSC1 input pin low level voltage
OSC1 high or low time
3)
OSC1 rise or fall time
3)
OSC1 Input leakage current
Conditions
V
SS
≤
V
IN
≤
V
DD
Figure 91. Typical Application with an External Clock Source
V
OSC1H
90%
10%
V
OSC1L t r(OSC1) t f(OSC1) t w(OSC1H)
Min
2
250
10
1.25
Typ
1)
3
375
Max
12
1500
22
2.75
Min
V
DD
-1
V
SS
5
Typ t w(OSC1L)
Max
V
DD
V
SS
+1
Unit
V
15
±1 ns
µ
A
Unit t
CPU ns t
CPU
µ s
EXTERNAL
CLOCK SOURCE
OSC2
OSC1
Not connected internally f
OSC
I
L
ST72XXX
Notes:
1. Data based on typical application software.
2. Time measured between interrupt event and interrupt vector fetch.
∆ t c(INST) the current instruction execution.
is the number of t
CPU
cycles needed to finish
3. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.
173/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.5.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with four different Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators. All the information given in this paragraph are based on characterization results with specified typical external components. In the application, the resonator and the load capacitors have to be placed as close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to minimize output distortion and start-up stabilization time. Refer to the crystal/ceramic resonator manufacturer for more details (frequency, package, accuracy...).
Symbol f
OSC
R
F
C
L1
C
L2
Parameter
Oscillator Frequency
1)
Conditions
LP: Low power oscillator
MP: Medium power oscillator
MS: Medium speed oscillator
HS: High speed oscillator
Feedback resistor
2)
Recommended load capacitance versus equivalent serial resistance of the crystal or ceramic resonator (R
S
)
R
S
R
S
=200
Ω
=200
Ω
R
R
S
S
=200
Ω
=100
Ω
LP oscillator
MP oscillator
MS oscillator
HS oscillator
Min
20
22
22
18
15
1
>2
>4
>8
Max
40
56
46
33
33
2
4
8
16
Unit
MHz k
Ω pF
Unit i
2
Symbol Parameter
OSC2 driving current
V
DD
=5V
V
IN
=V
SS
Conditions
LP oscillator
MP oscillator
MS oscillator
HS oscillator
Figure 92. Typical Application with a Crystal or Ceramic Resonator
WHEN RESONATOR WITH
INTEGRATED CAPACITORS i
2
Typ
80
160
310
610 f
OSC
C
L1 OSC1
Max
150
250
460
910
µ
A
RESONATOR R
F
C
L2
OSC2
ST72XXX
Notes:
1. The oscillator selection can be optimized in terms of supply current using an high quality resonator with small R
S
Refer to crystal/ceramic resonator manufacturer for more details.
value.
2. Data based on characterisation results, not tested in production.
174/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
Supplier f
OSC
(MHz)
2
4
8
16
Typical Ceramic Resonators
Reference
2)
CSTCC2M00G56A-R0
CSTCR4M00G55B-R0
CSTCE8M00G55A-R0
CSTCE16M0G53A-R0
Recommended OSCRANGE
Option bit configuration
MP Mode
3)
MS Mode
HS Mode
HS Mode
Notes:
1. Resonator characteristics given by the ceramic resonator manufacturer.
2. SMD = [-R0: Plastic tape package ( ∅ =180mm), -B0: Bulk]
LEAD = [-A0: Flat pack package (Radial taping Ho= 18mm), -B0: Bulk]
3. LP mode is not recommended for 2 MHz resonator because the peak to peak amplitude is too small (>0.8V)
For more information on these resonators, please consult www.murata.com
175/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.5.4 RC Oscillators
Symbol f
OSC (RCINT)
Parameter
Internal RC oscillator frequency
Figure 93. Typical f
OSC(RCINT)
vs T
A
Conditions
T
A
=25°C, V
DD
=5V
Min
2
Typ
3.5
Max
5.6
Unit
MHz
Note: To reduce disturbance to the RC oscillator, it is recommended to place decoupling capacitors between V
DD
and V
SS
as shown in
4
3.8
3.6
3.4
3.2
3
-45 0 25
T
A
(°C)
Vdd = 5V
Vdd = 5.5V
70 130
176/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.5.5 PLL Characteristics
Symbol f
OSC
Parameter
PLL input frequency range
∆ f
CPU
/ f
CPU
Instantaneous PLL jitter
1)
Conditions
ROM device, f
OSC
= 4 MHz.
Flash device, f
OSC
= 4 MHz.
Flash device, f
OSC
= 2 MHz.
Min
2
Typ
0.7
1.0
2.5
Max
4
2
2.5
4.0
Unit
MHz
%
Note:
1. Data characterized but not tested.
The user must take the PLL jitter into account in the application (for example in serial communication or sampling of high frequency signals). The PLL jitter is a periodic effect, which is integrated over several
CPU cycles. Therefore the longer the period of the application signal, the less it will be impacted by the
PLL jitter.
cies of less than 125KHz, the jitter is negligible.
Figure 94. Integrated PLL Jitter vs signal frequency
1
+/-Jitter (%)
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
FLASH typ
ROM max
ROM typ
4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 500 kHz 250 kHz 125 kHz
Application Frequency
Note 1: Measurement conditions: f
CPU
= 8MHz.
177/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS
12.6.1 RAM and Hardware Registers
Symbol
V
RM
Parameter
Data retention mode
1)
Conditions
HALT mode (or RESET)
Min
1.6
Typ Max Unit
V
12.6.2 FLASH Memory
DUAL VOLTAGE HDFLASH MEMORY
Symbol f
CPU
V
PP
Parameter
Operating frequency
Programming voltage
3)
Conditions
Read mode
Write / Erase mode
4.5V
≤
V
DD
≤
5.5V
RUN mode (f
CPU
= 4MHz)
Write / Erase
Power down mode / HALT
Read (V
PP
=12V)
Write / Erase
Min
0
1
2)
11.4
Typ Max
2)
8
8
12.6
3
Unit
MHz
V
I
DD
Supply current
4) mA
I
PP
V
PP
current
4) t
VPP
Internal stabilization time t
RET
Data retention
N
RW
T
PROG
T
ERASE
Write erase cycles
Programming or erasing temperature range
T
T
A
A
=55°C
=25°C
20
100
-40
0
1
10
25
10
200
30
85
µA mA
µs years cycles
°C
Notes:
1. Minimum V
DD
supply voltage without losing data stored in RAM (in HALT mode or under RESET) or in hardware registers (only in HALT mode). Not tested in production.
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
3. V
PP
must be applied only during the programming or erasing operation and not permanently for reliability reasons.
4. Data based on simulation results, not tested in production.
Warning: Do not connect 12V to V
PP
before V
DD
is powered on, as this may damage the device.
178/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS
Susceptibility tests are performed on a sample basis during product characterization.
12.7.1 Functional EMS (Electro Magnetic
Susceptibility)
Based on a simple running application on the product (toggling 2 LEDs through I/O ports), the product is stressed by two electro magnetic events until a failure occurs (indicated by the LEDs).
■ ESD: Electro-Static Discharge (positive and negative) is applied on all pins of the device until a functional disturbance occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-4-2 standard.
■ FTB: A Burst of Fast Transient voltage (positive and negative) is applied to V
DD
and V
SS
through a 100pF capacitor, until a functional disturbance occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-4-
4 standard.
A device reset allows normal operations to be resumed. The test results are given in the table below based on the EMS levels and classes defined in application note AN1709.
12.7.1.1 Designing hardened software to avoid noise problems
EMC characterization and optimization are performed at component level with a typical application environment and simplified MCU software. It
Symbol
V
FESD
V
FFTB
V
FFTB
.
should be noted that good EMC performance is highly dependent on the user application and the software in particular.
Therefore it is recommended that the user applies
EMC software optimization and prequalification tests in relation with the EMC level requested for his application.
Software recommendations:
The software flowchart must include the management of runaway conditions such as:
– Corrupted program counter
– Unexpected reset
– Critical Data corruption (control registers...)
Prequalification trials:
Most of the common failures (unexpected reset and program counter corruption) can be reproduced by manually forcing a low state on the RE-
SET pin or the Oscillator pins for 1 second.
To complete these trials, ESD stress can be applied directly on the device, over the range of specification values. When unexpected behaviour is detected, the software can be hardened to prevent unrecoverable errors occurring (see application note AN1015)
Parameter Conditions
Voltage limits to be applied on any I/O pin to induce a functional disturbance f
Flash device: V
OSC
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25°C,
=
8MHz, conforms to IEC 1000-4-2
ROM device: V
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25°C, f
O-
SC
=
8MHz,conforms to IEC 1000-4-2
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be applied through 100pF on V
DD
and V
DD pins to induce a functional disturbance
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be applied through 100pF on V
DD
and V
DD pins to induce a functional disturbance
Flash device: V
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25°C, f
OSC
=
8
MHz, conforms to IEC 1000-4-4
Flash device: V
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25°C, f
OSC
=
8
MHz, conforms to IEC 1000-4-4
Level/
Class
4B
3B
3B
3B
179/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.7.2 Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)
Based on a simple application running on the product (toggling 2 LEDs through the I/O ports), the product is monitored in terms of emission. This emission test is in line with the norm SAE J 1752/
3 which specifies the board and the loading of each pin.
Symbol
S
EMI
Parameter
Peak level
Conditions
Monitored
Frequency Band
V
DD
=
5V, T
A
=
+25°C,
TQFP64 14x14 package conforming to SAE J 1752/3
0.1MHz to 30MHz
30MHz to 130MHz
130MHz to 1GHz
SAE EMI Level
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. Refer to Application Note AN1709 for data on other package types.
Max vs. [f
OSC
/f
CPU
] Unit
8/4MHz 16/8MHz
15
20
0
2.5
15
27
5
3.0
dB
-
µ
V
180/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.7.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings (Electrical
Sensitivity)
Based on three different tests (ESD, LU and DLU) using specific measurement methods, the product is stressed in order to determine its performance in terms of electrical sensitivity. For more details, refer to the application note AN1181.
12.7.3.1 Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
Electro-Static Discharges (a positive then a negative pulse separated by 1 second) are applied to the pins of each sample according to each pin combination. The sample size depends on the number of supply pins in the device (3 parts*(n+1) supply pin). Two models can be simulated: Human
Body Model and Machine Model. This test conforms to the JESD22-A114A/A115A standard.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
V
ESD(HBM)
V
ESD(MM)
Ratings
Electro-static discharge voltage
(Human Body Model)
Electro-static discharge voltage
(Machine Model)
T
A
=
+25°C
T
A
=
+25°C
Conditions Maximum value
1)
Unit
2000
200
V
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
12.7.3.2 Static and Dynamic Latch-Up
■ LU: 3 complementary static tests are required on 10 parts to assess the latch-up performance.
A supply overvoltage (applied to each power supply pin) and a current injection (applied to each input, output and configurable I/O pin) are performed on each sample. This test conforms to the EIA/JESD 78 IC latch-up standard. For more details, refer to the application note
AN1181.
■ DLU: Electro-Static Discharges (one positive then one negative test) are applied to each pin of 3 samples when the micro is running to assess the latch-up performance in dynamic mode. Power supplies are set to the typical values, the oscillator is connected as near as possible to the pins of the micro and the component is put in reset mode. This test conforms to the IEC1000-4-2 and SAEJ1752/3 standards. For more details, refer to the application note AN1181.
Electrical Sensitivities
Symbol
LU
DLU
Parameter
Static latch-up class
Dynamic latch-up class
Conditions
T
A
T
A
T
A
=
=
+25°C
+85°C
=
+125°C
V
DD
=
5.5V, f
OSC
=
4MHz, T
A
=
+25°C
Class
1)
A
A
A
A
Notes:
1. Class description: A Class is an STMicroelectronics internal specification. All its limits are higher than the JEDEC specifications, that means when a device belongs to Class A it exceeds the JEDEC standard. B Class strictly covers all the
JEDEC criteria (international standard).
181/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS
12.8.1 General Characteristics
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
OSC
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Symbol
V
V
V
IL
IH
V hys
V
IL
V
IH hys
Parameter
Input low level voltage
1)
Input high level voltage
1)
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis
2)
Input low level voltage
1)
Input high level voltage
1)
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis
2)
Injected Current on PC6 (Flash devices only)
I
INJ(PIN)
3)
Σ
I
INJ(PIN)
3)
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and control pins)
I
L
I
S
R
PU
C
IO t f(IO)out t r(IO)out t w(IT)in
Injected Current on an I/O pin
Input leakage current
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor
5)
I/O pin capacitance
Output high to low level fall time
1)
Output low to high level rise time
1)
External interrupt pulse time
6)
Conditions
CMOS ports
TTL ports
V
DD
=5V
V
SS
V
IN
≤
V
IN
=
V
SS
≤
V
DD
V
DD
=5V
C
L
=50pF
Between 10% and 90%
Min
0.7xV
DD
2
0
50
1
Typ
0.7
1
400
120
5
25
25
Max
0.3xV
DD
0.8
+4
± 4
± 25
±1
250
Figure 95. Unused I/O Pins configured as input
90
Unit mA
µ
A k
Ω pF ns t
CPU
Figure 96. Typical I
PU
vs. V
DD
with V
IN
=V
SS
V
V
DD ST7XXX
80
10k
Ω
UNUSED I/O PORT
70
60
Ta=1 40°C
Ta=9 5°C
Ta=2 5°C
Ta=-45 °C
50
10k Ω
UNUSED I/O PORT 40
30
ST7XXX
20
10
Note: I/O can be left unconnected if it is configured as output
(0 or 1) by the software. This has the advantage of
greater EMC robustness and lower cost.
0
2 2.5
3 3.5
4
V dd(V)
4.5
5 5.5
6
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.
3. When the current limitation is not possible, the V
IN tion. A positive injection is induced by V
IN
maximum must be respected, otherwise refer to I
>V
DD
while a negative injection is induced by V
IN
<V
SS
INJ(PIN)
specifica-
4. Configuration not recommended, all unused pins must be kept at a fixed voltage: using the output mode of the I/O for example and leaving the I/O unconnected on the board or an external pull-up or pull-down resistor (see
based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.
5. The R
PU
pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I
PU current characteristics de-
6. To generate an external interrupt, a minimum pulse width has to be applied on an I/O port pin configured as an external interrupt source.
182/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.8.2 Output Driving Current
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Min
V
OL
1)
V
OH
2)
Parameter
Output low level voltage for a standard I/O pin when 8 pins are sunk at same time
(see
Output low level voltage for a high sink I/O pin when 4 pins are sunk at same time
(see
Output high level voltage for an I/O pin when 4 pins are sourced at same time
(see
Conditions
I
IO
=+5mA
I
IO
=+2mA
I
IO
=+20mA, T
A
T
A
≤
85°C
≥
85°C
I
IO
=+8mA
I
IO
=-5mA, T
A
T
A
≤
85°C
≥
85°C
I
IO
=-2mA
V
DD
V
DD
-1.4
-1.6
V
DD
-0.7
Max
1.2
0.5
1.3
1.5
0.6
Unit
V
Figure 97. Typical V
OL
at V
DD
=5V (standard)
1.4
Figure 99. Typical V
OH
at V
DD
=5V
5.5
1.2
5
1
4.5
0.8
4
0.6
3.5
0.4
0.2
Ta =14 0°C "
Ta =95 °C
Ta =25 °C
Ta =-45 °C
3
2.5
V dd= 5V 1 40°C m in
V dd= 5v 95°C m in
V dd= 5v 25°C m in
V dd= 5v -4 5°C m in
0
0 0.005
0.01
0.015
Iio(A )
Figure 98. Typical V
OL
at V
DD
=5V (high-sink)
1
0.9
0.8
2
-0.01
-0.008
-0.006
-0.004
-0.002
0
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
Ta= 140 °C
Ta= 95 °C
Ta= 25 °C
Ta= -45°C
0
0 0.01
0.02
0.03
Iio(A)
Notes:
1. The I
IO
current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 12.2.2
and the sum of I
IO
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I
VSS
.
2. The I
IO
current sourced must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in
and the sum of
I
IO
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I
VDD
. True open drain I/O pins do not have V
OH
.
183/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
Figure 100. Typical V
OL
vs. V
DD
(standard)
1
Ta= -4 5°C
0.9
Ta= 25°C
0.8
Ta= 95°C
Ta= 140 °C
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
2 2.5
3 3.5
4
Vdd(V )
4.5
5 5.5
6
Figure 101. Typical V
OL
vs. V
DD
(high-sink)
0 .6
0 .5
0 .4
0 .3
0 .2
0 .1
Ta= 14 0°C
Ta=9 5°C
Ta=2 5°C
Ta=-45 °C
0
2 2.5
3 3.5
4
V dd (V )
4.5
Figure 102. Typical V
DD
-V
OH
vs. V
DD
5.5
5 5.5
5
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
Ta= -4 5°C
Ta= 25°C
Ta= 95°C
Ta= 140°C
2
2 2.5
3 3.5
4
Vdd(V)
4.5
5 5.5
6
6
0.45
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
2 2 .5
3 3.5
4
Vdd(V )
4.5
Ta=-4 5°C
Ta=2 5°C
Ta=9 5°C
Ta=1 40°C
5 5.5
6
0 .8
0 .6
0 .4
0 .2
0
2
1 .6
1 .4
1 .2
1
Ta = 140 °C
Ta = 95 °C
Ta = 25 °C
Ta = -45°C
2.5
3 3.5
4
V dd(V )
4.5
5 5.5
6
6
5
Ta= -4 5°C
Ta= 25°C
Ta= 95°C
Ta= 140°C 4
3
2
1
0
2 2.5
3 3.5
4
Vdd(V)
4.5
5 5.5
6
184/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS
12.9.1 Asynchronous RESET Pin
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Symbol
V
IL
V
IH
V hys
V
OL
I
IO
R
ON
Parameter
Input low level voltage
1)
Input high level voltage
1)
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis
2)
Output low level voltage
3)
Input current on RESET pin
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor
Conditions
V
DD
=5V I
IO
=+2mA
Min
0.85xV
DD
20
Typ
2.5
0.2
2
30
Max
0.16xV
DD
0.5
120 t w(RSTL)out
Generated reset pulse duration
Stretch applied on external pulse
0 42
6)
Internal reset sources 20 30 42
6) t h(RSTL)in t g(RSTL)in
External reset pulse hold time
4)
Filtered glitch duration
5)
2.5
200
Unit
V
V mA k
Ω
µ s
µ s
µ s ns
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels.
3. The I
IO
current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 12.2.2
and the sum of I
IO
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I
VSS
.
4. To guarantee the reset of the device, a minimum pulse has to be applied to the RESET pin. All short pulses applied on the RESET pin with a duration below t h(RSTL)in
can be ignored.
5. The reset network (the resistor and two capacitors) protects the device against parasitic resets, especially in noisy environments.
6. Data guaranteed by design, not tested in production.
185/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
Figure 103. RESET pin protection when LVD is enabled.
1)2)3)4)
V
DD
ST72XXX
EXTERNAL
RESET
Required Optional
(note 3)
0.01
µ F
1M Ω
R
ON
Filter
INTERNAL
RESET
PULSE
GENERATOR
WATCHDOG
LVD RESET
Figure 104. RESET pin protection when LVD is disabled.
1)
Recommended for EMC
V
DD
V
DD
V
DD
USER
EXTERNAL
RESET
CIRCUIT
0.01
µ
F
4.7k
Ω
R
ON
Filter
0.01
µ F
PULSE
GENERATOR
Required
ST72XXX
INTERNAL
RESET
WATCHDOG
Note 1:
– The reset network protects the device against parasitic resets.
– The output of the external reset circuit must have an open-drain output to drive the ST7 reset pad. Otherwise the device can be damaged when the ST7 generates an internal reset (LVD or watchdog).
– Whatever the reset source is (internal or external), the user must ensure that the level on the RESET pin can go below the V
IL internally.
– Because the reset circuit is designed to allow the internal RESET to be output in the RESET pin, the user must ensure that the current sunk on the RESET pin is less than the absolute maximum value specified for I
INJ(RESET)
.
in
Note 2: When the LVD is enabled, it is recommended not to connect a pull-up resistor or capacitor. A 10nF pull-down capacitor is required to filter noise on the reset line.
Note 3: In case a capacitive power supply is used, it is recommended to connect a 1M
Ω
pull-down resistor to the RESET pin to discharge any residual voltage induced by the capacitive effect of the power supply (this will add 5µA to the power consumption of the MCU).
Note 4: Tips when using the LVD:
– 1. Check that all recommendations related to reset circuit have been applied (see notes above).
– 2. Check that the power supply is properly decoupled (100nF + 10µF close to the MCU). Refer to AN1709 and
AN2017. If this cannot be done, it is recommended to put a 100nF + 1M
Ω
pull-down on the RESET pin.
– 3. The capacitors connected on the RESET pin and also the power supply are key to avoid any start-up marginality.
In most cases, steps 1 and 2 above are sufficient for a robust solution. Otherwise: replace 10nF pull-down on the
RESET pin with a 5µF to 20µF capacitor.
186/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.9.2 ICCSEL/V
PP
Pin
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter
V
IL
V
IH
I
L
Input low level voltage
1)
Input high level voltage
1)
Input leakage current
Conditions
FLASH versions
ROM versions
FLASH versions
ROM versions
V
IN
=V
SS
Min Max
V
SS
V
SS
0.2
0.3xV
DD
V
DD
-0.1
12.6
0.7xV
DD
V
DD
±1
Figure 105. Two typical Applications with ICCSEL/V
PP
Pin
2)
Unit
V
µ
A
ICCSEL/V
PP
ST72XXX
PROGRAMMING
TOOL
10k
Ω
V
PP
ST72XXX
Notes:
1. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.
2. When ICC mode is not required by the application ICCSEL/V
PP
pin must be tied to V
SS
.
187/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
OSC
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function characteristics (output compare, input capture, external clock, PWM output...).
12.10.1 8-Bit PWM-ART Auto-Reload Timer
Symbol Parameter t res(PWM)
PWM resolution time f
EXT f
PWM
Res
PWM
V
OS
ART external clock frequency
PWM repetition rate
PWM resolution
PWM/DAC output step voltage
Conditions f
CPU
=8MHz
V
DD
=5V, Res=8-bits
Min
1
125
0
0
Typ
20
Max f
CPU
/2 f
CPU
/2
8
Unit t
CPU ns
MHz bit mV
12.10.2 16-Bit Timer
Symbol t w(ICAP)in
Parameter
Input capture pulse time t res(PWM)
PWM resolution time f
EXT f
PWM
Res
PWM
Timer external clock frequency
PWM repetition rate
PWM resolution
Conditions f
CPU
=8MHz
Min
1
2
250
0
0
Typ Max f
CPU
/4 f
CPU
/4
16
Unit t
CPU t
CPU ns
MHz
MHz bit
188/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
12.11.1 SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
,
Symbol Parameter
Master f
SCK
1/t c(SCK)
SPI clock frequency
Slave
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function characteristics
(SS, SCK, MOSI, MISO).
Conditions f
CPU
=8MHz
Min f
CPU
/128
0.0625
0
Unit
MHz f
CPU
=8MHz
Max f
CPU
2
/4 f
CPU
/2
4 t r(SCK) t f(SCK) t su(SS) t h(SS) t w(SCKH) t w(SCKL) t su(MI) t su(SI) t h(MI) t h(SI) t a(SO) t dis(SO) t v(SO) t h(SO) t v(MO) t h(MO)
SPI clock rise and fall time
SS setup time
SS hold time
SCK high and low time
Data input setup time
Data input hold time
Data output access time
Data output disable time
Data output valid time
Data output hold time
Data output valid time
Data output hold time
Slave
Slave
Master
Slave
Master
Slave
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave (after enable edge)
Master (before capture edge) see I/O port pin description
120
120
100
90
100
100
100
100
0
0
0.25
0.25
120
240
90 ns t
CPU
Figure 106. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=0 3)
SS
INPUT t su(SS) t c(SCK) t h(SS)
CPHA=0
CPOL=0
CPHA=0
CPOL=1 t a(SO) t w(SCKH) t w(SCKL) t v(SO) t h(SO) t r(SCK) t f(SCK) t dis(SO)
MISO
OUTPUT see note 2 t su(SI)
MSB OUT t h(SI)
BIT6 OUT LSB OUT see note 2
MOSI
INPUT
MSB IN BIT1 IN LSB IN
Notes:
1. Data based on design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends on the I/O port configuration.
3. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV
DD
and 0.7xV
DD
.
189/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
Figure 107. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=1 1)
SS
INPUT t su(SS) t c(SCK)
CPHA=1
CPOL=0
CPHA=1
CPOL=1 t a(SO) t w(SCKH) t w(SCKL) t v(SO)
MISO
OUTPUT see note 2
HZ t su(SI)
MSB OUT t h(SI)
BIT6 OUT
MOSI
INPUT
MSB IN BIT1 IN t h(SS) t h(SO) t t r(SCK) f(SCK)
LSB OUT
LSB IN
Figure 108. SPI Master Timing Diagram 1)
SS
INPUT t c(SCK)
CPHA=0
CPOL=0
CPHA=0
CPOL=1
CPHA=1
CPOL=0
CPHA=1
CPOL=1 t w(SCKH) t w(SCKL) t su(MI) t h(MI)
MISO
INPUT t v(MO)
MSB IN t h(MO)
BIT6 IN
MOSI
OUTPUT see note 2 MSB OUT BIT6 OUT t r(SCK) t f(SCK)
LSB IN
LSB OUT t dis(SO) see note 2 see note 2
Notes:
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV
DD
and 0.7xV
DD
.
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends of the I/O port configuration.
190/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.11.2 I
2
C - Inter IC Control Interface
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
,
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function characteristics
(SDAI and SCLI). The ST7 I
2
C interface meets the requirements of the Standard I
2
C communication protocol described in the following table.
Symbol Parameter t w(SCLL) t w(SCLH) t su(SDA) t h(SDA) t r(SDA) t r(SCL) t f(SDA) t f(SCL) t h(STA) t su(STA) t su(STO) t w(STO:STA)
C b
SCL clock low time
SCL clock high time
SDA setup time
SDA data hold time
SDA and SCL rise time
SDA and SCL fall time
START condition hold time
Repeated START condition setup time
STOP condition setup time
STOP to START condition time (bus free)
Capacitive load for each bus line
Standard mode I
2
C
Min
1)
Max
1)
4.7
4.0
250
0
3)
4.0
4.7
4.0
4.7
1000
300
400
Figure 109. Typical Application with I
2
C Bus and Timing Diagram 4)
V
DD
V
DD
Fast mode I
2
C
5)
Min
1)
Max
1)
1.3
0.6
100
0
2)
900
3)
20+0.1C
b
20+0.1C
b
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.3
300
300
400
Unit
µ s ns
µ s
µ s
µ s pF
4.7k
Ω
4.7k
Ω
SDAI
I
2
C BUS
100 Ω
100 Ω
SCLI
ST72XXX
REPEATED START
START t su(STA) t w(STO:STA)
START
SDA t f(SDA) t r(SDA) t su(SDA) t h(SDA)
STOP
SCK t h(STA) t w(SCKH) t w(SCKL) t r(SCK) t f(SCK) t su(STO)
Notes:
1. Data based on standard I
2
C protocol requirement, not tested in production.
2. The device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300ns for the SDA signal in order to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
3. The maximum hold time of the START condition has only to be met if the interface does not stretch the low period of
SCL signal.
4. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV
DD
and 0.7xV
DD
.
5. At 4MHz f
CPU
, max.I
2
C speed (400kHz) is not achievable. In this case, max. I
2
C speed will be approximately 260KHz.
191/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
The following table gives the values to be written in the I2CCCR register to obtain the required I
2
C
SCL line frequency.
Table 28. SCL Frequency Table f
SCL
(kHz)
400
300
200
100
50
20
I2CCCR Value f
CPU
=4 MHz.
f
CPU
=8 MHz.
V
DD
= 4.1 V V
DD
= 5 V
R
P
=3.3k
Ω
R
P
=4.7k
Ω
R
P
=3.3k
Ω
R
P
=4.7k
Ω
R
V
DD
= 4.1 V
P
=3.3k
Ω
R
P
=4.7k
Ω
R
V
DD
= 5 V
P
=3.3k
Ω
R
P
=4.7k
Ω
NA NA NA NA 83h 83 83h 83h
NA
83h
10h
24h
5Fh
NA
83h
10h
24h
5Fh
NA
83h
10h
24h
5Fh
NA
83h
10h
24h
5Fh
85h
8Ah
24h
4Ch
FFh
85h
89h
23h
4Ch
FFh
85h
8Ah
24h
4Ch
FFh
85h
8Ah
23h
4Ch
FFh
Legend:
R
P
= External pull-up resistance f
SCL
= I
2
C speed
NA = Not achievable
Note:
– For speeds around 200 kHz, achieved speed can have ± 5% tolerance
– For other speed ranges, achieved speed can have ± 2% tolerance
The above variations depend on the accuracy of the external components used.
12.11.3 CAN - Controller Area Network Interface
Subject to general operating condition for V
DD
, f
OSC
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function characteristics
(CANTX and CANRX).
Symbol t p(RX:TX)
Parameter
CAN controller propagation time
1)
Conditions Min Typ Max
60
Unit ns
Notes:
1. Data based on simulation results, not tested in production
192/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
12.12 10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for V
DD
, f
CPU
, and T
A
unless otherwise specified.
Typ Symbol f
ADC
V
AREF
V
AIN
I lkg
I lkg
R
AIN
C
AIN f
AIN
Parameter Conditions
ADC clock frequency
Analog reference voltage
Conversion voltage range
1)
0.7*V
DD
≤
V
AREF
≤
V
DD
Positive input leakage current for analog input
Negative input leakage current on robust analog pins (ROM devices only)
2
Positive input leakage current for analog input
Negative input leakage current on robust analog pins (ROM devices only)
2
-40°C
≤
T
A
≤
85°C range
Other T
A ranges
V
IN
<
V
SS,
| I
IN
|< 400µA on adjacent robust analog pin
-40°C
≤
T
A
≤
85°C range
Other T
A ranges
V
IN
<
V
SS,
| I
IN
|< 400µA on adjacent robust analog pin
External input impedance
External capacitor on analog input
Variation freq. of analog input signal
Min
0.4
3.8
V
SSA
5
5
Max
2
V
DD
V
AREF
±250
±1
6
±250
±1
6 see
and
2)3)4)
C
ADC t
ADC t
ADC
Internal sample and hold capacitor
Conversion time (Sample+Hold) f
CPU
=8MHz, SPEED=0 f
ADC
=2MHz
- No of sample capacitor loading cycles
- No. of Hold conversion cycles
12
7.5
4
11
Unit
MHz
V nA
µ
A
µ
A nA
µ
A
µ
A k
Ω pF
Hz pF
µ s
1/f
ADC
Notes:
1. Any added external serial resistor will downgrade the ADC accuracy (especially for resistance greater than 10k
Ω
). Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
2. For Flash devices: injecting negative current on any of the analog input pins significantly reduces the accuracy of any conversion being performed on any analog input. Analog pins of flash devices can be protected against negative injection by adding a Schottky diode (pin to ground). Injecting negative current on digital input pins degrades ADC accuracy espe-
I cially if performed on a pin close to the analog input pins. Any positive injection current within the limits specified for
INJ(PIN)
and
Σ
I
INJ(PIN)
in
does not affect the ADC accuracy.
193/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
Figure 110. R
AIN
max. vs f
ADC
with C
AIN
=0pF
1)
45
40
35
2 MHz
30
25
20
1 MHz
15
10
5
0
0 10 30 70
C
PARASITIC
(pF)
Figure 112. Typical A/D Converter Application
V
AIN
R
AIN
C
AIN
AINx
Figure 111. Recommended C
AIN
& R
AIN values.
2)
1000
100
V
DD
V
T
0.6V
V
T
0.6V
10
1
0.1
0.01
0.1
f
AIN
(KHz)
1
2k
Ω( max
)
10-Bit A/D
Conversion
I
L
±1
µ
A
Cain 10 nF
Cain 22 nF
Cain 47 nF
10
ST72XXX
C
ADC
12pF
Notes:
1. C
PARASITIC
represents the capacitance of the PCB (dependent on soldering and PCB layout quality) plus the pad capacitance (3pF). A high C
PARASITIC
value will downgrade conversion accuracy. To remedy this, f
ADC
should be reduced.
2. This graph shows that depending on the input signal variation (f
AIN decreased to allow the use of a larger serial resistor (R
AIN)
.
), C
AIN
can be increased for stabilization time and
194/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.12.1 Analog Power Supply and Reference
Pins
Depending on the MCU pin count, the package may feature separate V
AREF
and V
SSA analog power supply pins. These pins supply power to the
A/D converter cell and function as the high and low reference voltages for the conversion.
Separation of the digital and analog power pins allow board designers to improve A/D performance.
Conversion accuracy can be impacted by voltage drops and noise in the event of heavily loaded or badly decoupled power supply lines (see
12.12.2 General PCB Design Guidelines
).
12.12.2 General PCB Design Guidelines
To obtain best results, some general design and layout rules should be followed when designing the application PCB to shield the noise-sensitive, analog physical interface from noise-generating
CMOS logic signals.
– Use separate digital and analog planes. The analog ground plane should be connected to the digital ground plane via a single point on the
PCB.
Figure 113. Power Supply Filtering
– Filter power to the analog power planes. It is recommended to connect capacitors, with good high frequency characteristics, between the power and ground lines, placing 0.1µF and optionally, if needed 10pF capacitors as close as possible to the ST7 power supply pins and a 1 to 10µF capacitor close to the power source (see
).
– The analog and digital power supplies should be connected in a star network. Do not use a resistor, as V
AREF is used as a reference voltage by the A/D converter and any resistance would cause a voltage drop and a loss of accuracy.
– Properly place components and route the signal traces on the PCB to shield the analog inputs.
Analog signals paths should run over the analog ground plane and be as short as possible. Isolate analog signals from digital signals that may switch while the analog inputs are being sampled by the A/D converter. Do not toggle digital outputs on the same I/O port as the A/D input being converted.
ST72XXX
1 to 10
µ
F
ST7
DIGITAL NOISE
FILTERING
0.1
µ
F V
SS
V
DD
V
DD
POWER
SUPPLY
SOURCE
0.1
µ F V
AREF
EXTERNAL
NOISE
FILTERING
V
SSA
195/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
12.12.3 ADC Accuracy
Conditions: V
DD
=5V 1)
Symbol Parameter Conditions Typ Max
2)
Unit
|E
T
| Total unadjusted error
1)
|E
O
| Offset error
1)
|E
G
| Gain Error
1)
|E
D
| Differential linearity error
1)
|E
L
| Integral linearity error
1)
Notes:
CPU in run mode @ f
CPU in run mode @ f
ADC
ADC
2 MHz.
2 MHz.
3
2
0.5
1
1
4
3
3
2
2
LSB
1. ADC Accuracy vs. Negative Injection Current: Injecting negative current may reduce the accuracy of the conversion
Any positive injection current within the limits specified for I
INJ(PIN) accuracy.
and
Σ
I
INJ(PIN)
2. Data based on characterization results, monitored in production to guarantee 99.73% within ± max value from -40°C to 125°C (± 3
σ distribution limits).
Figure 114. ADC Accuracy Characteristics
Digital Result ADCDR
1023
1022
1021
1LSB
IDEAL
=
V – V
SSA
1024
E
T
7
6
5
2
1
4
3
0
V
SSA
1
E
O
2 3 4
1 LSB
E
L
IDEAL
5 6 7
(2)
E
D
(3)
(1)
E
G
1021 1022 1023 1024
V
AREF
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve
(2) The ideal transfer curve
(3) End point correlation line
E
T
=Total Unadjusted Error: maximum deviation between the actual and the ideal transfer curves.
E
O
=Offset Error: deviation between the first actual transition and the first ideal one.
E
G
=Gain Error: deviation between the last ideal transition and the last actual one.
E
D
=Differential Linearity Error: maximum deviation between actual steps and the ideal one.
E
L
=Integral Linearity Error: maximum deviation between any actual transition and the end point correlation line.
V in
(LSB
IDEAL
)
196/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
13 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
13.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA
Figure 115. 80-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
D
D1
E1 E
A1 b
A
A2 e
L1
L h c
Dim.
A
A1 0.05
mm
1.60
0.15 0.002
inches
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
0.063
0.006
A2 1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b 0.22
0.32
0.38 0.009 0.013 0.015
C 0.09
0.20 0.004
0.008
D
D1
16.00
14.00
0.630
0.551
E 16.00
0.630
E1 14.00
0.551
e
θ
0°
0.65
3.5° 7° 0°
0.026
3.5° 7°
L 0.45
0.60
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
L1 1.00
0.039
N
Number of Pins
80
Figure 116. 64-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
D
D1
E1 E
A1 b e
A
A2
L1
L h c
Dim.
mm inches
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
A
A1 0.05
1.60
0.15 0.002
0.063
0.006
A2 1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b 0.30
0.37
0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018
c 0.09
D
D1
0.20 0.004
16.00
14.00
0.630
0.551
0.008
E
E1
16.00
14.00
e
θ 0°
0.80
3.5° 7° 0°
0.031
3.5° 7°
L 0.45
0.60
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
L1 1.00
0.039
Number of Pins
N 64
0.630
0.551
197/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA (Cont’d)
Figure 117. 64-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
D
D1
E1 E b e
A1
A
A2
L1
L h c
Dim.
mm inches
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
1.60
0.063
A
A1 0.05
0.15 0.002
0.006
A2 1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b 0.17
0.22
0.27 0.007 0.009 0.011
c 0.09
0.20 0.004
0.008
D
D1
12.00
10.00
0.472
0.394
E
E1
N
12.00
10.00
e
θ
0°
0.50
3.5° 7° 0°
0.020
3.5° 7°
L 0.45
0.60
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
L1 1.00
0.039
Number of Pins
64
0.472
0.394
198/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
13.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
R thJA
Ratings
Package thermal resistance (junction to ambient)
TQFP80 14x14
TQFP64 14x14
TQFP64 10x10
Value
55
47
50
Unit
°C/W
P
D
T
Jmax
Power dissipation
1)
Maximum junction temperature
2)
500
150 mW
°C
Notes:
1. The power dissipation is obtained from the formula P
D and P
PORT
=P
INT
+P
is the port power dissipation determined by the user.
PORT
where P
INT
is the chip internal power (I
DD xV
DD
)
2. The average chip-junction temperature can be obtained from the formula T
J
= T
A
+ P
D
x RthJA.
199/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
13.3 SOLDERING INFORMATION
In accordance with the RoHS European directive, all STMicroelectronics packages will be converted in 2005 to lead-free technology, named ECO-
PACK
TM
(for a detailed roadmap, please refer to
PCN CRP/04/744 "Lead-free Conversion Program
- Compliance with RoHS", issued November 18th,
2004).
■ ECOPACK
TM
packages are qualified according to the JEDEC STD-020B compliant soldering profile.
■ Detailed information on the STMicroelectronic
ECOPACK
TM
transition program is available on www.st.com/stonline/leadfree/, with specific technical Application notes covering the main technical aspects related to lead-free conversion (AN2033, AN2034, AN2035,
AN2036).
Backward and forward compatibility:
The main difference between Pb and Pb-free soldering process is the temperature range.
– ECOPACK
TM
TQFP packages are fully compatible with Lead (Pb) containing soldering process
(see application note AN2034)
– TQFP Pb-packages are compatible with Leadfree soldering process, nevertheless it's the customer's duty to verify that the Pb-packages maximum temperature (mentioned on the Inner box label) is compatible with their Lead-free soldering temperature.
Table 29. Soldering Compatibility (wave and reflow soldering process)
Package Plating material devices Pb solder paste Pb-free solder paste
TQFP NiPdAu (Nickel-palladium-Gold) Yes Yes *
* Assemblers must verify that the Pb-package maximum temperature (mentioned on the Inner box label) is compatible with their Lead-free soldering process.
200/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
14 ST72521 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
Each device is available for production in user programmable versions (FLASH) as well as in factory coded versions (ROM/FASTROM).
ST72521B devices are ROM versions. ST72P521 devices are Factory Advanced Service Technique
ROM (FASTROM) versions: they are factory-programmed HDFlash devices. FLASH devices are shipped to customers with a default content, while
ROM/FASTROM factory coded parts contain the code supplied by the customer. This implies that
FLASH devices have to be configured by the customer using the Option Bytes while the ROM/FAS-
TROM devices are factory-configured.
14.1 FLASH OPTION BYTES
STATIC OPTION BYTE 0
7
WDG VD
0 7
STATIC OPTION BYTE 1
OSCTYPE OSCRANGE
0
Default 1 1 1
1
0
0
0 1 1 1 1 1
1
1
0
0
2
1
1
1
0
1 1
The option bytes allow the hardware configuration of the microcontroller to be selected. They have no address in the memory map and can be accessed only in programming mode (for example using a standard ST7 programming tool). The default content of the FLASH is fixed to FFh. To program the
FLASH devices directly using ICP, FLASH devices are shipped to customers with the internal RC clock source. In masked ROM devices, the option bytes are fixed in hardware by the ROM code (see option list).
OPTION BYTE 0
OPT7= WDG HALT Watchdog and HALT mode
This option bit determines if a RESET is generated when entering HALT mode while the Watchdog is active.
0: No Reset generation when entering Halt mode
1: Reset generation when entering Halt mode
OPT6= WDG SW Hardware or software watchdog
This option bit selects the watchdog type.
0: Hardware (watchdog always enabled)
1: Software (watchdog to be enabled by software)
OPT5 = Reserved, must be kept at default value.
OPT4:3= VD[1:0] Voltage detection
These option bits enable the voltage detection block (LVD, and AVD) with a selected threshold for the LVD and AVD (EVD+AVD).
Selected Low Voltage Detector VD1 VD0
LVD and AVD Off
Lowest Threshold: (V
DD
~3V)
Med. Threshold (V
DD
~3.5V)
Highest Threshold (V
DD
~4V)
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
Caution: If the medium or low thresholds are selected, the detection may occur outside the specified operating voltage range. Below 3.8V, device operation is not guaranteed.
For details on the
AVD and LVD threshold levels refer to section
201/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
ST72521 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
OPT2 = Reserved, must be kept at default value.
OPT5:4 = OSCTYPE[1:0] Oscillator Type
These option bits select the ST7 main clock source type.
OPT1= PKG0 Package selection bit 0
This option bit is used to select the package (see table in PKG1 option bit description).
Clock Source
1
OSCTYPE
0
Resonator Oscillator 0 0
OPT0= FMP_R Flash memory read-out protection
Read-out protection, when selected, provides a protection against Program Memory content extraction and against write access to Flash memory.
Erasing the option bytes when the FMP_R option is selected causes the whole user memory to be erased first, and the device can be reprogrammed.
Refer to
gramming Reference Manual for more details.
Note: Readout protection is not supported if LVD is enabled.
0: Read-out protection enabled
1: Read-out protection disabled
OPTION BYTE 1
OPT7= PKG1 Package selection bit 1
This option bit, with the PKG0 bit, selects the package.
Version Selected Package PKG 1 PKG 0
Reserved
Internal RC Oscillator
External Source
MP
MS
HS
0
1
1
OPT3:1 = OSCRANGE[2:0] Oscillator range
1
0
1
When the resonator oscillator type is selected, these option bits select the resonator oscillator current source corresponding to the frequency range of the used resonator. Otherwise, these bits are used to select the normal operating frequency range.
LP
Typ. Freq. Range
1~2MHz
2
0
OSCRANGE
1
0
0
0
M
(A)R
TQFP80
TQFP64
1
1
1
0
2~4MHz
4~8MHz
8~16MHz
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Note: On the chip, each I/O port has 8 pads. Pads that are not bonded to external pins are in input pull-up configuration after reset. The configuration of these pads must be kept at reset state to avoid added current consumption.
OPT6 = RSTC RESET clock cycle selection
This option bit selects the number of CPU cycles applied during the RESET phase and when exiting
HALT mode. For resonator oscillators, it is advised to select 4096 due to the long crystal stabilization time.
0: Reset phase with 4096 CPU cycles
1: Reset phase with 256 CPU cycles
OPT0 = PLLOFF PLL activation
This option bit activates the PLL which allows multiplication by two of the main input clock frequency.
The PLL must not be used with the internal RC oscillator or with external clock source. The PLL is guaranteed only with an input frequency between
2 and 4MHz.
0: PLL x2 enabled
1: PLL x2 disabled
CAUTION: the PLL can be enabled only if the
“OSC RANGE” (OPT3:1) bits are configured to
“MP - 2~4MHz”. Otherwise, the device functionality is not guaranteed.
202/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
ST72521 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
14.2 DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION AND TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE
Customer code is made up of the ROM/FAS-
TROM contents and the list of the selected options
(if any). The ROM/FASTROM contents are to be sent on diskette, or by electronic means, with the
S19 hexadecimal file generated by the development tool. All unused bytes must be set to FFh.
The selected options are communicated to
STMicroelectronics using the correctly completed
OPTION LIST appended.
Refer to application note AN1635 for information on the counter listing returned by ST after code has been transferred.
The STMicroelectronics Sales Organization will be pleased to provide detailed information on contractual points.
14.2.1 Version-Specific Sales Conditions
To satisfy the different customer requirements and to ensure that ST Standard Microcontrollers will consistently meet or exceed the expectations of each Market Segment, the Codification System for
Standard Microcontrollers clearly distinguishes products intended for use in automotive environments, from products intended for use in non-automotive environments.
It is the responsibility of the Customer to select the appropriate product for his application.
Figure 118. ROM Factory Coded Device Types
DEVICE PACKAGE VERSION / XXX
Code name (defined by STMicroelectronics)
1 = Standard 0 to +70 °C
3 = Standard -40 to +125 °C
5 = Standard -10 to +85 °C
6 = Standard -40 to +85 °C
A = Automotive -40 to +85 °C
B = Automotive -40 to +105 °C
C = Automotive -40 to +125 °C
T= Plastic Thin Quad Flat Pack
ST72521BR9, ST72521BR6
ST72521BAR9, ST72521BAR6
ST72521BM9
203/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
ST72521 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
ST72521B MICROCONTROLLER OPTION LIST
(Last update: December 2004)
Customer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone No: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference/ROM Code* : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*The ROM code name is assigned by STMicroelectronics.
ROM code must be sent in .S19 format. .Hex extension cannot be processed.
Device Type/Memory Size/Package (check only one option):
--------------------------------| ------------------------------------| -------------------------------------
| |
TQFP80:
TQFP64 14x14: |
|
TQFP64 10x10: |
---------------------------------
DIE FORM:
---------------------------------
|
|
80-pin:
64-pin: |
|
[ ] ST72521BM9
[ ] ST72521BR9
[ ] ST72521BAR9
--------------------------------------
60K
--------------------------------------
[ ]
[ ]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72521BR6
[ ] ST72521BAR6
-------------------------------------
32K
--------------------------------------
[ ]
Conditioning (check only one option):
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
| -----------------------------------------------------
Die Product (dice tested at 25°C only)
[ ] Tape & Reel [ ] Tray | [ ] Tape & Reel
| [ ] Inked wafer
| [ ] Sawn wafer on sticky foil
Version/ Temp. Range (do not check for die product).
Please refer to datasheet for specific sales conditions :
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
|
| |
| -------------------------------------------
Temp. Range
-------------------------------------------
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] |
|
|
[ ]
| [ ] |
|
|
| [ ] 0°C to +70°C
[ ] -10°C to +85°C
[ ] -40°C to +85°C
[ ] -40°C to +105°C
| [ ] | [ ] -40°C to +125°C
Special Marking: [ ] No [ ] Yes "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ " (10 char. max)
Authorized characters are letters, digits, '.', '-', '/' and spaces only.
Clock Source Selection:
[ ] Resonator: [ ] LP: Low power resonator (1 to 2 MHz)
[ ] MP: Medium power resonator (2 to 4 MHz)
[ ] MS: Medium speed resonator (4 to 8 MHz)
[ ] HS: High speed resonator (8 to 16 MHz)
[ ] Internal RC:
[ ] External Clock
PLL
LVD Reset [ ] Disabled
Reset Delay
Watchdog Selection:
Watchdog Reset on Halt:
Readout Protection:
[ ] Disabled [ ] Enabled
[ ] High threshold [ ] Med. threshold [ ] Low threshold
[ ] 256 Cycles [ ] 4096 Cycles
[ ] Software Activation
[ ] Reset
[ ] Disabled
[ ] Hardware Activation
[ ] No Reset
[ ] Enabled
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Please download the latest version of this option list from: http://www.st.com/mcu > downloads > ST7 microcontrollers > Option list
204/215
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
Table 30. Orderable Flash Device Types
Part Number
ST72F521AR6TC
ST72F521AR9TC
ST72F521R6TC
ST72F521R9TC
ST72F521M9TC
ST72F521AR6T3
ST72F521AR9T3
ST72F521R6T3
ST72F521R9T3
ST72F521M9T3
ST72F521AR6T6
ST72F521AR9T6
ST72F521R6T6
ST72F521R9T6
ST72F521M9T6
Version
Automotive
Standard
Standard
Package
TQFP64 10 x 10
TQFP64 14 x 14
TQFP80
TQFP64 10 x 10
TQFP64 14 x 14
TQFP80
TQFP64 10 x 10
TQFP64 14 x 14
TQFP80
32
60
32
60
60
32
60
60
60
Flash
Memory
(Kbytes)
32
60
32
60
60
32
ST72F521, ST72521B
Temp. Range
-40°C +125°C
-40°C +125°C
-40°C +85°C
205/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
14.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
STMicroelectronics offers a range of hardware and software development tools for the ST7 microcontroller family. Full details of tools available for the ST7 from third party manufacturers can be obtained from the STMicroelectronics Internet site: http//www.st.com.
Tools from these manufacturers include C compliers, evaluation tools, emulators and programmers.
Emulators
Two types of emulators are available from ST for the ST725 family:
■ ST7 DVP3 entry-level emulator offers a flexible and modular debugging and programming solution. SDIP42 & SDIP32 probes/adapters are included, other packages need a specific connection kit (refer to
)
■ ST7 EMU3 high-end emulator is delivered with everything (probes, TEB, adapters etc.) needed to start emulating the ST725. To configure it to emulate other ST7 subfamily devices, the active probe for the ST7EMU3 can be changed and the ST7EMU3 probe is designed for easy interchange of TEBs (Target Emulation Board).
.
In-circuit Debugging Kit
Two configurations are available from ST:
■ STXF521-IND/USB: Low-cost In-Circuit
Debugging kit from Softec Microsystems.
Includes STX-InDART/USB board (USB port)
■ STxF-INDART
Flash Programming tools
■
■ and a specific demo board for ST72521
(TQFP64)
ST7-STICK ST7 In-circuit Communication Kit, a complete software/hardware package for programming ST7 Flash devices. It connects to a host PC parallel port and to the target board or socket board via ST7 ICC connector.
ICC Socket Boards provide an easy to use and flexible means of programming ST7 Flash devices. They can be connected to any tool that supports the ST7 ICC interface, such as ST7
EMU3, ST7-DVP3, inDART, ST7-STICK, or many third-party development tools.
Evaluation boards
Three different Evaluation boards are available:
■
■
■
ST7232x-EVAL ST72F321/325/521 evaluation board, with ICC connector for programming capability. Provides direct connection to ST7-
DVP3 emulator. Supplied with daughter boards
(core module) for ST72F321, ST72F324,
ST72325 & ST72F521 (the ST72F32x chips are not included)
ST7MDT20-EVC/ xx
1 with CAB TQFP64 14x14 socket
ST7MDT20-EVY/ xx
1 with Yamaichi TQFP64
10x10 socket
Table 31. STMicroelectronics Development Tools
Supported
Products
ST72521M,
ST72F521M
ST72521AR,
ST72F521AR
ST72521R,
ST72F521R
ST7 DVP3 Series
Emulator
Emulation
Connection kit
ST7 EMU3 series
Emulator
Active Probe &
T.E.B.
ST7MDT20-DVP3
ST7MDT20-T80/
DVP
ST7MDT20-T6A/
DVP
ST7MDT20M-
EMU3
ST7MDT20M-TEB
Programming
ICC Socket Board
ST7SB20M/xx
1
ST7MDT20-T64/
DVP
Note 1: Add suffix /EU, /UK, /US for the power supply of your region.
206/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
Table 32. Suggested List of Socket Types
Device
TQFP64 14 x14
TQFP64 10 x10
TQFP80 14 X 14
Socket (supplied with ST7MDT20M-
EMU3)
CAB 3303262
YAMAICHI IC149-064-*75-*5
YAMAICHI IC149-080-*51-*5
Emulator Adapter (supplied with
ST7MDT20M-EMU3)
CAB 3303351
YAMAICHI ICP-064-6
YAMAICHI ICP-080-7
14.3.1 Socket and Emulator Adapter
Information
For information on the type of socket that is supplied with the emulator, refer to the suggested list
Note: Before designing the board layout, it is recommended to check the overall dimensions of the socket as they may be greater than the dimensions of the device.
For footprint and other mechanical information about these sockets and adapters, refer to the manufacturer’s datasheet (www.yamaichi.de for
TQFP64 10 x 10 and TQFP80 14 x 14 and www.cabgmbh.com for TQFP64 14 x 14)
Related Documentation
AN 978: ST7 Visual Develop Software Key Debugging Features
AN 1938: ST7 Visual Develop for ST7 Cosmic C toolset users
AN 1939: ST7 Visual Develop for ST7 Metroworks
C toolset users
AN 1940: ST7 Visual Develop for ST7 Assembler
Linker toolset users
207/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
14.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES
Table 33. ST7 Application Notes
AN1148
AN1149
AN1180
AN1276
AN1321
AN1325
AN1445
AN1475
AN1504
AN1602
AN1633
AN1712
AN1713
AN1753
AN1947
AN 976
AN 979
AN 980
AN1017
AN1041
AN1042
AN1044
AN1045
AN1046
AN1047
AN1048
AN1078
AN1082
AN1083
AN1105
AN1129
IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
AN1658
AN1720
AN1755
SERIAL NUMBERING IMPLEMENTATION
MANAGING THE READ-OUT PROTECTION IN FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS
A HIGH RESOLUTION/PRECISION THERMOMETER USING ST7 AND NE555
AN1756 CHOOSING A DALI IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY WITH ST7DALI
EXAMPLE DRIVERS
AN 969
AN 970
SCI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND PC
SPI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND EEPROM
AN 971
AN 972
AN 973
AN 974
I²C COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND M24CXX EEPROM
ST7 SOFTWARE SPI MASTER COMMUNICATION
SCI SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION WITH A PC USING ST72251 16-BIT TIMER
REAL TIME CLOCK WITH ST7 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE
AN1130
DRIVING A BUZZER THROUGH ST7 TIMER PWM FUNCTION
DRIVING AN ANALOG KEYBOARD WITH THE ST7 ADC
ST7 KEYPAD DECODING TECHNIQUES, IMPLEMENTING WAKE-UP ON KEYSTROKE
USING THE ST7 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS MICROCONTROLLER
USING ST7 PWM SIGNAL TO GENERATE ANALOG OUTPUT (SINUSOÏD)
ST7 ROUTINE FOR I²C SLAVE MODE MANAGEMENT
MULTIPLE INTERRUPT SOURCES MANAGEMENT FOR ST7 MCUS
ST7 S/W IMPLEMENTATION OF I²C BUS MASTER
UART EMULATION SOFTWARE
MANAGING RECEPTION ERRORS WITH THE ST7 SCI PERIPHERALS
ST7 SOFTWARE LCD DRIVER
PWM DUTY CYCLE SWITCH IMPLEMENTING TRUE 0% & 100% DUTY CYCLE
DESCRIPTION OF THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL PERIPHERALS REGISTERS
ST72141 BLDC MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE AND FLOWCHART EXAMPLE
ST7 PCAN PERIPHERAL DRIVER
PWM MANAGEMENT FOR BLDC MOTOR DRIVES USING THE ST72141
AN INTRODUCTION TO SENSORLESS BRUSHLESS DC MOTOR DRIVE APPLICATIONS
WITH THE ST72141
USING THE ST7263 FOR DESIGNING A USB MOUSE
HANDLING SUSPEND MODE ON A USB MOUSE
USING THE ST7263 KIT TO IMPLEMENT A USB GAME PAD
BLDC MOTOR START ROUTINE FOR THE ST72141 MICROCONTROLLER
USING THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL MCU IN SENSOR MODE
USING THE ST7 USB LOW-SPEED FIRMWARE V4.X
EMULATED 16 BIT SLAVE SPI
DEVELOPING AN ST7265X MASS STORAGE APPLICATION
STARTING A PWM SIGNAL DIRECTLY AT HIGH LEVEL USING THE ST7 16-BIT TIMER
16-BIT TIMING OPERATIONS USING ST7262 OR ST7263B ST7 USB MCUS
DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE (DFU) IMPLEMENTATION IN ST7 NON-USB APPLICATIONS
GENERATING A HIGH RESOLUTION SINEWAVE USING ST7 PWMART
SMBUS SLAVE DRIVER FOR ST7 I2C PERIPHERALS
SOFTWARE UART USING 12-BIT ART
ST7MC PMAC SINE WAVE MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE LIBRARY
208/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Table 33. ST7 Application Notes
AN 983
AN 985
AN 986
AN 987
AN 988
AN 989
AN1039
AN1064
AN1071
IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION
GENERAL PURPOSE
AN1476 LOW COST POWER SUPPLY FOR HOME APPLIANCES
AN1526
AN1709
ST7FLITE0 QUICK REFERENCE NOTE
EMC DESIGN FOR ST MICROCONTROLLERS
AN1752 ST72324 QUICK REFERENCE NOTE
PRODUCT EVALUATION
AN 910
AN 990
AN1077
AN1086
AN1103
AN1150
AN1151
AN1278
PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKING
ST7 BENEFITS VERSUS INDUSTRY STANDARD
OVERVIEW OF ENHANCED CAN CONTROLLERS FOR ST7 AND ST9 MCUS
U435 CAN-DO SOLUTIONS FOR CAR MULTIPLEXING
IMPROVED B-EMF DETECTION FOR LOW SPEED, LOW VOLTAGE WITH ST72141
BENCHMARK ST72 VS PC16
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON BETWEEN ST72254 & PC16F876
LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) SOLUTIONS
PRODUCT MIGRATION
AN1131 MIGRATING APPLICATIONS FROM ST72511/311/214/124 TO ST72521/321/324
AN1322
AN1365
MIGRATING AN APPLICATION FROM ST7263 REV.B TO ST7263B
GUIDELINES FOR MIGRATING ST72C254 APPLICATIONS TO ST72F264
AN1604 HOW TO USE ST7MDT1-TRAIN WITH ST72F264
PRODUCT OPTIMIZATION
AN 982
AN1014
USING ST7 WITH CERAMIC RESONATOR
HOW TO MINIMIZE THE ST7 POWER CONSUMPTION
AN1015
AN1040
AN1070
AN1181
AN1324
AN1502
AN1529
AN1530
AN1605
AN1636
AN1828
SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING MICROCONTROLLER EMC PERFORMANCE
MONITORING THE VBUS SIGNAL FOR USB SELF-POWERED DEVICES
ST7 CHECKSUM SELF-CHECKING CAPABILITY
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE MEASUREMENT
CALIBRATING THE RC OSCILLATOR OF THE ST7FLITE0 MCU USING THE MAINS
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH ST7 HDFLASH MEMORY
EXTENDING THE CURRENT & VOLTAGE CAPABILITY ON THE ST7265 VDDF SUPPLY
ACCURATE TIMEBASE FOR LOW-COST ST7 APPLICATIONS WITH INTERNAL RC OSCILLA-
TOR
USING AN ACTIVE RC TO WAKEUP THE ST7LITE0 FROM POWER SAVING MODE
UNDERSTANDING AND MINIMIZING ADC CONVERSION ERRORS
PIR (PASSIVE INFRARED) DETECTOR USING THE ST7FLITE05/09/SUPERLITE
AN1946
AN1971
SENSORLESS BLDC MOTOR CONTROL AND BEMF SAMPLING METHODS WITH ST7MC
ST7LITE0 MICROCONTROLLED BALLAST
PROGRAMMING AND TOOLS
AN 978 ST7 VISUAL DEVELOP SOFTWARE KEY DEBUGGING FEATURES
KEY FEATURES OF THE COSMIC ST7 C-COMPILER PACKAGE
EXECUTING CODE IN ST7 RAM
USING THE INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODE WITH ST7
ST7 SERIAL TEST CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
STARTING WITH ST7 ASSEMBLY TOOL CHAIN
GETTING STARTED WITH THE ST7 HIWARE C TOOLCHAIN
ST7 MATH UTILITY ROUTINES
WRITING OPTIMIZED HIWARE C LANGUAGE FOR ST7
HALF DUPLEX USB-TO-SERIAL BRIDGE USING THE ST72611 USB MICROCONTROLLER
209/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Table 33. ST7 Application Notes
IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION
AN1106
AN1179
TRANSLATING ASSEMBLY CODE FROM HC05 TO ST7
PROGRAMMING ST7 FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS IN REMOTE ISP MODE (IN-SITU PRO-
GRAMMING)
AN1446
AN1477
AN1478
USING THE ST72521 EMULATOR TO DEBUG A ST72324 TARGET APPLICATION
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH XFLASH MEMORY
PORTING AN ST7 PANTA PROJECT TO CODEWARRIOR IDE
AN1527
AN1575
AN1576
AN1577
AN1601
AN1603
AN1635
AN1754
DEVELOPING A USB SMARTCARD READER WITH ST7SCR
ON-BOARD PROGRAMMING METHODS FOR XFLASH AND HDFLASH ST7 MCUS
IN-APPLICATION PROGRAMMING (IAP) DRIVERS FOR ST7 HDFLASH OR XFLASH MCUS
DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE (DFU) IMPLEMENTATION FOR ST7 USB APPLICATIONS
SOFTWARE IMPLEMENTATION FOR ST7DALI-EVAL
USING THE ST7 USB DEVICE FIRMWARE UPGRADE DEVELOPMENT KIT (DFU-DK)
ST7 CUSTOMER ROM CODE RELEASE INFORMATION
DATA LOGGING PROGRAM FOR TESTING ST7 APPLICATIONS VIA ICC
AN1796
AN1900
AN1904
AN1905
FIELD UPDATES FOR FLASH BASED ST7 APPLICATIONS USING A PC COMM PORT
HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION FOR ST7DALI-EVAL
ST7MC THREE-PHASE AC INDUCTION MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE LIBRARY
ST7MC THREE-PHASE BLDC MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE LIBRARY
SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION
AN1711 SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR COMPENSATING ST7 ADC ERRORS
AN1827
AN2009
AN2030
IMPLEMENTATION OF SIGMA-DELTA ADC WITH ST7FLITE05/09
PWM MANAGEMENT FOR 3-PHASE BLDC MOTOR DRIVES USING THE ST7FMC
BACK EMF DETECTION DURING PWM ON TIME BY ST7MC
210/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
15 KNOWN LIMITATIONS
15.1 ALL FLASH AND ROM DEVICES
15.1.1 External RC option
The External RC clock source option described in previous datasheet revisions is no longer supported and has been removed from this specification.
15.1.2 Safe Connection of OSC1/OSC2 Pins
The OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins must not be left unconnected otherwise the ST7 main oscillator may start and, in this configuration, could generate an f
OSC
clock frequency in excess of the allowed maximum (>16MHz.), putting the ST7 in an un-
safe/undefined state. Refer to section 6.2 on page
.
15.1.3 Reset pin protection with LVD Enabled
As mentioned in note 2 below
186 , when the LVD is enabled, it is recommended
not to connect a pull-up resistor or capacitor. A
10nF pull-down capacitor is required to filter noise on the reset line.
15.1.4 Unexpected Reset Fetch
If an interrupt request occurs while a “POP CC” instruction is executed, the interrupt controller does not recognise the source of the interrupt and, by default, passes the RESET vector address to the
CPU.
Workaround
To solve this issue, a “POP CC” instruction must always be preceded by a “SIM” instruction.
15.1.5 Clearing active interrupts outside interrupt routine
When an active interrupt request occurs at the same time as the related flag is being cleared, an unwanted reset may occur.
Note: clearing the related interrupt mask will not generate an unwanted reset
Concurrent interrupt context
The symptom does not occur when the interrupts are handled normally, i.e.
when:
– The interrupt flag is cleared within its own interrupt routine
– The interrupt flag is cleared within any interrupt routine
– The interrupt flag is cleared in any part of the code while this interrupt is disabled
If these conditions are not met, the symptom can be avoided by implementing the following sequence:
Perform SIM and RIM operation before and after resetting an active interrupt request.
Example:
SIM reset interrupt flag
RIM
Nested interrupt context:
The symptom does not occur when the interrupts are handled normally, i.e. when:
– The interrupt flag is cleared within its own interrupt routine
– The interrupt flag is cleared within any interrupt routine with higher or identical priority level
– The interrupt flag is cleared in any part of the code while this interrupt is disabled
If these conditions are not met, the symptom can be avoided by implementing the following sequence:
PUSH CC
SIM reset interrupt flag
POP CC
211/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
15.1.6 SCI Wrong Break duration
Description
A single break character is sent by setting and resetting the SBK bit in the SCICR2 register. In some cases, the break character may have a longer duration than expected:
- 20 bits instead of 10 bits if M=0
- 22 bits instead of 11 bits if M=1.
In the same way, as long as the SBK bit is set, break characters are sent to the TDO pin. This may lead to generate one break more than expected.
Occurrence
The occurrence of the problem is random and proportional to the baudrate. With a transmit frequency of 19200 baud (f
CPU
=8MHz and SCI-
BRR=0xC9), the wrong break duration occurrence is around 1%.
Workaround
If this wrong duration is not compliant with the communication protocol in the application, software can request that an Idle line be generated before the break character. In this case, the break duration is always correct assuming the application is not doing anything between the idle and the break. This can be ensured by temporarily disabling interrupts.
The exact sequence is:
- Disable interrupts
- Reset and Set TE (IDLE request)
- Set and Reset SBK (Break Request)
- Re-enable interrupts
15.1.7 16-bit Timer PWM Mode
In PWM mode, the first PWM pulse is missed after writing the value FFFCh in the OC1R register
(OC1HR, OC1LR). It leads to either full or no PWM during a period, depending on the OLVL1 and
OLVL2 settings.
15.1.8 CAN Cell Limitations
Limitation
1
Omitted SOF bit
CPU write access
(more than one cycle) corrupts CAN frame
Unexpected Message transmission
Bus Off State Not Entered
WKPS Functionality
Flash x x x
2
ROM x x x
4 x
3 x=limitation present
1
For details see section 10.8.5 on page 146
2
Software workaround possible using modified
WKPS bit.
3
Functionality modified for Unexpected Message
Transmission workaround in Flash.
4
Limitation present on ROM Rev W and Rev Z.
Not present in Flash and ROM Rev Y.
15.1.9 I2C Multimaster
In multimaster configurations, if the ST7 I2C receives a START condition from another I2C master after the START bit is set in the I2CCR register and before the START condition is generated by the ST7 I2C, it may ignore the START condition from the other I2C master. In this case, the ST7 master will receive a NACK from the other device.
On reception of the NACK, ST7 can send a re-start and Slave address to re-initiate communication
212/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
15.2 ALL FLASH DEVICES
15.2.1 Internal RC Oscillator with LVD
The internal RC can only be used if LVD is enabled.
15.2.2 I/O behaviour during ICC mode entry sequence
Symptom
In 80-pin devices (Flash), both Port G and H are forced to output push-pull during ICC mode entry sequence. 80-pin ROM devices are not impacted by this issue.
Details
To enable programming of all flash sectors, the device must leave USER mode and be configured in ICC mode. Once in ICC mode, the ICC protocol enables an ST7 microcontroller to communicate with an external controller (such as a PC). ICC mode is entered by applying 39 pulses on the IC-
CDATA signal during reset. To enter ICC mode, the device goes through other modes, some modes are critical because the I/Os PG[7:0] and
PH[7:0] are forced to output push-pull.
Impact on the Application
The PG and PH I/O ports are forced to output push-pull during three pulses on ICCDATA. In certain circumstances, this behaviour can lead to a short-circuit between the I/O signals and V
DD
, V
SS or an output signal of another application component.
In addition, switching these I/Os to output mode can cause the application to leave reset state, disturbing the ICC communication and preventing the user from programming the flash.
15.2.3 Read-out protection with LVD
The LVD is not supported if Readout protection is enabled.
213/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
16 REVISION HISTORY
Table 34. Revision History
Date
7-Dec-2004
4-Mar-2005
18-May-2005
Revision
3
4
5
Description of Changes
Added
Reinstated
“I/O behaviour during ICC mode entry sequence” on page 213
Reinstated “BUSOFF not entered” in
“CAN Cell Limitations” on page 212
Added “flash only” to PC6 Iinj spec in
Added Note on SMbus to Section 10.7
Static current consumption modified in section 12.8 on page 182
Updated footnote and
Figure 103 and Figure 104 on page 186
Modified VtPOR in
Added note 4 below Table of
“CAN Cell Limitations” on page 212
Corrected MCO description in Table 1
Updated footnotes and
Figure 103 and Figure 104 on page 186
.
Updated soldering information in
Added Suffix 3 to
Updated partnumbers in
Added
“Reset pin protection with LVD Enabled” on page 211
214/215
ST72F521, ST72521B
Notes:
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specifications mentioned in this publication are subject to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without express written approval of STMicroelectronics.
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics.
All other names are the property of their respective owners
© 2005 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved
STMicroelectronics group of companies
Australia – Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China – Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan -
Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States of America www.st.com
215/215
Download
Annonce